HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5295 - Contract - David Wood Construction Inc - FS #7 Facility - 09_26_1996RESOLUTION NO. 5295
September 26, 1996
Item #23
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract, attached herewith, by and
between the City of Lubbock and David Wood Construction, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas, to
install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the construction of Fire Station #7
facility, and any associated documents, which Contract shall be spread upon the minutes of the
Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this
Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this 26th
ATTEST:
arold Willard, Interim City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
qt��& haad4�
Victor Kilman, chasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
f)dm' ld G. Va
City Attorney
DG V : da/ccdocs/woodcnst. res
September 18, 1996
Assistant
day of September , 1996.
ALEX "TY" COOKE, MAYOR PRO TEM
507175
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY
BID #13677
6�6yrn
rn
0
Z
0
CITY OF LTTB--BOCK x
Lubbock, Texas
z:
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
806-767-2167
Office of
Purchasing
MAILED TO VENDOR: AUGUST 30,1996
CLOSE DATE: SEPTEMBER 5,1996 @ 2:00 PM
NEW CLOSE DATE: SEPTEMBER 10,1996 @ 3:00 PM
ITB #13677 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY
ADDENDUM # 1
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named ITB. Where any item called
for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum,
shall remain in effect.
1. New bid proposal form with alternates included (alternates are in 01031).
2. Addenda items dated August 29, 1996 from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
3. Extended closing date to September 10,1996 @ 3:00 PAL
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (806)767-2164
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID
r
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
r
F
PLACE:
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: 13677 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY
Bid of
(hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
7
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
i contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
t construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to fumish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents.
MATERIALS: ($ )
SERVICES: ($ )
TOTAL BID: ($ )
ALTERNATE NO. 1(ADD): FLAGPOLE
r TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 1 ($ )
ALTERNATE NO. 2 (ADD): EMERGENCY GENERATOR
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.2
-• ALTERNATE NO. 3 (ADD): ADDITIONAL (12) METAL LOCKERS
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 3 ($ )
!~ (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
i
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
rr "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 260 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive
calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees
to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive
calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the
general conditions of the contract documents.
T Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
7' Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if
required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars ($ ),
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by
the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the
7Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check
or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
r
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
r documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
9
Authorized Signature
7 (Printed or Typed Name)
Company
Address
r '" City, County
State Zip Code
Telephone: -
Fax:
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST:
r
Secretary
I
r
F
F
PAR IIILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS
4010 AVENUE R. LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412
(806) 747-0161 ■ FAX (806) 747-7146
ADDENDUM NO. 1, August 29, 1996
RE: City of Lubbock Fire Department
Fire Station No. 7
202 Slide Road
Lubbock, Texas
TO: Plan Holders
This Addendum forms a part of the Contract Documents and modifies the o!r/iginal Bidding Documents
dated July 31, 1996 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the
Bid Form. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification.
Make the following changes to the Construction Documents:
I. CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Section 01031 -ALTERNATES
1. 1.2.B.1. - replace with the following: Provide emergency generator, transfer switch,
connections, etc., complete and ready to use.
2. Add 1.2.B.4. - Emergency panel is in the base bid.
3. Add 1.2.B.5. - Some light fixtures must change as a part of this alternate.
4. 1.2.C.2. - change 10500 to 10505.
5. Delete paragraph 1.3.A.5.
B. Section 02830 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1. 2.3.A.l.a. - eliminate barbed wire.
2. 2.3.A.1.b. - should read "top rail".
C. Section 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
1. 1.7.A. - change warranty from 5 years to a 1 year warranty.
2. Doors are to be medium width stiles.
D. Section 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
1. 2.2.B. La. - change to "Top -Hinged".
2. 2.2.B.Lb. - change to "Out -Swinging".
E. Section 08710 -HARDWARE
1. 3.3 Set #1; (for aluminum doors). Coordinate who is to supply this hardware with
General Contractor.
r
�i
8602-96 PAGE 1 OF 4 ADDENDUM 1
i
2. 3.3 set #2; add door closer CO2021
3. 3.3 Set #3; clarification - lock cylinder is not required.
F. Section 08800 - GLAZING
1. Changed glass type descriptions I-1 and I-2. See revised spec, paragraph 2.2.13 and
2.2.0 - Attachment Number 1.
G. Section 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
1. Two copies were inadvertently included in specifications. Delete copy included hgh=
Section 08800 GLAZING.
H. Add specification Section 10162 - BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS.
See Attachment Number 2.
I. Section 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
' 1. Paragraph 2. LA.12 should read "Top: FLAT"
2. Delete paragraph 2.1.A.16.
J. Section 12621 - PORTABLE CHALK, MARKER, AND TACK BOARDS
t 1. Change section title to "Marker Boards".
2. Delete all references to "Portable". All units are "fixed, wall mounted" units.
r" 3. Paragraph 2.3.5.c. and d. - delete.
4. Paragraph 3.1.B. - delete.
II. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS
A. On the cover sheet, add the following code information:
Code Used:
UBC-1991
Construction Type:
Type II-N
Occupancy:
Dormitory - R-3
Apparatus - B-1
Office - B-2
Area:
7216.5 sq. ft. gross
B. On Sheet C2, include the following note for the rolling gate:
"Egress from the site through the electro-mechanical gate shall be controlled by a
vehicle detector in conjunction with a formed loop (with a range as required) buried
in the pavement on the west side of the gate. The detector unit shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and shall not require periodic
retuning. Detector unit shall have adjustable frequency and sensitivity and shall
provide single direction control of traffic. Manufacturer's literature will be
required as a submittal for this unit."
C. On Sheet C3
r 1. The proposed grading shall be adjusted as shown on Attachment Number 3, dated 8-23-
96. This revision is required to tie proposed grades back into correct existing grades.
2. At gate operator detail, note concerning setback from edge of paving should read:
r, "Keypad setback from edge of pavement. REF. Note 8 on Sheet C2."
k.
8602-96 PAGE 2 OF 4 ADDENDUM 1
Tui D. At the contractor's option, the detail for the tench drain - 6/S3 can change to a formed trench,
equal to TF-14 as manufactured by ABT, Inc. Tench manufacturer to provide a slotted cast
iron grate that is AASHTO-H-20 rated. Grate is to have 36 % open area. Please refer to detail
6/S3 for concrete thickness to be maintained around the trench. Coordinate all plumbing line
elevations for proper connections.
E. On Sheet S2, add the lintel beam shown in Attachment Number 4 to structural framing. Refer
to Section 9/A11 in architectural for other information.
F. On Sheet A2:
1. Provide a 18" wide x 24" tall cast aluminum wall plaque to be mounted on the west wall
of Vestibule 01. Plaque is to have a double line border. Border and raised letters are to
be satin finish and background is to be stipple texture with a black finish. Provide two
coats of clear lacquer to finish plaque. Text to be selected later for:
a. Name of Project
b. Client
C. Mayor
d. Fire Dept. Officers
e. City Council Members
f. General Contractor
g. Architect
h. Date
Provide adequate blocking and appropriate mounting. Also provide shop drawings for
letter styles, sizes and other design considerations.
2. Setback for Door #05 is 2'-8" from face of masonry wall (not pilaster).
G. Sheet A3
1. Note 21: Control joints to be prefabricated, non -corrosive, with removable protective
strip. Painted to match stucco.
H. Sheet A4
1. Section 1/A4-Notes near the overhead door motor are super -imposed. Note should read:
"OHD OPERATOR (MOUNT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE)."
"METAL TRIM, HOLD 3/8" ABOVE SURFACE."
The above note concerning metal trim will be located at the unused arrow leader located
below the super -imposed text.
2. Sections 1/A4, 3/A4, and 1/A5, prefinished eave trim covers bottom of 2x blocking and
r" returns up above stucco J-trim.
I. Sheet A5
1. Section 1/A5, suspension wire is only required for suspended type ceiling systems. If
light gauge framing is used as shown, suspension wire is not required.
2. At Detail 5/A5, include metal J-trim next to blocking for stucco finish termination.
3. At Detail 6/A5, top note should read: "TOP OF WICK." At thru-wall flashing note,
delete "ADHERE WITH FULL BED OF MASTIC."
r J. Sheet A6
1. On the appliance schedule, item #1 - cooktop should be SGN36GS.
2. Appliance schedule, Note 4, add note about satin finish hood: "Hood is to be Thermadore
�.., PHI48QS." Provide four (4) 50 watt R-20 Halogen bulbs, hood canopy assembly, rough-
i,
8602-96 PAGE 3 OF 4 ADDENDUM 1
4
in plate, transition, filters and grease troughs adequate for hood size. Also, contractor
to provide all required supports, bracing and roof flashings, ducts and exhaust vents, etc.,
for a complete functioning exhaust hood.
K. Sheet A9
1. Detail 5/A9 and 17/A9: Relocate note #22 (outlet) to end of millwork unit shown in
18/A9. Locate in center, below counter top. Detail 18/A9 occurs at each end of the
millwork unit. There will be 2 outlets.
2. Detail 14/A9: Dimension string should read: "8 lockers at V-6" = 12'-0"". Eight
lockers should be shown in elevation in lieu of 9.
3. Detail 15/A9: This elevation occurs in two (2) locations in Apparatus Room.
4. At Standard Mounting Heights/Details: Electrical outlets are to be mounted 24" AFF.
Ref. electrical sheets. 15" is a standard minimum required for accessibility and not the
exact mounting height required.
L. See attached Electrical addenda items.
-END-
8602-96
PAGE 4 OF 4
M0313Oil, 1 1J'kTj0l
ATTACHMENT NUMBER 1
r
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Monolithic glass.
2. Insulating glass.
3. Mirror glass.
4. Glazing accessories.
B. Types of work in this section include work for:
1. Exterior windows.
2. Interior windows.
3. Exterior storefront.
4. Aluminum entrances.
5. Exterior doors.
6. Mirrors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without
failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration.
1. Design to withstand wind loading as specified by applicable code for parts/portions of
buildings.
a. Statistical probability of breakage: 8 per 1000, maximum, at 60-second wind
load.
B. Deterioration includes:
1. For insulating glass:
a. Moisture or dirt between panes.
b. Development of condensation between panes.
C. Damage to internal coating, if any.
d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure.
2. For coated glass: Development of visible defects in coating.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Samples of Glass.
C. Certification by contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass thickness and
heat treatment have .been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural
performance requirements.
D. Insulating Unit Warranty.
E. Weathertight Warranty.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08800-1 900-9264
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Insulating Glass: Fabricator's standard warranty for 5 years.
1. Weathertight warranty: 5 years.
�.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be
considered for substitution.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Insulating glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply
with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
r a. AFG Industries, Inc.
b. Cardinal IG Company.
C. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc.
d. Guardian Industries Corporation.
e. HGP Industries, Inc.
f. Inde-Pane, Inc.
r- g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
( h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i. Viracon, Inc.
7 2. Reflective glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Cardinal IG Company.
r b. Ford Glass Division/Ford Motor Company.
C. Guardian Industries Corporation.
d. HGP Industries, Inc.
e. Libbey-Owens-Ford Company.
f. Saint Gobain.
g. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
h. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i. Viracon, Inc.
C3. Spandrel glass, ceramic coated: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they
comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a. Guardian - Jamestown.
b. HGP Industries, Inc.
r' C. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
d. Viracon, Inc.
4. Laminated glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
r- requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc.
b. Globe Amerada Glass Company.
C. Guardian Industries Corporation.
7 d. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
e. Viracon, Inc.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-2 900-9264
I
r
7 2.2 GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated.
1.
Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), minimum.
2.
Interior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide
strength necessary to resist specified loads.
a. Exception: Safety glazing requirements supersede this strength requirement.
4.
Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering.
5.
Cut or drill holes in laminated units.
6.
Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by manufacturer.
B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units.
1.
Product: Opaque Insulating Spandrel Glass.
2.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
3.
Exterior pane: Opaque tempered glass
a. Fully tempered glass
b. Color: Solar gray
r
1. Fret and opacifier on 2nd surface.
4.
Interior pane: Opaque tempered glass.
a. Fully tempered.
r-
b. Color: Solar gray.
C. Fret on 3rd surface.
5.
Winter U-value: 0.10, maximum.
6.
Summer U-value:.10, maximum.
C. Glass Type I - 2 : Sealed insulating units.
.-
1.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
2.
Exterior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Solar gray.
.•
3.
Interior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Solar gray.
r"
4.
Light transmittance: 60 Percent daylight, 75 percent solar.
5.
Shading coefficient: 0.65.
6.
Reflectance: 33 percent daylight, 28 percent solar.
7.
Winter U-value: 0.19 maximum.
8.
Summer U-value: 0.10 maximum.
D. ' Glass Type I-3: Sealed insulating, non -tempered units (same as Type I-2, except not tempered).
E. Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass.
1. Fire -resistance rated.
2. Product: Pattern -diamond.
F. Glass Type M - 1 : Mirror glass.
1. Two-ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch-thick interlayer.
a. Silvered on second surface.
2. Thickness: 5/ 16 inch.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-3 900-9264
i
7
3. Color: Clear.
4. Edge treatment: Ground.
G. Glass Type L-1: Clear laminated.
1. Two or three ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch thick interlayer.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Color: Clear.
H. Glass Type A-1: Overhead Door
1. Acrylic Insulated.
2. Color: Tinted gray.
3. Thickness: 518 inch minimum.
4. Per overhead door manufacturer's standard.
2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCT'S
A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory -assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers
forming air -tight, dehydrated air space(s).
1. ASTM E 774, Class A.
2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For mirrors: Quality ql or q2.
2. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I.
3. Heat -strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I.
4. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I.
a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel.
C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure,
without air pockets or contaminants between plies.
1. Interlayer for all -glass units: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, specifically designed for
I lamination and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual
properties under installed conditions.
D. Reflective Glass: Float glass, coated as indicated.
E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8.
1. Fire -resistance rated where indicated.
F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, with minimum 44ayer coating consisting of silver, copper, and 2
heat -cured protective coats; tested in accordance with FS DD-M-411.
1. Fabrication: Always use gloves when handling mirror glass.
a. Fabricate in the shop; avoid mechanical and chemical damage to backing.
b. Seal edges immediately after fabrication with coating recommended by backing
coating manufacturer..
C. Wash fronts, backs, and edges with clean water immediately after fabrication.
7
` LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
08800-4 900-9264
F
pow
I
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance
characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are
compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact.
B. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or
polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type- R ductile back bedding compound, as
described in AAMA 800.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and
"Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or
glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation.
C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance
or diminish appearance.
3.2 GLAZING IN FRAMES
A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections:
1. Compression gaskets, both sides.
B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing.
C. Do not block weep holes.
D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement.
1. Install so they fit tightly at corners, allowing for stretch during installation.
3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Install mirrors in accordance with the recommendations of the mirror manufacturer and with
FGMA "Glazing Manual."
1. Do not install mirrors having any damage to backing coating.
2. Do not install until all other work in the area is complete.
3. Do not install until permanent HVAC systems are in operation.
4. Do not install in areas where airborne solvents or heavy duty cleaners are being used;
ventilate areas thoroughly after use before installing mirrors.
5. Do not install over recently installed plaster, masonry, concrete, or paint.
6. Install with at least 3/16-inch space between back surface of mirror and substrate.
7. Mount plumb; provide shims or spacers if required.
8. Mount adjacent pieces in the same plane.
r END OF SECTION 08800
1i LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-5 900-9264
i
ATTACHMENT NUMBER 2
SECTION 10162 - BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Compartments.
2. Screens.
B. Related Sections:
1. Grouting of masonry for compartment anchorage:
Division 4.
2. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10.
r 1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 167-94 -- Standard Specification for Stainless and
Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and
r Strip; 1994.
B. ASTM A 591/A 591M-89 -- Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass
Applications; 1989.
... 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for
each distinct panel system indicated. Include data on
hardware, accessories, leveling -and -anchorage devices, and
fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing
construction of compartments.
1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and
accessories.
l 2. Include details showing panel connections, anchorage,
l and support systems.
C. Panel Color Verification Samples: Submit 6-inch-square
samples of each panel finish type and color to be
installed.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for each product
specified in this section. Include instructions for
examination, preparation, and protection of adjacent work.
l E. Maintenance Data: Submit for each product specified in
this section. Include instructions for cleaning and
preventive maintenance.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10162-1 900-9264
F
T
i.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly
engaged in manufacture of products specified in this
section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use
under similar service conditions for not less than 5
years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged
in installation of products specified in this section,
with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: If possible, determine field
measurements before beginning shop fabrication. Wherever
field measurements have not been made before fabrication,
provide components capable of adjustment during
installation.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine
anchorage requirements for panel systems. In a timely
manner, distribute to affected installers of related work
those system components and anchorage devices provided by
r. panel manufacturer for incorporation into other work.
B. Refer to Division 1 for coordination drawing requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANEL SYSTEMS
A. Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of
partitions and erected using the following panel systems
at locations indicated on the drawings:
1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish,
floor -anchored and overhead -braced.
2.02 PANEL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard panels
fabricated for installations indicated. Provide internal
reinforcement as required for hardware and accessories.
Premachine panels for field installation.
B. Steel over Honeycomb Core - Baked Enamel Finish:
1. Steel sheets: ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, galvanized
- bonderized:
a. Minimum sheet thickness for panels: 20 gage.
b. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 20 gage
(overhead -braced application).
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10162-2 900-9264
1
F
r
E
c. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 16 gage.
d. Minimum sheet thickness for doors: 22 gage.
2. Core material: Manufacturer's standard
sound -deadening honeycomb.
3. Panel fabrication: Use single steel sheet for each
face plate and laminate both face plates under
pressure to core material. At full length of panel
perimeter, form edges of each face plate to interlock
directly with opposing face plate, or form edges to
C
receive additional molding strip. If molding strip is
used, provide one continuous molding strip for each
panel edge. Provide manufacturer's standard
neatly -made and finished corners.
a. Minimum finished thickness:
1. Panels: 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch.
3. Doors: 1 inch.
b. Internal anchorage reinforcement: Galvanized
steel sheet, minimum 12 gage.
C. Internal tapping reinforcement: Galvanized steel
sheet, minimum 14 gage.
t
{
d. Finish:
1. Provide baked, rust -inhibiting prime coat and
a minimum of 2 electrostatically -applied coats
of thermosetting baked enamel.
4. Panel colors: Selected by architect, after contract
r.
award, from manufacturer's complete set of standard
colors.
5. Hardware, accessories, and mounting brackets:
Manufacturer's standard styles. The following
T
materials will be acceptable:
a. Chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac").
6. Manufacturers: Products of the following
manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements
of the contract documents, will be among those
considered acceptable:
a. Accurate Partitions Corporation.
b. All American Metal Corporation.
c. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
d. Flush -Metal Partition Corporation.
e. General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation.
f. Global Steel Products Corporation.
g. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
,r
h. Metpar Corp.
i. Monarch Toilet Partition, Inc.
j. The Sanymetal Products Company, Inc.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to
properly install panel systems indicated.
1. Hinge: Self -closing, pivot type hinge, recess -mounted
within door; adjustable to permit door to rest at any
I
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10162-3 900-9264
7
angle.
2. Leveling -and -anchorage devices: Rust -resistant steel
devices as recommended by panel manufacturer for
installation of panels in conditions indicated.
3. Pilaster shoes: ASTM A 167 (Type 302/304) minimum 20
gage stainless steel, finish to match compartment
hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches.
4. Fasteners: Tamper -resistant rust -proof, exposed
fasteners as recommended by panel manufacturer for
installation of panels and hardware in conditions
indicated. Finish to match hardware.
5. Overhead bracing: Antigrip headrail bracing
fabricated from continuous extruded aluminum, clear
anodized finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract
documents.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine
placement of panel assemblies.
D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel
manufacturer to installers of related work, have been
properly installed and aligned.
E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start
of panel system installation.
t 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's
I instructions, except where more restrictive requirements
I are shown, specified, or are necessary for project
conditions.
B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets
recommended by manufacturer for conditions indicated.
Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are
not acceptable.
1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where
possible, place brackets so that anchorage fasteners
penetrate joints, not masonry units.
2. Panels attached to tile -faced walls: Where possible,
place brackets so that anchorage fasteners penetrate
joints, not tiles.
C. Compartments:
7
11, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10162-4 900-9264
PM
i
r
1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using
manufacturer's recommended number and type of
brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets
at wall connections. Clearances exceeding 1/2 inch
{ between panels and pilasters are not acceptable.
Provide level, plumb installation.
r 2. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced compartments: Anchor
pilasters to floor using manufacturer's recommended
leveling -and -anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by
installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install
overhead bracing using a minimum of 2 fasteners per
pilaster. Install panels.
a. Compartments with doors: Properly align door.
r Top edge of closed compartment door must be
parallel with overhead bracing member.
D. Screens:
1. Form solid connection between panel system and
building structure using manufacturer's recommended
devices for conditions indicated. Anchorage must be
designed to support weight of panels without damaging
building finishes. Provide level, plumb installation.
Provide screens capable of resisting impacts and
stresses imposed during anticipated use and
maintenance.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Operating Hardware:
1. In -swinging door:
bring door to rest
degrees from fully
latched.
2. out -swinging door:
bring door to rest
degrees from fully
latched.
3.04 CLEANING
Adjust hinges to automatically
at an angle approximately 30
closed position when door is not
Adjust hinges to automatically
at an angle approximately 30
closed position when door is not
A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's
recommended procedures and cleaning agents.
3.05 PROTECTION
- A. Protect installed components from damage until project
completion.
END OF SECTION 10162
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10162-5 900-9264
F
r
k
i
r
T
7
F;
ATTACHMENT NUMBER 3
ATTACHMENT NUMBER 4
r
r
r
r
r
r
- •-��•
PROJECT FIRE STATION NO. 7
-�
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
JOB NO. 13_0602-96 _DATE 2a AUG 98
ENGINEERS • ARCWTECTS • PLANNERS
CALL. BYN44V CHK. BY GAH SHEET I OFF_
LUBBOCK
EL PASO MIDLAND AMARILLO
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I 1
I I
JOIST BEARING
I I
= 112'-4"
I I
I I
8x1
I I
oo co Go o0
I I
x 77C x M
I I
k c�
I be
12 S4 °0
I I
I I
I I
W8x1
o
I
I I
I i
I I
it
_
I I
L2
00
�
I I
I I
3
I l
► I
z
0
0
�a
Q�
c0
r rn
04
(D
co
1-11
c0 0
Q) a
I U
rnIr
~
04En
00
oa
CITY OF LUBBOCK
FIRE STATION NO. 7
AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
AUGUST 29, 1996
ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE
ELECTRICAL ITEMS:
Item 1 On the drawings, Sheet E1, Light Fixture Schedule, Acceptable Bidding
Manufacturers are as follows:
Type
Manufacturers
"A"
& "Al"
Williams and Metalux
"B"
Kirlin and Lightech
"C"
Vista and Lightech
"D"
& "D1"
Hubbell and Nulite
"F"
Kirlin and Halo
"G"
Hubbell
"H"
Hubbell and Metalux
"K"
& "K1"
Hubbell and Lumark
"L"
Hubbell and McGraw -Edison
"M"
Hubbell and Metalux
"Q"
& "Q1"
Hubbell and McGraw -Edison
"R"
Hubbell and Halo
"X"
& "X1"
Hubbell and Surelites
Alternate manufacturers listed for bidding shall meet or exceed the quality of the units
specified. Listing in the addendum is only the right to bid the project and not
acceptance as an equal. Submittal data will be reviewed for the complete equality of
the substituted unit.
Item 2 On the drawings, Sheet E1, refer to attached Supplemental Drawing EIA for electrical
revisions.
Item 3 On the drawings, Sheet E2, refer to attached Supplemental Drawings E2A, E2B &
E2C for electrical revisions.
Item 4 On the drawings, Sheet E2, add the following to note #16 "Provide and install six
50W/Par20 flood lamps for hood lighting."
Item 5 On the drawings, Sheet E2, add the following to note #24 "Refer to Architectural
Detail #3/A3 for installation."
Item 6 On the drawings, Sheet E2, revise note #26 to read:
26. Manual Transfer Switch (MTS) to be provided under Alternate #2. Manual
transfer switch shall be a 60A-2P switch equal to Cutler -Hammer No.
DT322FGK. Provide two 50A fuses.
r
Item 7 On the drawings, Sheet E2, add note #31 to read:
31. Emergency Generator to be provided under Alternate #2. Generator shall be
a portable (with wheels), gasoline powered, 8KW, 240/120v, 1Ph unit equal
to Grainger (Dayton) Stock No. 1N168.
Item 8 On the drawings, Sheet E2, add note #32 to read:
32. Mount switches in counter top as directed by the Architect.
Item 9 On the drawings, Sheet E3, refer to the attached revised Electrical Riser Diagram for
additional work.
Item 10 On the drawings, Sheet E1 and E3, refer to revised attached panel schedules "MDP",
"LA", "EA" and "PA".
Item 11 On the drawings, Sheet E4, refer to attached Supplemental Drawing No. E4A for
electrical revisions.
Item 12 On the drawings, Sheet E4, add a ceiling mounted P.A. speaker in the following
rooms: Exercise 06, H.C. Toilet 07, SCBA 10, Women 17, Men 23, Officer's
Quarters 26 and Office 27. Provide 3/4" C. with pullstring from these new P.A.
speakers to the nearest P.A. speaker location shown on the drawings.
Item 13 On the drawings, Sheet E5, use Air Terminal Installation Detail for conductor sizes
only and refer to Architectural Detail #3/A3 for installation of air terminal.
Item 14 On the drawings, Sheet E5, Wiring Device Mounting Heights, change the telephone,
data and receptacle mounting height to 24" A.F.F. Refer to Sheet A9 and other
addendum items for exact mounting heights.
F
71,
r
i
r"
PANEL 'EA'
SERVICE: 208Y/120
VOLT,
1 PHASE,
3 WIRE
& GROUND
MAINS: 100 AMP
MAIN LUGS ONLY
MOUNTING: SURFACE
MINIMUM BREAKER
I.C. RATING:
10,000
AMPERES
CKT SERVES
LOAD
CKTBRK
CONDUCTORS
CONDUIT
1 RECEPTACLE
600
20A-1P
2 #12
& #12 GR.
1/2"
2 LIGHTS
1,300
20A-1P
2 #12
1/2'
r"
3 LIGHTS
1,800
20A-1P
2 #12
& #12 GR.
1/2"
4 LIGHTS
1,550
20A-1P
2 #12
1/2"
5 SPARE
---
20A-1P
---
---
6 SPARE
---
20A-1P
---
---
''
7 TELEPHONE
800
20A-1P
2 #12
& #12 GR.
1/2"
4
8 RADIO UNIT
1,200
20A-1P
2 #12
& #12 GR.
1/2"
9 EMERG. EXITS
400
20A-1P
2 #12
1/2"
10 SPACE ONLY
---
---
---
---
THRU
12 SPACE ONLY
---
---
---
---
r„
TOTAL LOAD:
7,650
DEMAND
LOAD:
7,650
PANEL 'MDP'
SERVICE: 208Y/120 VOLT, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE & GROUND
MAINS: 600A-3P MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (42 KAIC)
MOUNTING: SURFACE
MINIMUM BREAKER I.C. RATING: 22,000 AMPERES
CKT SERVES LOAD CKTBRK CONDUCTORS
1 PANEL "LA" 19,890 100A-3P 4 #2 & #8 GR.
2 PANEL "PA" 58,912 225A-3P 4 #4/0 & #6 GR.
3 PANEL "EA" 7,650 50A-2P 3 #8 & #10 GR.
4 RTU #1-96 9,655 45A-3P 3 #8 & #10 GR.
5 RTU #2-96 8,250 35A-3P 3 #8 & #10 GR.
6 RTU #3-96 6,125 25A-3P 3 #10 & #10 GR.
7 TE #1-96 6,300 35A-3P 3 #8 & #10 GR.
8 COMPRESSOR 21,600 100A-3P 3 #2 & #8 GR.
9 EAST DOOR 1,159 20A-3P 3 #12 & #12 GR.
10 WEST DOOR 1,159 20A-3P 3 #12 & #12 GR.
11 SPACE ONLY --- -31P ---
THRU
14 SPACE ONLY --- -3P ---
TOTAL LOAD: 140,750 DEMAND LOAD:
7.
CONDUIT
1-1/4"
2-1/2"
1"
1
1
1/2„
1/2"
1-1/4"
3/4"
3/4"
128,214
PANEL 2LAN
pa
SERVICE: 208Y/120 VOLT,
3 PHASE,
4
WIRE
& GROUND
MAINS: 100 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY
MOUNTING: SURFACE
MINIMUM BREAKER I.C. RATING:
10,000
AMPERES
CKT SERVES LOAD
CKTBRK
CONDUCTORS
CONDUIT
NOTES
1 EXT. LIGHTS 1,350
20A-1P
2
#10 &
#10
GR.
1/2"
1_
2 LIGHTS 1,800
20A—lP
2
#12 &
#12
GR.
1/2"
—
t-
3 LIGHTS 1.200
20A-1P
2
#12
1/2"
---
4 LIGHTS 1,000
20A—lP
2
#12
1/2"
---
5 LIGHTS 1,500
20A—lP
2
#12
1/2"
3.
r
6 LIGHTS 1,200
20A—lP
2
#12
1/2"
3.
7 LIGHTS 1,500
20A-1P
2
#12
1/2"
3.
8 LIGHTS 1,300
20A-1P
2
#12
1/2"
---
9 LIGHTS 1,600
20A—lP
2
#12 &
#12
GR.
1/2"
---
10 LIGHTS 1,800
20A-1P
2
#12 &
#12
GR.
1/2"
---
11 EXT. LIGHTS 1,340
20A—lP
2
#10 &
#10
GR.
1/2"
2.
12 FIRE PANEL 1,500
20A-1P
2
#12 &
#12
GR.
1/2"
13 C.M. DETECT 1,500
20A—lP
2
#12 &
#12
GR.
1/2"
14 SPARE ---
20A-1P
---
---
---
THRU
20 SPARE ---
20A-1P
---
---
---
21 SPACE ONLY ---
---
---
---
---
r
THRU
t
30 SPACE ONLY ---
---
---
---
---
TOTAL LOAD: 19,090
DEMAND
LOAD:
19,090
NOTES:
1. THRU CONTACTOR "Cl"
2. THRU CONTACTOR "C2"
�20A-2P).
20A-2P).
3. THRU CONTACTOR "C3"
20A-4P).
7
'S3NIM`80 3H1 NO 031VDIONI Sd S301A30
O1 8ve Sf18 ONnoNo 031`dIOS I 08VO813NVd W06J (3d 18iS M0113A
H11M N3380) 381M ONno8o 031`dIOSI ZL# 31V8Vd3S d 301A08d *L
:S310N
9 LC' L,v :OdOI ONVW30 Z L6' 9S :0` of 1d101
--- --- --- --- -- AINO 33ddS L9
n8H1
--- --- --- --- --- AINO 33`dd S 99
-- --- --- d L—VOZ --- 38VdS SS
mlH 1
--- --- --- d l—`dOZ --- 38VdS 9t,
„Z/L '80 Z L# V Z L# Z d L—`dOZ OOZ'L S313VId3338 Sb
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# 28 Z L# Z d L—`dOZ OOS ` L 831NN 18dS tb
--- „Z/L *80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—VOZ 009'L 'SNV8i 31 Ct,
--- „Z/l '80 ZL# 7? ZL# Z dL—`oz OOS'L 'SNVbi 31 Zb
--- „Z/L *80 ZL# -v ZL# Z dl—dOZ OOS'l 96—Z# Ay3 lb
--- „Z/L *bD ZL# V ZL# Z dl—dOZ OOS' L 96-0 A`d3 Ob
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ OOS'L 96-9-0 H8 6C
-- „Z/ L '80 ZL# 28 Z L# C dC—`dOZ 06b' L 31VO 9C
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# 28 ZL# Z dL—dOZ 9L9 96-9# 33 LC
--- „Z/L '�10 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—dOZ 9L9 96—t# 33 9C
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# V ZL# C dC—`dOZ OWL 96-0 33 9C
--- Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# C dC—dOZ OWL 96—Z# 33 tC
„
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# C dC—VOZ OWL 96-0 33 CC
--- „Z/L '80 00 V 00 Z dZ—d0C 000'C N3AO ZC
--- .Z/ L '80 00 V 00 Z dZ—d0C OOS' C 83A80 3snOH L£
--- „Z/l '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—dOZ OOS'L 3AVM083IW 0£
--- Z/ L bO ZL# N Z L# Z d L—VOZ OOS' l 2101d83918J38 6Z
„
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ OOS'L 80iV83018338 9Z
--- „Z/ L ' 80 Z L# V ZL# Z d L—dOZ 009' L 8OiV8301 8J38 LZ
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ OOS'L OOOH 30NV8 9Z
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ 009 S313d1d3338 9Z
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ 000'L S313d1d3338 bZ
--- „Z/ L ' aO Z L# V Z L# Z d L—dOZ OOZ'L S31OVid333b £Z
--- Z/l '89 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ 009 S313d1d3338 ZZ
„
--- „Z/L *80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—dOZ OOZ'L S313VId3338 LZ
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# -v ZL# Z dl—y0Z 009 S313d1d3338 OZ
--- „Z/L d0 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—dOZ OOZ'L S31OVid3338 6L
--- „Z/L b0 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—`dOZ 009 S313d1d3338 9l
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dL—`dOZ OOS'L S313d1d3338 LL
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z d L—`dOZ 000' L S313d1d3338 9 L
--- „Z/ l 80 ZL# 28 ZL# Z d L—dOZ OOS' L lt1SOdS 10 S l
--- „Z/ L *80 Z L# N Z L# Z d L—VOZ 009' L 3100180 b L
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# 28 ZL# Z dl—VOZ OOS'l S313VId3338 Cl
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z d l—`dOZ OOS' L S313` Id3338 Z L
--- „Z/L 80 OL# V 00 Z dZ—`OC 000'C 83A80 Ll
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# 2B ZL# Z dL—VOZ OOZ'L S313d1d333b OL
--- „Z/L b9 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—VOZ OOS'L 3M3 6
--- „Z/L aJ ZL# 28 ZL# Z d l—VOZ OOS' L S31DVid3338 9
--- Z/l '80 ZL# V ZL# Z d L—VOZ OOS' L S313VId3338 L
„
L „Z/ L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z d L—`dOZ 009 S313VId3338 9
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z d l—`dOZ 000' l S313VId3338 S
--- „Z/ L ' 80 Z L# V ZL# Z d l—`dOZ 000' L S313VId3338 b
--- „Z/ L '80 ZL# 28 Z L# Z d L—`dOZ 000' l S313t11d3338 C
--- „Z/L '80 ZL# V ZL# Z dl—VOZ 000'L S313VId3338 Z
--- „Z/ L ' 60 ZL# V ZL# Z d L—`dOZ OOZ'L S313VId3338 L
S310N 1 I nGN03 S8013nONO3 M&ND GVOl S3A83S 1i3
S3b3dW`d 000' O L : JN I iVb ' 3' 1 83>I`d388 iNnA I N I W
3ovj8ns : JN 11Nf10W
AINO SOfll N I `d i dAV SZZ : SN I ` A
ONno8o 031VIOS I + ONno8o 78 381 M t, ' 3SVHd C ' 110A OZ L/A90Z : 30I A83S
ON EA-9
I
U
Supplemental Drawing ElA
r
L
T t
Supplemental Drawing E2A
19
11
Supplemental Drawing E2B_
PA-27
PA-28
PA-29
PA-30
Supplemental Drawing E2C
Supplemental Drawing E4A
_--I --A _ � --I
•w.;:r.rf. a. . '�aP.S;�P.V •e+YN,�+PirA":� _ u+� iK'r^Yn . i.h ,.., 1.
EITlRgR I r1E � 1CAL I YARD STORAGE
TYPE SO C49LE a8 4WG/4
CONDUCTOR. PROVE 4
I SEE r'-- PHOTOCELL ah ROOP I NEMA &-SOP PLUG AT EACH
END OF CABLE. CABLE
. LENGTM $HALL BE SO FEET
PAD MOUNTED
TRANSPORr�R I +-- CONTACTOR CT I:OA-7P)
DY POWER CO. MA14AL.
PANEL PAM IANPl f— CONTACTOR'CS a0A-2PI PANEL TRANSFER
TOP' TA' L' S.A. Sy,rtTp{
DOUDLA SECTION �' �— THE CLOCK I MTS'
roOA-Wn
+—coNTACTtKt'c]'aoA-.n
eew
C�NERATOR
GRADE LEVEL
—•. I .—•—•—•_• '—•—•A ._•_•—•—._•_•_._•_•—._•_•_••—•—•_•—•—•_.—._•_•—._•_• •_•— _
3P88P10 GR.n TG MOUNTANEM46-SOR RECEPTACLE
L J O �` P7l0 IN ]/A' CNDUT AND 143TA *B CANONDUCTOR3 FROM
TWO PARALLEL SETS
RECEPTACLE MAIN LUGS.
TRANSFER SWITCH
OF PSso MCM IN TWO EME
s Corcura RGENCY SIDE M4GS.
NOTL; MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH MS', EMERCLNCY GrMRATOR
E L E C T R I C A, L RISER DIAGRAM ALL ASSOCA`T.. CC.... SHALL DOE YDPROVDED UNDER &ASE 00.
NO SCALE
09/10/96 11:05
01 $06 747 7146 PSC LUBBOCK
rZ 001/002
r
PAYZtrrXrrr .Y ., SMrM & COOPER, INC.
ENGINEERS ■ AKCMTECTS M PLANNERS
4010 AVENUE A, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79412
(8W6) 747-0161 w FAX (800 747-7146
ADDENDUM NO. 2, September 10, 1996
RE: City of Lubbock Fire Department
Fire Station No. 7
202 Slide Road
Lubbock, Texas
TO: Plan Holders
This Addendum forma a partof the Contract Documents and modifies the original Bidding Documents
dated h:ly 31, 1996 as noted below. Acknowledge receipt of this Addendum in the space provided on the
Did Form. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification. This addendum is being faxed to
all of the General Contractors and Plan Rooms on the plan holders list as shown below. The General
Cofactors are responsible for informing the effected Sub -contractors or suppliers prior to submitting bids.
Valasquez Construction 796-0006
Pharr & Company
763-5263
LDC Construction
794$557
Quicksilver Construction
763-6157
Mike Klein
747-4739
Hunter Construction
799-4319
David Wood Construction 798 2700
P & D Construction 795-9564
Dodge Plan Room 7934591
Texas Contractors 214 271-2693
AGC Plan Room 797-8898
Make the following changes to the Construction Documents:
1. C7IANGFS TO THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Section 07410 - Manufactured Metal Roof and Wall Panels
1. Paragrapb 2.3.A. - Clarification - The term "Uninsulawd" is used to indimte the roof
panel itself is not insulated. Lusulation is required, however. under the panel as shown
in the drawing details. This insulation should be the same type as used on the flat roof
areas and may be either one or two layers totaling a minimum of R-19.
B. Section 07525 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing
1. Paragraph 2.4.A.1 - Delete this paragraph.
2. Paragraph. 2.4.1.4 - Clarification - The minimum value of the insulation board (not the
entirc assembly) shall be R-19 as indicated on the drawings.
8602-96 PAGE 1 OF 2 ADDENDUM 2
i
09/10;96 11:03 101 806 747 7146 PSC LUBBOCK 002/002
F
C. Section 09650 - ResilIent Flooring
1. 2.2 Sheet Flooring:
Total thickness a .085"
Wear layer - .05'
Static load limit - 125 psi'
Durability = Superior
Chemically welded
Random chip blend - color as selected by architect
.Mznufacturcrs: Equal to Armstrong classic corlou
H. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS
A. Sheet A9 - Clarification -
1. Sections 11/A9, and 12/A9, the 2' wide hollow core door hardware will be supplied
under Section 06410 in specifications. The hollow core doors are to have hardwood
edges and are stained red oak to match cabinet.
M. CHANGES TO THE ELECTRICAL
A. In the specifications, Section 16670, delete all reference to and requirements for Master Labeled
Lightning Protection System and NFPA 78. However, copper wiring per NFPA 78 is still
required. For clarification the lightning protection system shall consist of two air terminals,
two ground rods and all copper connecting cable and fasteners as specified. All products shall
be UL labeled.
PAGE 2 OF 4
ADDENDUM 1
fm
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 13677
PROJECT NUMBER: 9264.9211
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
r
INDEX
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
PAYMENT BOND
PERFORMANCE BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
CONTRACT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
t
r
' NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID #13677
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
o'clock p.m. on the Sth day of September, 1996, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders,
to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
r�
"CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud.
r It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager
for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 26th day of September, 1996 at the Municipal Building, 1625
13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or
f all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance
with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract
price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter
2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of P or superior, as the
rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder.
+" Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of
!" award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted.
t The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of Parkhill, Smith &
Cooper, 4010 Avenue R, Lubbock, Texas 79412, (806) 747-0161.
row
I Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in the contract documents on file In the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which
document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidders attention is further directed to provision of
Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and
payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
r-. advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response
to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
There will be a pre -bid conference on the 28th day of August, 1996 at 10:00 o'clock a.m. in Training Room
L-01, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings
and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in
a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at
(806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
C TY OF LUBBOCK
IC*OR ILMA
PURCHASING MANAG
O
4 OM
r"
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to
complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7
FACILITY.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General
Conditions.
All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the
construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by
said contract documents.
r 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
f
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
to Bidders.
4. BIDDER INQUIRIES
r No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification
s concerning this bid must be addressed to:
RON SHUFFIELD
SENIOR BUYER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P.O. BOX 2000
LUBBOCK, TX 79457
FAX (8061767-2164
5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 250 (TWO HUNDRED
IF consecutive calendar days from the date specified In the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock
to the successful bidder.
? ! The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the
City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the
r„ contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by
the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may
direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within
the time specified.
6. PAYMENT
j., All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
10.
11
12.
AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to
execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the
improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims
pending, of which the Contractor has been notified.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective
materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written
general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any
and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year
from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the
Owner (City of Lubbock).
PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use
during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A swom statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of
Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the
materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
•� 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
r
a
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
VIA way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not
relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or
damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired
immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
r" 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals,
i� and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
�. 15. EXPLOSIVES
4 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from
the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all
1 cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger
life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms,
or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
t ' Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract,
it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground)
in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given
roll
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage
" resulting from his blasting operations.
7 1 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
tG
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
6 , telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated
by this contract is in progress.
17. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
t.
i
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
�» insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate
r of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
r- project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all
proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each
subcontractor.
18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
s 1
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than
specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders'
attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for
the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of
the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the
Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract
requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort
to complete the contract within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must
notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires
to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on
whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's
Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this
contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work,
regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer
r
dangerous to property or life.
i 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
r The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without
discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site
of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's
Representative, or Engineer, a certified, swom, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each
employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit
shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as
shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor
1 must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate
of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
7,
E;
t,
L.
f"!
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars
for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer,
workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the
schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents.
20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
21. PREPARATION FOR BID
The bidder shall submit his bid on forms fumished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly
filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work
contemplated or fumish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or
typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price
written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly
authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each
member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly
authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business
address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be property certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The
bid shall be executed in ink.
Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed
on the outside of the envelope in the following manner.
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Bid for (description of the project).
r Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no
bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
r following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
() Insurance Certificates.
Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
r
r,
r
23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
m The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified
therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order
to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable
investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the
bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of
Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to
satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to
complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
No Text
BID SUBMITTAL
i LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
t
J
PLACE:
DATE:
PROJECT NUMBER: 136/77/- CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACIUTY
Bid of ��/4G'/%i �i0 CU�/S%JZ"70i0 (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a
having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related
contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
! work required under the contract documents.
MATER
060 , r--
SERVICES: 7/-, ..� Ld ($ 3 od; felo. )
TOTAL BID: Se Pr a . ($ 7 7 00
ALTERNATE NO. 1(ADD): FLAGPOLE
" TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 1 DN2 771a,sh-*A Rajl. - Foul, Alto
ALTERNATE NO.2 (ADD): EMERGENCY GENERATOR
TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO.2 6,.►, iV-o&lw a DrA t kyo&v d Fe... f A.1�►s ($g 40
w.,. ALTERNATE NO.3 (ADD): ADDITIONAL (12) METAL LOCKERS
° TOTAL ALTERNATE BID NO. 3 AYgr EsZ Iti.+►+Sne� Fo..•cy it $- .� 8 0. 0- )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown In words shall govem.)
i
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified In a written
r "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 250 (TWO HUNDRED FIFTY) consecutive
f calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees
to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive
calendar day In excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the
general conditions of the contract documents.
r"
i
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
Instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
r bidding.
t The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work
on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
1
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company,
payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock In an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if
required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
. F Enclosep with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for /ALL
Dollars ($A114 or a Bid Bond In the sum of 'S�lr� Dollars
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by
the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the
Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check
or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
ATTEST 1- -�J 1.- 4 - /''
Se'6retdry
rk
Autho zed Signature
(Printed or Typed Name)
W0-1,0 %9010 Za.s!5777Y,7170"J /WG
Corn an
Address
L/- /'6,eG1C/G , L.Z-1,64ner/L
City�� County _� -
State Zi Code
Telephone: SOG - S G'-;M
Fax: IMr - 7-EE-z760
r
0
r
C'
a.
n
G
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
P.O. Box S5563. San Diego, CA 92186 SS63
BID OR PROPOSAL BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (hereinafter =lied the Principal), an
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of to
laws of the State of California, and duty licensed for the purpose of making, ;uaranteeing or becoming sole curet
upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of TEXAS
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter csllei
the obligee) in the just and full sum of FIVE PERCENTOF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID OOIIBrs ($ 5% GAB
lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereb,,
bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly b;
these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OSLIGATICN IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid
is about to hand in and submit to the obliges a bid or proposal dated SEPTEMBER 5, 1996 fo;
CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION # 7 FACILITY
BID # 13877
in accordance with the plans and specific.3tons filed in the office of the of !'lgee and under the notce invi►!nC
proposals therefor.
NOW, THEREFORE. N the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the Contract for such work be
awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond fa
:he completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be cull and void, otherwise to be and remain
in full force and effect.
,., PROVIDED, HCWEVER neither Principal nor Surety shall be bound hereunder unfees Cbligee prior to execu:ion
of the final contract shall furnish evidence satisfactory to Principal and Surety that financing has been firmly
committed to cover the entire cost of the project.
" Signed, sealed and dated: SEPTEMBER 5, 1996
pp tt
a DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCT1!85?a6C.
r
by (Seal)
7
INSUXANOE COMPANY
Attorney-in-Fac:
S. TRACKER
r
1.
Insurance Comppa;ny of the West
HOME OEFIC8: SAN UIEGO, CALIFORNIA
s
,
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a California Corporation, does hereby appoint
REBECCA S. THACKER
its true and lawful Attomey(s) in -Fad, with full power and authority, to execute, on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and
other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature.
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors
on the 22nd day of November, 1994, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true copy:
'RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the Company, and each of
them, is hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the
Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, or other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature; and to attach thereto the seal of the Company;
provided however, that the absence of the seat shalt not affect the validity of the instrument.
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seat of the Company, and the signatures of any witnesses, the signatures and
seat of any notary, and the signatures of any officers certifying the validity of the Power of Attorney, may be affixed by facsimile.'
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused these presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this
19th day of June 1995 .
``�o�,A.►o. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
�►GOVO4MIp t
STATE OF CALIFORNIA John L Hannum, Senior Vice President
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO SS.
On June 19th, 1995 before me, personally appeared John L Hannum, Senior Yrce President of INSURANCE COMPANY
OF THE WEST, personally known to me to be the individual and officerwho executed the within instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed
the same in his official capacity and that by his signature on the Instrument, the corporation, on behalf of which he acted, executed the instrument.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
WRIVA PORTER
COMIM. tt352644 n
NOTARY F' VC.CAUFORNtA N
C SAN CISCO COUNTY n Notary Public
l.ty Commission Expires
CERTIFICATE. JANUARY 14,19%
I, E. Hamed Davis, Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which
the foregoing is a tyre copy, is still in full force and effect, and that this certificate may be signed by facsimile under the authority of the above quoted
resolution.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have subscribed my name as Vice President, on this 5TH day of SEPTEMBER 1996
t�pµMM►� ; INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
E. Hamed Davis, Vice Pr+sident
ICW 37
r
f'
4
t
f
a
2.
1 3.
t
4.
5.
r 6.
{ 7.
8.
9.
t
10.
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
Yes
No
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
0
❑
0
❑
❑
❑
❑
0
0
❑
0
0
0
❑
❑
No Text
F
I.C.W. GROUP -
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY I "'
INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY'
10140 CAMPUS POINT DRIVE • SAN DIEGO. CA 92121-1320
P.O. Boa 23563 • SAN DIEGO. CA 92196.3336 • (619) 546-2300 - (800) 977-1111
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(McGREGOR ACT - PUBLIC WORKS)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That. DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. , 5501 SPUR 327, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and THE INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
P.O. BOX 85563, SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92186-5563
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA , with its principal
office in the City of SAN DIEGO (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound
unto THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the amount of SEVEN HUNDRED SEVENTY FIVE
THOUSAND---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dollars ($ 775,000.00 ), for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind
themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the
26TH day of SEPTEMBER 19 96 to BID # 13677 — CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION # 7
FACILITY, LUBBOCK, TEXAS
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at
length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants
supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this
obligation shall be Vold; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED. HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government
Code, and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter
to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 1.ST
day of OCTOBER 106
Witness:
(If Individual or Firm)
Attest:
(If Corporation)
(Seal) .
_. Seal)
(Seal)
DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Seal
Principal
IN,49RA,NCE COMPANY OF THf WESS
(Seal)
ety
By: .�.
R ECCA S. THA�CKJri Attorney -in -Fact
ICWTX 411 B (REV. 11-94)
?no
The underslaned surety company represents that it Is duty qualified to do busineaa in Texas, and hereby
designates - DIAi:NAH TATUM an agent resident In Lubbock County to whom any requisite notioes may be
delivered and on whom Service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
INSURANCE COMPAWL' OF THE WEST
s
Approved as to forn%
fifty ojLvb# pck 1
iREBECCA V. THACKER
ATTORNEY -IN -FACT
By: a V-1 vo wV k X
City hornay
• Note. If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on rile a Certified extract from the by-laws showing
that tttis person nas authority to sign suO obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our rites.
Td Wt M:SZ 566r 40 'er_i T91? 494 SOS : 'CN ZNCHci WS1SAS XC.j 31u0;pupd : wc)J.
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING
LICENS D�TpEXAS
DATI BY
r
I.C.W. GROUP
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST -
EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY ma
INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
10140 CAMPUS POINT DRIVE • SAN DIEGO. CA 92121-I520
P.O. Box 95563 • SAN DIEGO, CA 92196-5336 • (619) 546-2400 • (800) 977-1111
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE BOND NO. 148 61 22
(McGREGOR ACT - PUBLIC WORKS)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That, DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC., 5501 SPUR 327, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79424
(hereinafter called the Principal). as Principal, and THE INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
P.O. BOX 85563, SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA 92186-5563
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of CALIFORNIA . with Its principal
office in the City of SAN DIEGO (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound
unto THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (hereinafter called the Obligee) In the amount of SEVEN HUNDRED SEVENTY FIVE
THOUSAND--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dollars ($ 775,000.00 ), for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind
r+ themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the
! 26TH day of SEPTEMBER 19 96 , to BID # 13677 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION # 7-
FACILITY, LUBBOCK, TEXAS
r which contract Is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at
I
length herein.
r.. NOW, THEREFORE. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully
perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
�^ PROVIDED, HOWEVER. that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government
B Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent
f as if It were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 1ST
i day of OCTOBER 19 96 - —`
Witness:
(if Individual or Firm)
Attest:
(If Corporation)
(Seat)
(Sea])
(Sea))
DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Seal
Principal
T SURANCE COaA!Z 7 THE XE"T (Sea!)
/ Surety
FICWTX 411 A (REV. 11-94)
EB CCA S.
I I i
4
:. The undersigned surety company represents that it is duty quatified.to do busineas in Texas, and hereby
designates ' nIANNF.H TATUM an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be
delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
INSURANCE COMPANi OF THE WEST
Surat
=: a
10)2EBECCA S1 THACKER
ATTORNEY -IN -FACT
Approved as to form;
r City of Lubbock 0
Y
ClIAMIromay
• Note. 1f signed by sn officer of the Surety Campany there must be on file a Certified extract from the by-laws showing
that tt',is parson nas authority to sign such obligation. !f signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
7 attomey for our files.
i
r
i
PW
i,
7
r
l Td W1:sVT:_0 SE6T 79TZ L9G SEia 'GN SNGN= c
GlSISAS >(d.j otuc;eupd Wolf
Insurance Company of the West
HOME OFFICE: SAN DIEGO, CALIFORNIA
f
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, a California Corporation, does hereby appoint:
REBECCA S. THACKER
l its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fad, with full power and authority, to execute, on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and
other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature.
r This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under the authority of the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors
on the 22nd day of November, 1994, which said Resolution has not been amended or rescinded and of which the following is a true copy.
"RESOLVED, that the Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice President of the Company, and each of
r them, is hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney qualifying the attorney named In the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the
Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, or other contracts of suretyship of a similar nature; and to attach thereto the seal of the Company;
provided however, that the absence of the seal shall not affect the validity of the instrument
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures of such officers and the seal of the Company, and the signatures of any witnesses, the signatures and
seal of any notary, and the signatures of any officers certifying the validity of the Power of Attorney, may be affixed by facsimile-*
IN WITNESS WHEREOF. INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST has caused these presents to be signed by its duly authorized officers this
.• 19th day of June 1995
4`�orru.o , INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
�000raiuge �
s
*j+a+,oft
Carona.
STATE OF CALIFORNIA John L Hannum, Senior Vice President
SS.
COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO
On June 19th, 1995 before me, personally appeared John L Hannum, Senior Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY
OF THE WEST, personally known to me to be the individual and officer who executed the within Instrument, and acknowledged to me that he executed
the same in his official capacity and that by his signature on the instrument, the corporation, on behalf of which he acted, executed the instrument.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
nVto RSiyRNCOo'lDAFU.'3AsisPt:iOoCRTER
ICCMM.M.
1RreiYs tA s'n'
T/ I &14" ,
gb ``� FZTAkSGLOCO.[UF)NryPublic
nExpi
gY1<CERTIFICATE: ,1690
1, E. Hamed Davis, Vice President of INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST, do hereby certify that the original POWER OF ATTORNEY, of which
the foregoing Is a true copy. Is still In full force and effect, and that this certificate may be signed by facsimile under the authority of the above quoted
resolution.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have subscribed my name as Vice President. on this 1ST day of OCTOBER
2".A�
INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST
E. Hamed Davis, Vice President
ICW 37
t
19 96.
7
No Text
PRODUCER ( rArG No E&
Sanford insurance Agency
P.O. Bo: 64790
6303 Indiana Avenue
Lubbock TX 79464
3 CODE: 00596643 SUB CODE:
r AGENCY
ER ID,
INSURED
City of Lubbock, Cnty of Lubbock, State of Texas
% David Wood Construction, Inc
5501 Spur 327
Lubbock TX 79424.0000
R:::.:.:::i:::}•?!:•.�:::::;';:G•;:<;:%;;:::.'•}}?�>::isi:::i:::;:}:•r'<::ra:Y�:::i.?;}:::"r.G;::f2::£:i22��i:%�::>;:;;c
rTYPE OF INSURANCE
` PROPERTY CAUSES OF LOSS
xA BASIC BROAD SPEC
�1
GENERAL LIABILITY
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILRY
CLAIMS MADE ril OCCUR
l6 OWNMS a CONTRACTORS PROT
RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE:
AUTOMOBILE LIABAM
ANY AUTO
ALL OWNED AUTOS
:* SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED AUTOS
NON -OWNED AUTOS
CY=.
:y AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE DEDUC•RBLE ALL VEHICLES
i COLLISION:
'•o OTHER THAN COL:
GARAGE LIABILITY
I ANY AUTO
t �
EXCESS LLABILRY
=y? UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM RETRO DATE FOR CLAIMS MADE
WORKERS CCOOMPENSATION
AN
y ' - EMPLOYERS LIABILITY
a,
SPECIAL
DmONSI
TOHERCOVERAGES
.fi.0......d.. 1:"Y"s��iv' W:«- .#"'iQ�a, ..�'��F _.r' 'F-yk,'.1 i M _,�, '�_ - Y"�•T�� _ y7'.+..'�" ,:b�a�;iy,'.
• :.y}}iiY•:•iY'{.:i: :::i$i'ii::ti :•i}: }i.:}: K?•}:?Jiiiii:?4 .:•:•vi}ii:?•.vii:::•:y?•. •: •:.i}i}:??i:ii:i??•i}; ?Si:: ........
'•::.'•:#•:;-.;•.<.:;:;:;•:;;p:<:::.}:•::•�'�,<:::#::#;i:::::s:.S:�a;::;::::.:':::;, •:•:;: n.'•::::::::::::#:.: } DATE (MMrOD/YY)
;r:»::::::•<::;•,•,•;.:::..:::•:>::::::<::�;..{}:?:>::>::;::;:::::z::;.:#s..::.;>:•:,:::j3•:?,-:>-;>•i:::;;:;•;:,.f; 10102196
}{}:.v:?Fv.{;••:i} �?Y:Y`'i:•,::i'r:>.:;:i:::•$:?i}.:.::::::.}:r}is0is;.;/,.�+::•?.:#>.:i`i?..:?...; 5•.`y.; ::.:.-..F.: •.% J. {:
............;..::.isn..:::.:v::::.�:::.::>::isii;%i:>.4::•}}:4i'•}:�}:::L:?>rii}}::?}�:}:{::•. i}ifi?: iiiir::??ti y{�{:;
THE CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THE REVERSE SIDE OF THIS FORM.
COMPANY BINDER
Maryland Casualty Ins. Co 6•276.1
DATE EFL TIME DATE WIRATICI TIME
X AM X 2.01 .
10101/96 12:01 PM 12101/96 NIX
THIS BINDER IS ISSUED TO EXTEND COVERAGE N THE ABOVE NAMED COMPANY
PER EXPIRING POLICY 1:
16ZYi Construction o�ir IEto ionSECYollirecLo)
Construction of Fire Station #7 Facility
« . 2.wlz w1l0m I q
AMOUNT I DEDUCTIBLE I COINS
GENERAL AGGREGATE
= 2000000
PRODUCTS - COMP/CP AGG
t
_
PERSONAL E ADV INJURY
>;
EACH OCCURRENCE
: 100000C
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one bra)
S
MED EXP (Any oneperson)
III
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
=
BODILY NIM (Per perom)
S
BODILY NAM (Per m=iderrt)
S
PROPERTY DAMAGE
i
MEDICAL PAYMENTS
i
PERSONAL N.!lM PROT
=
UNINSURED MOTORIST
Is
STATED AMOUNT
i
OTHER
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT
t
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:
i
EACH OCCURRENCE
i
'
AGGREGATE
_
SELF -INSURED RETENTION
i
STATUTORY LIMITS
EACH ACCIDENT
=
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
S
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE
t
ADDITIONAL INSURED
;rryxrry}'{{•:4:R}..... �ttiv, ..v,H..;.:•i:?+?^i}'r:{;i:S.i•Y..:r,{.;>:.;.i:?'r.^•.::vki, '!•:.:rrj::::?.+::}:}:}:}:rr f?
R7kl;
- — —Y.PSS
CONDITIONS
This Company binds the kind(s) of insurance stipulated on the reverse side. The Insurance is subject to the
terms, conditions and limitations of the policy(ies) in current use by the Company.
This binder may be cancelled by the Insured by surrender of this binder or by written notice to the Company
stating when cancellation will be effective. This binder may be cancelled by the Company by notice to the
Insured in accordance with the policy conditions. This binder is cancelled when replaced by a policy. If this
binder is not replaced by a policy, the Company is entitled to charge a premium for the binder according to the
Rules and Rates in use by the Company.
Applicable In Califonnia
When this form is used to provide insurance in the amount of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more, the title
of the form is changed from "Insurance Binder" to "Cover Note".
Applicable in Delaware
The mortgagee or Obligee of any mortgage or other instrument given for the purpose of creating a lien on real
property shall accept as evidence of insurance a written binder issued by an authorized insurer or its agent if
the binder includes or is accompanied by: the name and address of the borrower; the name and address of the
lender as loss payee; a description of the insured real property; a provision that the binder may not be canceled
within the term of the binder unless the lender and the insured borrower receive written notice of the cancel-
lation at least ten (10) days prior to the cancellation; except in the case of a renewal of a policy subsequent to
the closing of the loan, a paid receipt of the full amount of the applicable premium, and the amount of
insurance coverage.
Chapter 21 Title 25 Paragraph 2119
Applicable in Nevada
Any person who refuses to accept a binder which provides coverage of less than $1,000,000.00 when proof is
required: (A) Shall be fined not more than $500.00, and (B) is liable to the party presenting the binder as proof
of insurance for actual damages sustained therefrom.
pss
7
DATE (MMIDDIM
........... • MENEM= 10/ 111991
FRm"Unrl THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Sanford Insurance Agency
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
P.O. Box 64790
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Lubbock, TX 79464
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
(806) 792-5564
COMPANY
A MARYLAND CASUALTY
INSURED
City of Lubbock, ETAL
COMPAW
6
% DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC
5501 SPUR 327
CWAW
C
LUBBOCK TX 79424
COMPAW
D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO
LTR
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
PO4XV EFFECTIVE
DATE (MMMO/M
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE OUND01YY)
uw
I m
GENERAL LIABILITY
094EM AGGREGATE
I Sum=
A
COMMERCIAL GENERA. Lmmm
Binder # 6-Ml
10101196
10/01/97
PRomm - Comm Aaa
Is
CLAIMS MAW
COCCUR
PERSONAL & ADV WUM
EACH OCCURRENCE
mom
OWNERS & CONTRACTORS PROT
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one firs)
I
MED EXP (Any am person)
Is
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
MY Mao
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
S
I
BOOZY PIJURY
Olaf person)
ALL OWNED AUTOS
SCHEDULED Atm
BOOZY NJ"
(Per acekleno
S
HIRED AUTOS
NONOWIED Atm
PROPERTY DAMAGE
S
GARAGE LIABILITY
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT
S
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY.
.... ..
ANY AUTO
EACH ACCIDENT
I
AGGREGATE
Is
EXCESS UABLITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
IS
AGGREGATE
UMB1181A FORM
OTHER THAN UM&FMJA FORM
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
STATUTORY LIMITS
. ....... ...
... ....
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
EACH ACCIDENT
=
,THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL
PARTNERsomcurivE
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE
IIS
OFFICERS ARE EXCL
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONISILOCATIONRikES/SPE—IAL ITEMS
Bid #13677 Construction of Fire
Station # 7 Facility
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE orsemm) POLICIES BE CANC-10 SWORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL To MAL
CITY OF LUBBOCK
IENDEAYOR
10 DAYS MUTTEN NOTICE TID THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAND TO THE LEFT,
BUT FARM TO MAL SUCH NOTICE SHAM 1"SE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
P. 0. BOX 2000
OF MY IOND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS 0 1 It REPRESENTATIVES.
A REPRESENTATIVE
LUBBOCi TX 79457
"K
..... .. ...... .
4:.
..,ag..
4r^.:.
.:c:
'i.'::Sitt:i:•R'F:)1'iL:Si:�'f.•Y`.Tit:isvC':.ti{:?:i:.ti:•Yvi:•}:itrf.-0ixx:.4:.v:•isi}$:•}}X•}i}r:•}:�}:.:•
."'
}i::i}::4:'<•i ^.'::>:'"•'.} •.... `v: •'`: :: ' •, :•:•:Yi'Sri':•:i:::jF':ii''T ? : i :+i':.{iJ:}: }': Y�C,t7��
}
:`.:' 'ii':. 'i ...i :• :. :.. ... _. :$ `' �r ,::I.... ..d :: •: ••: •: .i:vi.•i,t:::: •:i•r., ,:#:•; �:, tJiy;:ff: w■•I
.: x•:... ..4 ::i,€.'::... r..:): .fir}r.. .;{. .
;;{i .... �; ;�.:;;. '} ,i ?i ;} .. ••i: v:: }. •:,.. f}: ::.. .., i.:+. :•.. a:.. sit .:
:.:• ;� ;: <•i' �iM1►...�•}:#•:� � .• f .":#:>:''<,<3:##:t <S:%x }.. ..3.... •...t .....t i.....�F r.:3': • #: t
:.•..:::..:.:.: r.... •}}}:•}:: tit :$;....::: •:: • •. �.: ^r. r...v. . ;...3/:..: ;t..:.....; .:....
................}......:..i..:::....a.:n.........i....>•,:. .:..>....:,:.,.,.t::.:•: .. ..... /
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A HATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
Sanford Insurance Agency HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
P.O. Box 64790 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
Lubbock, TX 79464
(806) 792-5564
Ca"A"Y
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
MARYLAND CASUALTY INS.
INSURED
DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION, INC.
Bahr
TEXAS WORK COMP FUND
COMPANY
C
COMMERCIAL ONION
5501 SPUR 327
LUBBOCK TX 79424
COMPANY
LTR
M
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE USTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POUCY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POUCIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
IXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. UMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
POLICY EFFECTIVE
DATE (MWDDIYY)
POLICY EXPIRATION
DATE pOYDD/YY)
LAM
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERA. AGGREGATE
:2„ M"
ENERA. cmAERctAL GLIABILITY
EPA2567W37
h
0 5 /` 7 /9 6
h
0 5 %Z 7 /9 7
PRODUCTS . compmp AGG
sZ,oDD;
14CLAMS
MADE Q OCCUR
PERSONAL A ADV INJURY
t1,000;
OJNEITS I CONTRACTORS PROT
EACH OCCURRENCE
=1 s
ALITOIOBIE
LIABILITY
k
A
X
ANY AUTO
y
ALL OWNED ALTOS
.f
t is
SCHEDULED AUTOS
HIRED AUTOS
X
A
X
NO WWNED AUTOS
LGE LIABLRV
ANY AUTO
FIE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $501000
MED EXP (Arty one person) 85,000
19437103 0 5 A 7 /9 6 0 5 A 7 /9 7 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 81,0,ow
ODDLY D IRY j
(Per person)
BODILY NJLIRY j
(Per &==dent)
E KCESS
LIABILITY
�x
A
X
UMBRELLA FORM
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
UBASM7677
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
B
EMPLOYERS' UABLTY
TSF131253-01
OARTNERSEECUTIVE
FFKERS ARE EXCL
CIBUILDERS RISK
COVERAGE
PROPERTY DAMAGE i
AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT :
OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY
EACH ACCIDENT t
AGGREGATE i
EACH OCCURRENCE $1000000
0 5 A 7 /9 6 0 5 A 7 /9 7 AGGREGATE IT loom
STATUTORY LIMITS
0 5 A 9 /9 6 0 5 /i 9 /9 7 EACH ACCIDENT :
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT i
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE i
05A7/96 I
05A7/97 I $1, 500, 000. COMM-RES
W/1000 DED
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSMLOCATIONSRYEHICL WSPECIAL fTFYS
HOLDER IS SHOWN AS ADDITIONAL INSURED ON GL AND AUTO
AS REQUIRED BY CONTRACT
WAIVER OF SUBROGATION ON WC AS REQUIRED BY CONTRACT
CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATE # 7 FACILITY BID #13677
CITY OF LUBBOCK
P. 0. BOX 2000
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE OESCR®ED POLICES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
E MRATIGN DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MA`
10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CFATIPICATE HOLDER NAM TO THE LEFT,
BUT FAILURE TO MA` SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABLRY
OF AFI KIND UPON THE COMPANY- 4TS AGENTS OR RMInI*171IES
TX 79457
NAME AND ADDRESS OF AWICY
DATE to/01196
.................................................
COMPANY
TEXAS WORKERS COMPENSATION
Sanford Insurance Agency
P.O. Box 64790
6303 Indiana Avenue
Lubbock TX 79464
Code. Sub Code:
........... ...................... ......................................................................... . ......
NAME AND MUM ADDRESS OF OWED
Wood, David Construction, Inc.
6501 Spur 327
Lubbock TX 79424-0000
Policy Nwam POLICY TYPE
TSFOO13125300 960529 Worker's Camp
................ ................. I ................ I ............... .....................
INCEPTION DATE OF POLICY E)FIRAMM DATE
05129196 05129/97
................................................................................................................................................
EFFECTIVE DATE OF CKANGE TIME
10101196 122-01
. .. .. ....... . .... ............ 11 ...... .
This Is an acknowledgement of your request. Upon approval,the com-
pany's records will be adjusted accordingly and It a premium adjust
:ment is required,it will be done at premium audit or by endorsement
..................... - .............................................................................. ................................ ........
TYPE OF CHANGE: ADD. CHANGE OR DELETE
Type of Change
Vsht
Year
Make. Model, Body Tips
VWSerlal Nuffiber
...................................
Garage L-a*-C'Y-STAp
..................
.......................
.................................. I .......... ..................................
SynVAge Cost New
Use
. ....................................................
Rafts
..................
emr" Clew
.....................................
SIC
Teo
.................
Factor
............................................
Liablility
.................. ..........
PIP E
.................. ............................ ................................
APP Mod Pay UnIns Mir
:Cornp Dad
..........................
ACV
.......................... ..... ...........
Specified Pork
......................
............
E Cog Dad
................
Towing
31 Ant
F I I F.T.W.
Dad
8
F&T LSP.
S
8
Type of Change
Veh#
Year
Make. Model, Body Type
VWSorkd Number
.............. ............. .......................
Garage Location-C4YST2113
...................
.......... * ...... ...................................................
SyrrdAge Cost Now
Use
....... I ....................................
Radius
....... .........................................
GMIGCW E Clan
sic
..... .........
Taff
.................
E Fwbr
.....................................
Liabillitir
...... ......... ..........
PIP
................ I .......... ................................................................
APIP Mod Pay Unins Mir
E Corrip Dad
I ......................................
I ACV
.................
Specified Park
......................................
Col Dad
; ................
Towing
1 51 Arnt
I IF I I F.T.W.
Dad
. . .. ..........
3
F&T I L.S.P.
9
8
Named Insured Malling Address Deducible Driver Information Additional Interest
Please Increase limits to 1,000/1,000/1,000.
Thank you, Peggy Stice
Sanford Insurance Agency
Attachment
P55
r
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Broker
Prior to Award of Contract
r I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have
h been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this
contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by
contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this
bid/proposal.
Agent (Signature) Agent (Print)
F
Name of Agent/Broker:
Address of Agent/Broker:
r City/State/Zip:
Agent/Broker Telephone Number. ( )
Date:
r
E
r
CONTRACTOR'S NAME:
(Print or Type )
CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS:
II NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER 1
If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the
contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please
contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165.
BID #13677 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY
r
r
7 A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
i
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based
on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, If the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity In writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after
the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to
provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed In at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the
legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or
to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for
the duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of
this rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(17 retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter,
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.0
I�
t
'
U
i
II
I
CONTRACT
'•. STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 26th day of September. 1996, by and between the City of
Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to
do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION. INC. of the CtiV of Lubbock. County
of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID # 13677 - CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION #7 FACILITY - $775,000.00
r.
? and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor,
insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the
contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
F
1
r
i
F
F
F
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance
with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year and day first above written.
ATTEST:
becreUry
APP OVED AS TO CONTENT:
"'9 Vre-sentlative
APPROVEDAASF1RM•
:�Q J'f
Attomey
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CITY OF LU BO K, EXAS (OWNER)
By:
MA O Rp
CONTRACTOR:
DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTIOINC.INN
By:
PRINTED NAME: L IU/ L. ���
TITLE:
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
David Wood Construction, Inc.
5501 Spur 327
Lubbock,Texas 79424
r
No Text
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. OWNER
r Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it
shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be
understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit DAVID WOOD CONSTRUCTION,,
INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and
specifications, were prepared, and GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, who will inspect constructions; or to
such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular
under this agreement. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's
Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to
Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
j Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, It shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order,
designation or prescription of the Owners Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved,"
"Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the
Owner's Representative.
r 6. SUBCONTRACTOR
t The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member
of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the
last business address known to him who gives the notice.
7
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials
or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract
documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in' a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him
and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
He will not be required,to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or
the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner
that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be
responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the
basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to
guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the
commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work
contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to
permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical
and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's
Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks,
etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his
Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owners Representative at
Contractor's expense.
8. WORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials
or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
r 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
w
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract
documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owners Representative will
check the Contractors layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractors request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him
and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
i
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owners Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or
the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner
that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be
responsible for the Contractors failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the
basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to
guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the. Owners Representative whenever necessary for the
commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work
contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to
permit Owners Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical
and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owners
r►, Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks,
etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his
Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owners Representative at
Contractors expense.
t
fi
t
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such
N stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and
disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases,
determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract.
He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases,
}� decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor.
The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on
the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the
Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to
the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is fumished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
r-• fumish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
i inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his
decision.
i 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions
given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable
representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision
shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
'.. subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this
contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before
or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
I
r
r
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work
required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owners Representative shall inform
him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such
man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owners
Representative's written consent.
r" 18. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution
and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and
it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or
protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and
accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owners Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at
all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owners Representative.
{
20. SANITATION
r-• Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall
be approved by the Owners Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
'~ 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owners Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work.
Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and
testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owners Representative and shall give ample notice as to
the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owners Representative may reject
any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its
completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owners Observer has
previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or
r, consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owners Representative, be uncovered for examination
at Contractors expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owners Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owners Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owners Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such
other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owners Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owners Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractors expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be bome by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective.
Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractors expense.
F
7
i
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections,
tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the
requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
r- the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice
thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such
work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action
contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof,
either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for
a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount
of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual
loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally
planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not
r.. covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus
fifteen (15%) percent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment,
for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily
incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security,
Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all
I
i
other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost
shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
r- (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead,
general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced
within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be
maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be
.• included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
r any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's
Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what
does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists
r" upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order
f and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C).
The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below
.. provided.
i
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans
and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall
include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract
documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a
clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior
to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included
and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and
specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days
prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
t
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality
of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order
i
the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
r�
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
r~ provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
r-,
A
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and
�- save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any
i character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person
or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their
agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject
r matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary
barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained
against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work
progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption
of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
r 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All
policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a
subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate
of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative,
shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular
project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all
proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each
subcontractor.
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1.000,000
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage.Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
i
ro
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1.000,000 Combined Single
Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $ 01. 00,000 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and
Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance Policy
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price
(100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
}
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1.000.000 on all contracts with
r coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability
coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $1.000.000.
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of
authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-
G 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for
the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
contractoes/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in ❑
entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the
project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless
of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent
contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of
any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the
project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services"
does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply
deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements
j` of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services
on the project, for the duration of the project.
r
rw
1
i
f 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to
the governmental entity:
j (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
` governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
.• coverage ends during the duration of the project.
` 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed
by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on
the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage
and report lack of coverage.
9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a)
provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b)
provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
r
4
(c)
provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
r•
f
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d)
obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor.
P
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
,--
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
r:
(e)
retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter,
I
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
contractor Is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -
Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The contractors failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the
Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as
evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative
of the insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date bome by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date bome by
r such certificate.
i
` (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured
at the address shown in the bid specifications.
i
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
f (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the
job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
t
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of
the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and
filling of any coverage agreements;
i
i
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on
the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for
one year thereafter,
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must
be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and
any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be
the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any
additional words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
Insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the Identity of their employer or status as an employee.'
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
Information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage." and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
() provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
r
r
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in
subsection (e) (3) of this rule;
(iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
r• materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided
to the person for whom they are providing services.
�" 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
30.
E
Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990,
and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND
FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any
demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts
thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the
performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all
obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the.work, Contractor shall allow any, indebtedness.to. accrue. for work furnished by any of
those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within
five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain
unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness
or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
r
f
i�
i
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
r The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device,
material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or
Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and
shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend
all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or
process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract
documents by Owner, provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to
the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If
the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for
such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement.
r 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
t
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
r' regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the
F Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by
the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance
therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be
r` adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to
be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owners
Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar
as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner
may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect
as though embodied herein.
33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the
fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or
materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to
the Owner, as provided by this contractual agreement.
i
34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential
conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this
r' contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any
proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the
consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractors total
compensation, the sum of $300.00 (THREE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as
liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the
Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the
,... completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
x consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality.
f
k
I
9
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the
impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event
r sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner
from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract.
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor
shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such
manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of
prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance
with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's
Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts
will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owners Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to cant' on the work, with dates at which the
r" Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
36. EXTENSION OF TIME
{ The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of
this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this
locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he
shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owners Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
r.. enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written
justification as may be required by Owners Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor.
The Owners Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the
Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to
Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the
time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to
such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be
made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work
embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owners Representative for
the Owners convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owners Representative that is
r, caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
d
1 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
r No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
,,. specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
R
to be fumished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done
and material to be fumished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for
estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and
r" agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be fumished under this contract may differ
r
i
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price
method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
rM
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
l encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for
any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor
�► agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any
injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such
` indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work.
t
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work
r� by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive
such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses
incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to
1. this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's
Representative.
r
a 41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
I^ contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
f work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
r.. with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
j are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner which have
not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
t"
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
r for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of
` the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment
showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last
I" day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of
the work that are to be fabricated into the work.
i'
t
t
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of
the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of this agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to
completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual
delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written
recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage
due Contractor.
a
I"
�^ 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work
has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the
work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the
contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of
completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of
r* acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
9
44. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final
4 measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the
terms of the agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the
31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this
t agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said
payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of
acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of
the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this
contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
�•- 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
C Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's
Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not,
and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials
r conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's
f Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any
damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with
reasonable promptness.
47. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any
certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which
will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
r
i 48. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS
r"` It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's
Representative has given any directions, order or Instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision
j in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand
for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after
the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that
F` final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a
bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents.
49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written
notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of
�. the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the
Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete
the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment
under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or
another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore
(except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph
24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the
cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for
within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either
of the following elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such
labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so
charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may
thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such
expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been
completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is
greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been
completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess
to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion
of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In
case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been
the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and
remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less
than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his
Surety shall be credited therewith.
P` When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and
certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A
complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct
shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the
t
r
i Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date
of certificate of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this
contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner,
then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the
[ Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor
and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there
r• remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together
with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the
respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any
manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the
r" risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery,
equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the
r Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the
Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain
on the 'jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said
r.. terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly
abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the
ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work.
Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor,
!" which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the
i attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra
Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to
cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to cant' the whole work to completion, and which cannot
be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by
deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained
by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the
r- Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by
said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
51. BONDS
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253,
Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds
$25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an
approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this
contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished.
52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
17 In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special
conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special
conditions shall control.
53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
r^ Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be
i done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same,
r"
r
71 or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be
sustained and bome by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
r
54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority
to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
! covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owners Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested
r in the Owner or Owners Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect
the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owners
' Representative or to the Contractors own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
7 55. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials
k and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case
of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
r
r
Resolution No. 51'1
r March 14, 1996
f Item #19
r RESOLUTION
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of
i per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public
r• i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's
Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
�., WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February
i : 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by
Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987; and
r-
WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the
i current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
' BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
,i
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be
as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made
i a part hereof for all intents and purposes:
d•'
Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction
r'
Exhibit C. Overtime Rate
Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and
such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law.
r„
r
r"
r
r
Passed by the City Council this 14th
ATTEST:
Betty M. Jdhnson, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
Mary AndrYws, Managing Director of
Human Resources
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
afold Willard; Assistant City Attorney
H W :da/ccdocs/pubworks. res
February 14. 1996
2
EXHEBTf A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Asbestos Worker
Asbestos Supervisor
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Furisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -Heavy
Equipment Operator -Light
Floor Installer
Glazier
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer -General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer Helper
Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder -Certified
Hourly Rate
10.00
11.00
5.50
8.00
11.00
11.00
6.00
11.00
6.00
7.50
10.00
13.00
6.00
8.50
7.50
8.50
8.00
9.00
5.50
8.00
5.50
5.50
9.50
10.50
6.00
8.00
5.50
8.75
5.50
10.00
r
r
EXIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hooir y Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
6.00
Asphalt Shoveler
5.50
Concrete Finisher
7.35
Concrete Finisher -Helper
5.75
Electriaaa
10.50
Fhagger
5.50
Form Setter
6.50
Form Setter -Helper
5.50
Laborer -General
5.50
Laborer -Utility
6.25
Mechanic
7.25
Mechanic -Helper
5.50
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.00
Bulldozer
7.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.00
Front End Loader
6.50
Heavy Equipment Operator
7.00
Light Equipment Operator
6.50
Motor Grader Operator
8.50
Roller
6.00
Scraper
6.50
Tractor
6.50
Truck Driver -Light
6.00
Truck Driver -Heavy
6.50
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate.
r ..
l
■
ell PROJECT
FIRE STAtIbN NUMBER 7
;t! FUND PROJECT NO. 900-9264 ,•'StP�'� °sh+
�...•-..- t i Jul 31 st 1996 S: ' •
DWAYNE R. AGNEW Y
»........ . RIGHT
37645 ..:............. ... .........i
�'� •,
!k : w 'M: fit,} . '^'.•�•� . .'
K
+ 1
dw
AA
Owl
♦
.......... ........... ...•..........
.w .0 •�EL...
n y::.:.... „„ ;
.<
r "City of Lubbock ire" Departmen
+
Public Safety Improvement Program
1996-2005
Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
rchitects Planners n AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC.
�� A
o��D aRcy ,,,� ,m;.".. • ILIcr=AL CONKXTM Uffimm
0.
J0 R. RAPIER a . .
°f
as . � P • .:.cTOR04
,
J�''�- l�I; TONAL' E-ao+
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SECTIONS INDEX
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
Summary of Work
01031
Alternates
01200
Progress Documentation and Procedures
01300
Submittals
01400
Quality Control Procedures
01600
Product Requirements
01700
Construction Procedures
01800
Project Record Documents
DIVISION 2
- SITEWORK
02200
Earthwork
02280
Soil Treatment
02520
Portland Cement Concrete Paving
02830
Chain Link Fences and Gates
DIVISION 3
- CONCRETE
03300
Cast -In -Place Concrete
DIVISION 4
- MASONRY
04230
Reinforced Unit Masonry
04255
Veneer Masonry Systems
DIVISION 5
- METALS
05120
Structural Steel
05210
Steel Joists
05313
Steel Roof Deck
05315
Steel Form Deck
05400
Cold Formed Metal Framing
05500
Metal Fabrications
05530
Gratings
DIVISION 6
- WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100
Rough Carpentry
06410
Custom Cabinetwork
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 900-9264
DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE PROTECTION
07180
Water Repellents
07410
Manufactured Metal Roof and Wall Panels
07525
Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing
07600
Flashing and Sheet Metal
07700
Roof Specialties and Accessories
07900
Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
08211
Solid Core Flush Wood Doors
08364
Steel Sectional Overhead Doors
08415
Aluminum Storefront
08520
Aluminum Windows
08710
Door Hardware
08800
Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09220✓ Portland Cement Plaster
09260
—Gypsum Board Systems
09300 Tile
09511
`Acoustical Lay -In Ceilings
09650
Resilient Flooring
09680
Carpet
09900
Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10200
Louvers and Vents
10350
Flagpoles
10425
Signs
10505
Metal Lockers
10521
Fire Extinguishers
10810
Toilet Accessories
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT USED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12511
Horizontal Louver Blinds
12621
Portable Chalk, Marker and Tack Boards
DIVISION 13
- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT USED
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 900-9264
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000
General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical
15100
Site Utilities
15200
Piping and Accessories
15210
Plumbing Systems
15280
Fire Protection and Sprinkler System
15320
Air Distributions
15330
Hangers and Supports
15400
Insulation
15550
Equipment
15600
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16000
General Provisions For Electrical
16110
Raceways and Fittings
16115
Underground Electrical Duct
16120
Conductors
16140
Wiring Devices
16160
Cabinets and Enclosures
16180
Equipment Controls and Wiring Systems
16195
Electrical Identification
16400
Electrical Service
16441
Circuit and Motor Disconnect Switches
16450
Grounding and Bonding
16470
Panelboards
16475
Circuit Disconnect and Overcurrent Protective Devices
16481
Motor Controllers
16500
Lighting
16670
Lightning Protection Systems
16721
Fire Alarm Systems
16915
Lighting Control Systems
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 900-9264
r
INDEX OF DRAWINGS (Bound Separately)
Civil
Cl
Site Survey
C2
Site Layout Plan
C3
Site Grading
C4
Jointing Layout
C5
Misc. Details
Structural
S 1
Foundation Plan
S2
Framing Plan
S3
Foundation Details
S4
Framing Details
S5
General Notes
Architectural
Al
Abbreviations and Legends
A2
Floor Plan
A3
Exterior Elevations and Building Section
A4
Wall Sections
AS
Wall Sections (Not Used)
A6
Reflected Ceiling Plan & Enlarged Toilet Plans
A7
Roof Plan, Building Section and Details
A8
Door & Finish Schedules
A9
Millwork Elevations and Details
A10
Wall Sections and Details
All
Millwork and Wall Sections
Mechanical
MPE
Utilities
M1
Floor Plan Schedules and Details
M2
Details
Plumbing
P 1
Floor Plan and Schedules
P2
Details
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 TABLE OF CONTENTS
900-9264
Electrical
El
Floor Plan - Lighting
E2
Floor Plan - Power
E3
Floor Plan - RVAC Power
E4
Floor Plan - Communications and Fire Alarm
E5
Details
APPENDIX
Soils Boring Logs
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS 900-9264
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The owner is: City of Lubbock, Texas, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas.
B. Section Includes:
1. Project description.
2. Permits and licenses.
3. Access to the site.
4. Contractor's use of the premises.
S. Coordination requirements.
6. Coordination drawings.
7. Preconstruction meeting.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. The project consists of a new 2-Bay Fire Station with related site work, utilities, equipment,
etc.
1. At 202 Slide Road, Lubbock, Texas.
2. As shown in contract documents prepared by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper, Inc., 4010
Avenue R, Lubbock, Texas 79412.
a. Dated July 31, 1996
B. The owner will be performing the following work:
1. Compressor Equipment, hoses, etc. GC to wire compressor unit and provide PVC
sleeves underslab for air hoses, as shown.
2. Hose Dryer Equipment. GC to wire and vent dryer.
3. Washer and Dryer in Hose Storage Room. GC to provide utility hook-ups and vents.
4. Refrigerators. GC to provide utility hook-ups.
S. Ice Maker. GC to provide utility hook-ups.
6. SCBA miscellaneous equipment as shown on drawings by dashed line. Work tables by
GC as shown.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Furnish: To supply products to the project site, including delivering ready for unloading and
replacing damaged and rejected products.
B. Install: To put products in place in the work ready for the intended use, including unloading,
unpacking, handling, -storing, assembling, installing, erecting, placing, applying, anchoring,
working, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
C. Provide: To furnish and install products.
D. Indicated: Shown, noted, scheduled, specified, or drawn, somewhere in the contract
documents.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
01010-1
900-9264
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Submit copies of all permits, licenses, and similar permissions obtained, and receipts for fees _
paid, to the owner directly.
1.5 ACCESS TO THE SITE AND USE OF THE PREMISES
A. The space available to the contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in
conjunction with others performing other construction as part of the project, is restricted to the area within the legal description of the site unless the contractor makes arrangements to use
additional space.
B. Signs: Provide signs adequate to direct visitors.
1. Do not install, or allow to be installed, signs other than specified sign(s) and signs
identifying the principal entities involved in the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. A preconstruction meeting will be held at a time and place designated by the architect, for the
purpose of identifying responsibilities of the owner's and the architect's personnel and
explanation of administrative procedures.
B. The contractor shall also use this meeting for the following minimum agenda:
1. Construction schedule.
2. Use of areas of the site.
3. Delivery and storage.
4. Safety.
5. Security.
6. Cleaning up.
7. Subcontractor procedures relating to:
a. Submittals.
b. Change orders.
C. Applications for payment.
d. Record documents.
C. Attendees shall include:
1. The owner.
2. The architect, and any consultants.
3. The contractor and its superintendent.
4. Major subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators.
5. Others interested in the work.
3.2 SECURITY PROCEDURES
A. Limit access to the site to persons involved in the work.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01010-2 900-9264
B. Provide secure storage for materials for which the owner has made payment and which are
stored on site.
C. Secure completed work as required to prevent loss.
D. Secure this site by means of fencing, security guards or other means to prevent damage, theft,
safety hazards or other problems on the site.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. If necessary, inform each party involved, in writing, of procedures required for coordination;
include requirements for giving notice, submitting reports, and attending meetings.
1. Inform the owner when coordination of his work is required.
B. See other requirements in other portions of the contract documents.
C. Prepare the coordination drawings specified in product sections.
1. Where space is limited, show plan and cross-section dimensions of space available,
including structural obstructions and ceilings as applicable.
2. Coordinate shop drawings prepared by separate entities.
3. Show installation sequence when necessary for proper installation.
END OF SECTION 01010
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01010-3
900-9264
SECTION 01031 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
CA. Section Includes:
` 1. Alternates:
a. List of alternates.
b. Procedures for alternate work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Applications for payment: Elsewhere in Division 1.
2. Procedures for modifications to the contract: Elsewhere in Division 1.
3. Contract closeout procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1.
r
1.2 ALTERNATE LIST
A. Alternate No. 1: Flagpole.
1. Add Flagpole.
2. As specified in section(s) 3300, 10350
3. As shown on drawing(s) (See Civil Sheets)
B. Alternate No. 2 : Emergency Generator.
1. Provide Emergency Generator connected to Emergency Panel (in Base Building),
installed complete and ready to use.
2. As specified in Electrical Specification Sections.
3. As shown on Electrical Sheets.
C. Alternate No. 3 : Additional (12) Metal Lockers
1. Add 12 additional lockers identical to the 12 in the Base Bid.
2. As specified in section(s) 10500.
3. As shown on Architectural Sheets.
1.3 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
A. Alternates:
1. Indicate prigs for each alternate on bid form; if no change in price is required, indicate
no change.
2. Indicate on the bid form the amount to be added or deducted from the base bid, should
the alternate be accepted, indicating whether it is an "ADD" or a "DEDUCT" price.
3. Include in alternate price all materials, parts, and accessories required for a complete
installation, regardless of whether they are mentioned in the alternate description.
4. Voluntary alternates will not be considered in evaluation of bids.
5. Alternates will be accepted in the order listed.
6. Accepted alternates will be identified in the agreement.
PART 2 - PRODUCT'S (NOT USED)
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01031-1 900-9264
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ALTERNATES
A. Notify in writing each entity involved of the status of each alternate, immediately after
notification by the owner.
1. Include complete description of any changes agreed upon.
B. Coordinate alternate work with related work and modify adjacent work as required.
END OF SECTION 01031
4 ;
SECTION 01200 - PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES
!"' PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Progress documentation requirements:
�.. a. Contractor's construction schedule.
b. Progress reports.
2. Progress procedures:
a. Progress meetings.
B. Contract time is indicated elsewhere.
C. Related Sections:
1. Applications for payment: Elsewhere in Division 1.
2. Coordination meetings: Elsewhere in Division 1.
3. Preconstruction meeting: Elsewhere in Division 1.
f 4. Schedule of values: Elsewhere in Division 1
S. Submittal schedule: Elsewhere in Division 1.
.-i 6. Quality control activities schedule: Elsewhere in Division 1.
t'
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1. Submit within 14 days after notice to proceed.
2. Submit revised schedule with application for payment.
B. Daily Construction Reports: Submit every week.
j ~ C. Progress Reports: Submit with each application for payment.
i
D. Minutes of Progress Meetings.
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
r, A. Schedules - General:
1. Provide legend of symbols and abbreviations for each schedule.
2. Use the same terminology as that used in the contract documents.
,•� 3. When transparencies are submitted, use only media which will not fade or lose contrast
over time.
4. When opaque copies are submitted,. -submit a minimum of 3 copies.
B. Bar Charts:
` 1. Provide individual horizontal bars representing the duration of each major activity.
2. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities.
3. Show activities in proper sequence.
I 4. Show percentage of completion of each activity.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01200-1 900-9264
5. Include cost bar at top of chart, showing estimated and actual costs of work performed
at the date of each application for payment. _
6. Use vertical lines to mark the time scale at not more than one week intervals.
7. Prepare on reproducible transparency.
8. Use sheets of sufficient number and width to show the full schedule clearly.
C. Reports - General:
1. Submit a minimum of 3 copies.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. In preparation of schedules, take into account the time allowed or required for the architect's
administrative procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Contractor'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Prepare and submit a construction schedule.
B. Provide construction schedule in the form of bar charts:
1. Use the same items of work as shown in the schedule of values.
2. Where related activities must be performed in sequence, show relationship graphically.
3. Incorporate the submittal schedule specified elsewhere.
4. Coordinate with the quality control activities schedule specified elsewhere.
5. Show dates of: —
a. Each activity that influences the construction time.
b. Preconstruction meeting.
C. Ordering dates for products requiring long lead time. �.
d. All submittals required.
e. Substantial and final completion, with time frames for the architect's completion
procedures. _
6. Show dates required for:
a. Approval of mock-ups required for approval of products. -
7. In developing the schedule take into account:
a. Weather, including seasonal changes.
C. The architect will notify the contractor if schedule is not satisfactory; revise and resubmit.
1. Resubmit within 7 days
D. Make and distribute copies of schedule to the architect, to the owner, to subcontractors, and
to other entities whose work will be influenced by schedule dates. —
1. Hang a copy of the schedule up in each field office or meeting room.
E. Update the schedule whenever changes occur or are made, or when new information is —
received, but not less often than at the same intervals at which applications for payment are
made.
1. Indicate changes made since last issue; show actual dates for activities completed.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01200-2 900-9264
2. Submit updated schedule with application for payment.
3. Issue updated schedule with report of meeting at which revisions are made.
4. Issue updated schedule in same manner as original schedule.
3.2 PROGRESS REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Logs: Every day, record the following information concerning events at
the site:
1. Weather conditions; high and low temperatures.
2. Approximate number of persons at the site.
3. Visitors to the site.
4. Modifications to the contract received; modifications implemented.
5. Delays; reasons for delay.
6. Emergencies and accidents.
7. Equipment and system start-ups and tests.
8. Field quality control activities conducted.
9. Instrument and meter readings.
10. Losses of material and property.
11. Meetings held and significant decisions made there.
12. Names of subcontractors at site.
13. Special reports made.
14. Orders and requests of representatives of governing authorities.
15. Unusual events.
16. Utility service disconnections and connections.
B. Progress Reports: Prepare a narrative report describing the general state of completion of the
work and describing in detail the following:
1. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions taken
or proposed.
2. Actual and potential problems.
3. Effect of delays, problems, and changes on the schedules of other prime contractors.
4. Status of corrective work ordered by the architect.
3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and conduct periodic progress meetings during construction period.
1. Have meetings once a month.
2. Notify the architect and the owner at least one week in advance of date of meeting; the
architect and the owner may attend.
B. The following are required to attend:
1. Project superintendent.
2. Major subcontractors and suppliers.
3. Others who have an interest in the agenda.
C. Prepare and distribute agenda prior to meetings; cover the following topics when applicable:
1. Review minutes of previous meeting.
2. Status of submittals and impending submittals.
3. Off -site fabrication and delivery schedules.
4. Actual progress of activities in relation to the schedule.
4~
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01200-3 900-9264
r
S. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions taken
or proposed.
6. Actual and potential problems.
7. Status of change order work.
8. Effect of proposed changes on schedule and coordination.
9. Status of corrective work ordered by the architect.
10. Progress expected to be made during the next period.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 7 days to the architect, to the owner, to all
participants, and to all entities affected by decisions made.
END OF SECTION 01200
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01200-4 900-9264
L
pal
4
F
r-
r
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparing and processing of submittals for review and action.
2. Preparing and processing of informational submittals.
B. Submit the following for the architect's review and action:
1. Shop drawings.
2. Product data.
3. Samples.
C. Submit the following as informational submittals:
1. Structural design information required by the contract documents.
2. Certificates.
3. Coordination drawings.
4. Reports.
S. Qualification statements for manufacturerslinstallers.
6. Submittals for which procedures are not defined elsewhere.
D. Specific submittals required are described in individual sections.
1. Provide other information required by Division 15 for mechanical work.
2. Provide other information required by Division 16 for electrical work.
E. Related Sections: The following are specified elsewhere in Division 1:
1. Payment, modification, and completion submittals.
a. Applications for payment.
b. Schedule of values.
C. Change proposals.
2. Progress of work submittals:
a. Contractor's construction schedules.
b. Progress reports.
3. Quality control submittals:
a. Inspection reports.
b. Test reports.
4. Product submittals:
a. Product option submittals.
b. Requests for substitution.
C. Operating and maintenance data.
d. Warranties.
C. Maintenance materials and tools.
5. Contract closeout submittals:
a. Equipment and systems demonstration reports.
b. Request for determination of substantial completion.
C. Certificate of occupancy.
d. Project record documents.
e. Bonds.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01300-1
900-9264
6. Other administrative submittals:
a. Survey data.
b. Layout data.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. "Shop drawings" are drawings and other data prepared, by the entity who is to do the work,
specifically to show a portion of the work.
1. Shop drawings also include:
a. Product data specifically prepared for this project.
b. Shop or plant inspection and test reports, when made on specific materials,
products, or systems to be used in the work.
B. "Product data submittals" are standard printed data which show or otherwise describe a product
or system, or some other portion of the work.
1. Product data submittals also include:
a. Performance curves, when issued by the manufacturer for all products of that
type.
b. Selection data showing standard colors.
c. Wiring diagrams, when standard for all products of that type.
C. "Samples" are actual examples of the products or work to be installed.
D. Informational Submittals: Submittals identified in the contract documents as to be submitted
for information only.
1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
A. Sheets Larger Than 8-1/2 by 14 Inches:
1. Sheet size: 24 x 36 inches, maximum drawing size, or 8 1/2 x 11 or 8 1/2 x 14 for
others.
a. Exception: Full size pattern or template drawings.
2. Number of copies:
a. Submittals for review:
1. Reproducible will be returned.
2. S copies of blue- or black -line prints, plus quantity required by the
contractor.
3. All but 3 copies will be returned.
b. Informational submittals:
1. 3 copies of opaque prints.
2. No copies will be returned.
B. Small Sheets or Pages:
1. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 by 11 inches.
2. Maximum sheet size for opaque copies: 8-1/2 by 14 inches.
3. Number of copies:
a. Opaque copies:
1. For review: S copies.
a. 3 copies will be retained.
2. Informational submittals: 3 copies
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01300-2 900-9264
i
1
r
C. Samples: 3 sets of each.
... 1. 1 set will be returned.
D. If additional sets are needed by other entities involved in work represented by the samples,
submit with original submittal.
E. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned.
F. Provide additional copies for project record documents.
1.4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS
A. Coordinate submittals and activities that must be performed in sequence, so that the architect
has enough information to properly review the submittals.
B. Coordinate submittals of different types for the same product or system so that the architect has
enough information to properly review each submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS
A. Deliver each submittal requiring approval in time to allow for adequate review and processing
time, including resubmittals if necessary; failure of the contractor in this respect will not be
considered as grounds for an extension of the contract time.
B. Deliver each informational submittal prior to start of the work involved, unless the submittal
is of a type which cannot be prepared until after completion of the work; submit promptly.
C. If a submittal must be processed within a certain time in order to maintain the progress of the
work, state so clearly on the submittal.
D. If a submittal must be delayed for coordination with other submittals not yet submitted, the
architect may at his option either return the submittal with no action or notify the contractor of
the other submittals which must be received before the submittal can be reviewed.
E. Allow a minimum of 2 weeks for the first processing of each submittal. Allow more time when
submittals must be coordinated with later submittals.
F. Allow a minimum of 1 week for processing of resubmittals.
3.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Contractor Review: Sign transmittal form for each submittal certifying compliance with the
requirements of the contract documents.
B. Notify the architect, in writing and at time of submittal, of all points upon which the submittal
r.. does not conform to the requirements of the contract documents, if any.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01300-3 900-9264
C. Do not commence work which requires review of any submittals until receipt of returned
submittals with an acceptable action.
D. Do not allow submittals without an acceptable action marking to be used for the project.
E. Do not submit substitute items that have not been approved by means of the procedure
specified elsewhere.
F. Do not include requests for substitution (either direct or indirect) on submittals; comply with --
procedures for substitutions specified elsewhere.
G. Preparation of Submittals: —
1. Label each copy of each submittal, with the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date of submittal.
C. Contractor's name and address.
d. Architect's name and address.
e. Subcontractor's name and address.
f. Supplier's name and address.
g. Manufacturer's name.
h. Specification section where the submittal is specified.
i. Numbers of applicable drawings and details.
j. Other necessary identifying information.
2. Pack submittals suitably for shipment.
3. Submittals to receive architect's action marking: Provide blank space on the label or on the submittal itself for action marking; minimum 4 inches wide by 5 inches high.
H. Transmittal of Submittals: .-
1. Submit all submittals to the architect.
2. Submittals will be accepted from the contractor only. Submittals received from other
entities will be returned without review or action. _
3. Submittals received without a transmittal form will be returned without review or action.
4. Transmittal form: Use a form acceptable to the architect; provide space on form for:
a. Project name.
b. Submittal date.
C. Transmittal number.
d. Specification section number.
e. To:
L From:
g. Contractor's name.
h. Subcontractor's and supplier's names.
i. Manufacturer's name.
j. Submittal type (shop drawing, product data, sample, informational submittal).
k. Description of submittal.
1. Records of distribution.
in. Action marking.
n. The contractor's certification signature.
o. Comments.
5. Fill out a separate transmittal form for each submittal; also include the following:
a. Other relevant information. _
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01300-4 900-9264
r
b. Requests for additional information.
3.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Content: Include the following information:
1. Dimensions, at accurate scale.
2. All field measurements that have been taken, at accurate scale.
3. Names of specific products and materials used.
4. Details, identified by contract document sheet and detail numbers.
5. Coordination requirements; show relationship to adjacent or critical work.
6. Name of preparing firm.
B. Preparation:
1. Reproductions of contract documents are not acceptable as shop drawings.
2. Copies of standard printed documents are not acceptable as shop drawings.
3. Identify as indicated for all submittals.
4. Space for architect's action marking shall be adjacent to the title block.
3.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Submit all product data submittals for each system or unit of work as one submittal.
B. When product data submittals are prepared specifically for this project (in the absence of
standard printed information) submit such information as shop drawings and not as product data
submittals.
C. Content:
1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed data sheets.
2. Identify the particular product being submitted; submit only pertinent pages.
3. Show compliance with properties specified.
4. Identify which options and accessories are applicable.
5. Include recommendations for application and use.
6. Show compliance with the specific standards referenced.
7. Show compliance with specified testing agency listings; show the limitations of their
labels or seals, if any.
8. Identify dimensions which have been verified by field measurement.
9. Show special coordination requirements for the product.
3.5 SAMPLES
C' A. Samples:
1. Provide samples that are the same as proposed product.
2. Where unavoidable variations must be expected, submit "range" samples, minimum of
r 3 units, and describe or identify variations among units of each set.
3. Where selection is required, provide full set of all options.
B. Preparation:
1. Attach a description to each sample.
2. Attach name of manufacturer or source to each sample.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 013DO-5 9DO-9264
3. Where compliance with specified properties is required, attach documentation showing
compliance.
4. Where there are limitations in availability, delivery, or other similar characteristics,
attach description of such limitations.
5. Where samples are specified to be returned for installation in the work, indicate such
requirement on transmittal form.
6. Where selection is required, the first submittal may be a single set of all options; after
return of submittal with selection indicated, submit standard number of sets of selected
item.
3.6 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for approval will be reviewed, marked with appropriate action, and returned.
B. Informational submittals: Submittals will be reviewed.
3.7 RETURN, RESUBMITTAL, AND DISTRIBUTION
A. Submittals will be returned to the contractor by mail.
B. Perform resubmittals in the same manner as original submittals; indicate all changes other than
those requested by the architect.
C. Distribution:
1. Distribute returned submittals to all subcontractors and suppliers involved in work
covered by the submittal.
2. Make extra copies for operation and maintenance data submittals, as required.
END OF SECTION 01300
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01300-6
900-9264
r ,
t
4
F
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
r
r
i.
A. Section Includes:
1. General quality control activities.
2. Procedures for the following:
a. Testing and evaluation of test results.
b. Inspections.
C. Construction and evaluation of mock-ups.
d. Manufacturers' field services.
3. Procedures for quality control activities performed by:
r„ a. Public authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Architect.
C. Independent testing agencies.
d. Contractor.
e. Manufacturers' representatives.
4. Procedures for submittal of quality control documentation.
B. Quality control activities required are specified in other sections.
t
C. See General Conditions for additional requirements for testing, inspections, and approvals.
0 D. Related Sections:
1. Alternates: Elsewhere in Division 1.
2. Contractor's construction schedule: Elsewhere in Division 1.
3. Submittal procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1.
1.2 CONTRACT CONDITIONS
A. When portions of the work are required by the contract documents or by governing authorities
to be tested, inspected, or approved, such tests, inspections, and approvals shall be made at the
appropriate time-
B. Unless otherwise indicated, all tests, inspections, and approvals shall be made by an
r independent testing agency, the appropriate public authority, or other entity acceptable to the
owner.
t" C. Unless otherwise specified, the contractor shall arrange for all tests, inspections, and approvals
to be made and shall pay costs of all tests, inspections, and approvals, including related costs
due to such tests, inspections, and approvals.
D. The contractor shall notify the architect of the time and place where tests and inspections are
to be made so the architect may have adequate time to arrange to observe such procedures.
E. If the contract documents require that the architect observe tests, inspections, or approvals, the
architect will do so at no additional cost to the contractor, provided such tests, inspections, or
approvals are to be conducted at the project site.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01400-1 900-9264
i
1. When witnessing of such tests and inspections by the architect at locations other than the
project site is specified, the contractor shall bear all costs relating to the architect's travel _
to the testing or inspection location.
F. The owner shall pay for tests, inspections, and approvals which become requirements after bids
are received or negotiations concluded, unless noted otherwise. —
G. If the architect gives the contractor written instruction to perform additional testing or
inspection not already included in the contract documents, the contractor shall arrange for such
additional testing or inspection. The owner shall pay for such tests and inspections except as
provided in the following paragraphs.
H. If such additional procedures show that portions of the work do not comply with the contract
documents, the contractor shall pay all costs arising thereafter due to such noncompliance
including those due to repeating such procedures as well as payment for the services and
expenses of the architect.
I. Unless otherwise indicated, the contractor shall obtain all certificates of testing, inspection, and
approval and shall promptly deliver them to the architect.
J. Independent testing agencies, whether employed by the owner or the contractor, may not
change the requirements of the contract documents and may not approve any portion of the
work.
K. Employment of testing agencies, by the contractor or the owner, shall not relieve the contractor
of his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Certificate: A written statement that a portion of the work as accomplished or a particular
product conforms to the requirements of the contract documents.
B. Installer: Any entity who performs a construction activity, whether an employee,
subcontractor, or sub -subcontractor of the contractor.
C. Reference Standard: Any document incorporated into the specification by reference rather than
by inclusion of complete text; including, but not limited to, voluntary specifications prepared
by standards organizations and industry organizations. ,
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Reference Standards - General:
1. Comply with edition of standard indicated; if date is not indicated, comply with edition
in effect as of.
a. Date of agreement.
2. Compliance with standards which are revised or reissued after that date will not be
required unless incorporated into the contract documents by modification.
3. Where applicable codes, laws, or regulations require editions of different dates, obtain
instructions from the governing authorities as to which edition is required.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01400-2 900-9264
r
B. The requirements of reference standards are binding on the contractor, just as if they were
copied into the contract documents, but no provisions of reference standards shall alter the
contractual relationship of the parties to the contract.
C. Keep at the site at least one copy of each reference standard specified which covers field
mixing, installation quality, or field quality control methods.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Reports: Provide certified copies of reports.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, submit for information only.
2. Submit reports within 2 weeks after execution of quality control activity, but not later
than the date of application for payment for the work to which the quality control activity
relates.
3. Reports shall be prepared by the entity performing the quality control activity.
4. Submit copies directly to governing authorities when so directed.
5. When the contractor employs an independent testing agency, submit copies directly to
the architect.
6. Include the following information in all types of reports:
a. Date of report.
b. Project name (and number, if applicable).
C. Description of the quality control activity.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing activity.
e. Date quality control activity was performed.
f. Specification section(s) involved.
g. Basis for evaluation (test method, etc.).
h. Results or conclusions, including evaluations and interpretations.
i. Title, name, and signature of person performing activity.
7. Include the following information in all test reports:
a. Locations from which samples were taken, if any.
b. Ambient conditions at time of activity.
C. Recommendations for retesting, if any.
B. Certificates: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Certificates shall be signed by the product manufacturer, unless otherwise specified or
not applicable.
2. Include the following information:
a. Date of certificate.
b. Project name (and number, if applicable).
C. Description of the product or system certified.
d. Specification section(s) involved.
e. When actual materials to be used are to be certified, include lot identification
markings, destination or shipment, and quantity in shipment.
f. Title, name, and signature of person authorized to make certification.
C. Qualification Statements: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit for information only, unless otherwise indicated; identify
conflicts with contract documents.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01400-3 . 900-9264
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturers: As indicated in individual sections.
B. Qualifications of Installers: As indicated in individual sections.
C. Qualifications of Manufacturers' Field Personnel: Employed directly by the manufacturer and
normally performing the activities specified.
D. Qualifications of Testing and Inspection Personnel:
1. As indicated in individual sections.
2. Independent Testing Agency Qualifications: When employed by the contractor:
a. Approved by the architect.
b. Authorized to conduct business in the state in which the project is located.
E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable
to either the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or to accepted values of natural
physical constants.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER ENTITIES
A. Cooperate with other entities performing quality control activities.
B. Provide samples of materials and design criteria as indicated and when requested.
C. Provide other assistance, equipment, tools, and storage facilities as specified.
D. If desired, make arrangements with those entities and pay for additional similar or related
testing or inspection required for the contractor's use or convenience.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate quality control activities to avoid delay and to make it unnecessary to uncover work
for testing or inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide work of the specified quality; where quality level is not indicated, provide work of
quality customary in similar types of work.
1. Where codes, laws, or regulations require work of higher quality or performance,
provide work complying with those codes, laws, and regulations.
2. Where two or more quality provisions of the contract documents conflict, comply with
the most stringent requirement; where requirements are different but apparently equal,
and where it is uncertain which requirement is most stringent, obtain clarification from
the architect before proceeding.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01400-4 900-9264
r
r
3. Actual quality may exceed the specified quality; verify that such differences are
r
acceptable to the owner (other criteria may make excessive quality undesirable).
B. Control products, suppliers, manufacturers, site conditions, installers, and workmanship in such
a manner as to produce work of the specified quality.
r
4
} . C. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations.
1. Keep a record of instructions and recommendations which supplement or conflict with
the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When manufacturers' instructions and recommendations conflict with the contract
documents, obtain clarification from the architect before proceeding.
D. Use installers who are capable of producing work of the specified quality.
E. Perform all quality control activities specified unless indicated to be performed by other
entities.
3.2 MOCK-UPS
A. Mock-ups required are specified in other sections.
e.
B. Construct mock-ups as specified for actual work, with all components required for a complete
installation.
�^ C. Erect specified mock-ups in locations indicated.
1. Mock-ups may not be constructed in the final location of the work.
2. Where mock-ups are to be removed, clear area after removal of mock-up and return to
�.. original or specified condition.
` D. Where mock-ups are to be approved by the architect, obtain approval of the architect prior to
proceeding with installation.
3.3 TESTING
A. Perform tests specified.
B. When results of tests are unsatisfactory, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary and
retest.
C. Submit written report of each original test and of each retest.
3.4 INSPECTING
A. Perform inspections specified.
B. When inspections reveal unsatisfactory work, make whatever changes or repairs are necessary
and reinspect.
C. Submit written report of each original inspection and each reinspection.
FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
01400-5
. 1 900-92b4
7
3.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. Manufacturers' field services required are specified in other sections.
B. Give the architect timely notice of site visits so that the architect may be present.
C. Submit a report of each site visit, including records of.
1. Site conditions, installer procedures, and related activities which are not as recommended
by the manufacturer. --
2. Instructions and recommendations given which differ from the manufacturer's standard
printed instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. When work is uncovered during quality control activities, provide protection from damage.
B. Correct work damaged by quality control activities; where repair is indicated as an unacceptable
method, replace the work.
END OF SECTION 01400
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01400-6 900-9264
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General product requirements, including:
a. General specification requirements for all products.
b. Product options.
C. Procedures for substitution requests.
d. General requirements and procedures for maintenance materials and tools.
2. General requirements for product documentation, including:
a. Requirements and procedures for schedule of products.
b. General requirements for operation and maintenance data.
C. General requirements for warranties.
3. General procedures for products including:
a. Procedures for transportation and handling.
b. Procedures for delivery and receiving.
C. Procedures for storage.
B. Related Sections:
1. Submittal transmission, handling, and action procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1.
2. Project record documents: Elsewhere in Division 1.
1.2 DEFINPTIONS
A. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident,
or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Products: Submit for approval.
B. Final Schedule of Products: Submit for project record.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for information only.
D. Warranties: Submit for project record.
E. Receipts for maintenance materials and tools.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Components required to be supplied in quantity within a specification section shall be identical,
interchangeable, and made by the same manufacturer.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01600-1 900-9264
B. Do not use products removed from existing construction, unless specifically permitted by the
contract documents or approved by the owner.
2.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS AND TOOLS
A. Maintenance Materials: Parts and materials for repair and maintenance; specific items required
are specified in product sections.
1. Provide products and tools which are identical to those used in the work; if necessary to
obtain identical items, order at the same time as products to be installed or tools to be
used in the work.
B. Package appropriately and label to show type and quantity of contents.
C. Deliver, handle, and store in the same manner as products to be installed.
D. Do not turn over to the owner until date of substantial completion, unless otherwise approved
by the owner.
E. Deliver to the owner; unload.
F. Obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. It is the contractor's responsibility to select products which comply with the contract documents
and which are compatible with one another, with existing work, and with products selected by
other contractors.
1. Verify that electrical characteristics of products are compatible with electrical systems;
notify architect of all discrepancies.
B. Do not use any substitute products which have not been approved in accordance with the
requirements of the contract documents; formal substitution request is required.
C. Where the specification is silent on whether substitutions will be considered, substitutions will
not be considered.
D. Definition of Substitute Product: Any product which does not meet the requirements of the
contract documents, whether in product characteristics, performance, quality, or manufacturer
or brand names, is considered a substitute.
E. Product Options: Where products are specified using more than one method, such as
description with a manufacturer list, use a product meeting the requirements of both
specification methods.
F. Products Specified by Reference Standard: Use any product meeting the specification. --
Provisions of reference standards shall not modify the responsibilities of the owner or architect
as defined in the contract documents.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01600-2 900-9264
i
G. Products Specified by Description: Use any product meeting the specification.
H. Products Specified by Performance Requirements: Use any product meeting the specification.
I. Products Specified by Listing Manufacturer(s) Accompanied by Language Indicating that
Substitutions Are Not Allowed: Provide a product meeting the specification and made by one
of the manufacturers listed.
J. Products Specified by Listing Manufacturer(s) Accompanied by Language Specifically
Indicating that Substitutions Are Allowed: Provide a product meeting the specification; submit
substitution request for any manufacturer not listed.
K. Language indicating that substitutions are not allowed includes:
1. "Provide one of the following products."
2. "Provide products made by one of the manufacturers listed."
3. "Provide products complying with the contract documents and made by one of the
following."
4. "No substitutions."
S. Other similar language.
L. Language indicating that substitutions are allowed includes:
1. Substitutions will be considered.
2. "... will be among those considered acceptable."
3. Or approved equal.
4. Other similar language.
3.2 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
A. The contractor will be notified in writing within a reasonable time; verbal acceptance will not
be valid.
B. Acceptable substitutions will be added to the contract documents by appropriate modification.
3.3 SUBSTT=ON PROCEDURE
A. Submission of request for substitution shall constitute a representation that the entity making
the request:
1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or better than
the specified product. Absence of an explicit comparison of any characteristic of the
proposed product to the specified product shall constitute a representation that the
proposed product is equal to or better than the specified product with regard to that
characteristic.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the proposed product as for the specified product.
r 3. Will coordinate the installation and make other changes which may be required for the
{ work to be complete in all respects, including:
a. Redesign.
r b. Additional components and capacity required by other work affected by the
age.
4. Waives all claims for additional costs and time extensions which subsequently may
become apparent and which are caused by the change.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01600-3 900-9264
i.
S. Will reimburse the owner for additional costs for evaluation of the substitution request,
redesign if required, and reapproval by authorities having jurisdiction if required.
B. Substitutions will not be considered when acceptance would require substantial revision of the
contract documents.
C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals without separate written request.
D. Substitution requests will not be considered when submitted directly by subcontractor or
supplier.
E. Substitution Request Procedure: Submit written request with complete data substantiating
compliance of the proposed product with the requirements of the contract documents.
1. Submit request at least 21 days prior to the date when the specified product needs to be
ordered. _
2. Submit request to the owner.
3. Submit 5 copies of each request and accompanying data.
4. Submit all requests on a standard form.
S. Only one request for substitution will be considered for each product.
F. Data Required with Substitution Request: Provide at least the following data: —
1. Identify product by specification section and paragraph number.
2. Manufacturer's name and address, trade name and model number of product (if
applicable), and name of fabricator or supplier (if applicable). .,
3. Complete product data.
4. A list of other projects on which the proposed product has been used, with project name,
the design professional's name, and owner contact. —
5. An itemized comparison of the proposed product to the specified product.
6. Net amount of change to the contract sum.
7. List of maintenance services and replacement materials available.
8. Statement of the effect of the substitution on the construction schedule.
9. Description of changes that will be required in other work or products if the substitute
product is approved.
G. The architect will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution.
H. The owner will determine acceptability of the proposed substitution.
I. When the proposed substitution is not accepted, provide the product (or one of the products,
as the case may be) specified.
3.4 SCHEDULE OF PRODUCTS
A. Prepare a complete schedule of major products used, including the following for each product:
1. Manufacturer's name.
2. Brand or trade name.
3. Model number, if applicable.
4. Reference standard, if more than one is applicable.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01600A 900-9264
7
F
5. Arrange products in the schedule by specification sections; indicate paragraph where
specified.
B. Prepare and submit a preliminary schedule within 30 days after award of contract ; resubmit
when revised; submit final schedule prior to final payment.
C. Schedule of products shall not be used to obtain approval of substitute products; make separate
request for substitution.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Provide operation and maintenance data as specified in individual product sections.
1. Provide data sufficient for operation and maintenance by owner without further
assistance from the manufacturer.
2. Provide completed data at least 2 days prior to instruction of owner personnel.
B. Data Required For Products - General:
1. Name of manufacturer and product.
2. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor or supplier.
3. Local source of replacements.
4. Local source of replaceable parts and supplies.
C. Product Data: Where product data is specified for inclusion in operation and maintenance data,
provide manufacturer's data sheets marked to indicate specific product and product options
actually installed; delete inapplicable data.
D. Project Record Documents: Provide an additional copy of applicable record documents for
inclusion with the operation and maintenance data.
E. Coordination Drawings: When coordination drawings are prepared, include a copy with the
operating and maintenance data.
F. Custom Manufactured Products: Provide all information needed for reordering.
G. Finish Materials: Manufacturer's product data, color/texture designations, and manufacturer's
instructions for care, cleaning, and maintenance.
H. Products Exposed to Weather and Products for Moisture Protection: Manufacturer's product
data, recommended inspection schedule and procedures, maintenance and repair procedures,
and maintenance materials required.
I. Equipment: Provide at least the following information:
1. Product data giving equipment and -function description, with normal operating
characteristics and limiting conditions.
2. Starting, operating, and troubleshooting procedures.
3. Cleaning and maintenance requirements and procedures.
4. External finish maintenance requirements.
5. List of maintenance materials required.
6. List of special tools required.
7. Parts list: List all replaceable parts, with ordering data.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01600-5
900-9264
i
8. Recommended quantity of spare parts to be maintained in storage.
J. Systems: Provide overall function description, with diagrams, prepared especially for this
project.
K. Form of Data: Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
1. Arrange content logically, using section numbers and sequence of sections indicated on
the table of contents of this project manual.
2. When multiple volumes are used, arrange by related subjects; identify contents in cover
title.
3. Assemble into 3-ring binders with maximum 2-inch ring size.
a. Hardback, cleanable plastic covers.
b. Identify each book with title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions" and project
name.
C. Page size 8-1/2 by 11 inches, maximum.
d. Prepare special typewritten data on minimum 20-pound paper.
C. Provide tabbed divider for each product and system.
f. Drawings: Bind large -size drawings separately.
4. Provide table of contents for each volume listing:
a. Name of the project.
b. Name, address, telephone number, and contact name of:.
1. Architect.
2. Contractor.
C. Index of products and systems included in volume.
3.6 WARRANTIES
A. Provide warranties as specified in individual product sections.
B. Manufacturer Warranties: Manufacturer's standard product warranty running for the
manufacturer's standard term, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Submit copies of all manufacturer warranties which extend beyond the end of the
contract correction period.
C. Special Project Warranties: Written warranty commencing at date of substantial completion,
running for the term indicated, and signed by the entities specified.
1. Where completion of warranty item is materially delayed beyond the date of substantial
completion, provide warranty commencing on date of acceptance.
2. Submit each special project warranty.
D. Provide 2 notarized copies of each executed warranty.
E. Show actual date of commencement on each warranty.
3.7 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Require supplier to package finished products in a manner which will protect from damage
during shipping, handling, and storage.
B. Transport products by methods which avoid damage.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01600-6 900-9264,
7
F
r
C. Deliver in dry, undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened packaging.
D. Provide equipment and personnel adequate to handle products by methods which prevent
damage.
E. Provide additional protection during handling where necessary to prevent damage to products
and packaging.
F. Lift large and heavy components at designated lift points only.
3.8 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING
A. Arrange deliveries of products to allow time for inspection prior to installation.
B. Coordinate delivery to avoid conflict with the work and to take into account both the conditions
at the site and the availability of personnel, handling equipment, and storage space.
C. Clearly mark partial deliveries to identify contents, to permit easy accumulation of entire
delivery, and to facilitate assembly.
D. Promptly inspect shipments and remedy damage, incorrect quantity, incompleteness, improper
or illegible labeling, and noncompliance with requirements of contract documents and approved
submittals.
3.9 STORAGE
A. No indoor storage area are available on site.
B. Off -site storage of products for which application for payment will be made: No off -site
storage will be approved.
C. General Storage Procedures:
1. Store products immediately on delivery.
2. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible.
3. Store in a manner to prevent damage to the stored products and to the work.
4. Store moisture -sensitive products in weathertight enclosures.
5. Store indoors if necessary to keep temperature and humidity within ranges required by
manufacturer.
6. Store unpacked and loose products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items.
7. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection and inventory.
8. Periodically inspect and remedy damage and noncompliance with required conditions.
D. Loose Granular Materials: Store on solid surfaces in well -drained area.; prevent nixing with
foreign materials.
r. E. Exterior Storage:
{ 1. Cover products subject to weather damage with impervious sheet covering; provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
l`
` ' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01600-7 900-9264
2. Provide surface drainage to prevent runoff or ponded water from damaging stored
products.
3. Prevent damage and contamination from refuse and chemically injurious materials and
liquids.
4. Store fabricated products on substantial platforms, blocking, or skids above the ground,
sloped to drain.
END OF SECTION 01600
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
01600-8 - - 900-9264
SECTION 01700 - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General construction and installation procedures.
2. Correction of defective work.
3. Cleaning during construction.
4. Facility startup.
5. Project completion procedures.
6. Final extermination.
B. Related Sections:
1. Cleaning requirements for specific products and systems: Applicable product sections
in Divisions 2-16.
2. Final payment procedures: Elsewhere in Division 1.
3. General product installation requirements: Elsewhere in Division 1.
4. Removal of mock-ups: Elsewhere in Division 1.
5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems: Division 15.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A.- Concealed Spaces: Spaces which are not accessible after completion of construction.
B. Cutting: Removal of material by cutting, sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation.
C. Damage: Any sort of deterioration whether due to weather, normal wear and tear, accident,
or abuse, resulting in soiling, marring, breakage, corrosion, rotting, or impairment of function.
D. Debris: Rubbish, waste materials, litter, volatile wastes, and similar materials, with the
exception of surplus materials which are to become the property of the owner.
E. Fire Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire resistance
rating.
F. Patching: Restoration to completed condition by patching, repairing, refinishing, finishing,
filling, closing up, and similar operations.
G. Replacement: Replace the entire element, surface, or product.
H. Smoke Barriers: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as being designed to
prevent passage of smoke and gases; may be indicated as "smoke barrier," "smoke partitions,"
"smoke wall," or similar designation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Startup Reports:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
01700-1 900-9264
1. Submit within 7 days after startup of item covered by report.
2. Include a statement that the item has been installed properly and is functioning correctly.
3. Include the following information:
a. Item started up.
b. Date of startup operation.
C. Entity performing startup.
d. Applicable specification section.
e. Results of startup.
f. Signature of person performing startup.
B. Field Correction Requests: Submit immediately upon discovery of deviation required; include
a detailed description of the problem, recommended changes, and reasons it is not possible to
comply with the contract documents.
C. Certificate of Final Extermination.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cleaning: Perform cleaning in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer or
fabricator of the product or _ system. Use only cleaning materials and tools which are
specifically recommended, which are not hazardous to health or property, and which will not
damage finishes. —
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take precautions to prevent fires and to facilitate fire -fighting operations.
1. Keep flammable materials in non-combustible containers; store away from potential fire
sources; remove flammable waste regularly. —
2. Keep temporary and permanent fire fighting facilities readily accessible; keep fire
fighting routes open.
3. Do not allow smoking in areas where highly combustible or explosive materials are _
present.
4. Carefully supervise the operation of potential fire sources, including heating units.
5. Conduct welding operations in manner to prevent fire; comply with local regulations.
B. Take precautions to prevent accidents due to physical hazards:
1. Provide barricades, warning lights, or signs as required to inform personnel and the
public of the hazard being protected against.
2. Safety barricades: Comply with regulations.
3. Provide temporary walkways where walking surfaces are hazardous.
4. Notify the owner before beginning work that involves hazardous operations, including
use of explosives and the like.
C. Take care to prevent pollution of air, water, and soil.
I. Comply with environmental protection regulations.
2. Limit effluent and rainwater runoff into waterways as required by regulations.
3. Do not dump contaminants in areas that will result in contamination of waterways.
D. Minimize discharge of effluent and rainwater runoff into sewers.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01700-2 900-9264
1. Control sediment discharge into sewers; filter out construction debris, soil, and
contaminants.
2. Comply with regulations and orders of public utilities regarding use of sewers.
3. Where disposal of effluent or rainwater by means of sewers is not lawful or is not
possible, provide alternative methods of disposal.
E. Prevent erosion due to rainwater runoff.
F. Control windblown dust; prevent erosion to site and nuisance to neighbors.
G. Prevent flooding of excavations, below -grade construction, and adjacent properties due to
rainwater runoff.
H. Do not use tools or equipment which produce harmful levels of noise.
1. Do not use noise -making tools or equipment between 7 pm and 9 am weekdays, 7 pm
to 9 am Saturdays, and all day Sunday and major hoildays.
I. Keep the site and adjacent public ways free of hazardous and unsanitary conditions and public
nuisances.
J. Control rodents and other pests; prevent infestation of adjacent sites and buildings due to pests
on this site.
K. Keep public streets free of debris due to this work.
L. Provide adequate traffic control by means of signs, signals, and flagmen, as necessary.
M. Provide temporary means of draining roofs where required.
N. Conduct construction operations so that no part of the work is subjected to damaging operations
or influences which are in excess of those to be expected during normal occupancy conditions.
O. Conduct construction operations so that waste of power, water, and fuel is avoided.
P. Provide temporary supports as required to prevent movement and structural failure.
Q. Install products only during environmental conditions which will ensure the best possible
results.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install products only at the time and in the sequence which will ensure the best possible results.
B. Coordinate required administrative activities with related construction activities.
FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
01700-3
900-9264
F
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Patching Materials: Identical to the materials of the work to be cut, unless indicated as specific
materials specified in other sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Prior to performing work, examine the applicable substrates and the conditions under which
the work is to be performed.
B. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before
proceeding.
C. Conditions which could have been discovered by examination will not be allowed as cause for
claims for extra work.
1. In particular, verify the following:
a. Underground utilities.
b. Other underground construction.
C. Location and invert elevation of points of connection to piped utilities.
D. Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities.
E. Verify space requirements of items which are shown diagrammatically on the drawings.
3.2 GENERAL PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Take field measurements as required to fit the work properly.
B. Recheck measurements prior to installing each product.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Accurately locate the work and components of the work; make vertical work plumb; make
horizontal work level.
B. See sections describing specific parts of the work for additional requirements.
C. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and
to maximize ease of removal for replacement.
D. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Coordinate exact locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 017004 900-9264
F
r
i
F.
Install work in such manner and sequence as to preclude, if possible, or at least to tninimi�p,
cutting and patching.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove debris from concealed spaces prior to enclosing the space.
B. Keep the site and the work free of waste materials and debris.
r•• 1. Remove waste from site frequently enough to prevent significant accumulations of
debris.
2. When temperature exceeds or is expected to exceed 80 degrees F, remove waste at
�.. frequency necessary to prevent development of health hazards and nuisance odors.
3. Keep hazardous and unsanitary materials in containers separate from other waste.
C. Clean areas in which work is to be done to level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution
of that work.
1. Where dust would impair execution of work, broom- and vacuum -clean the entire
interior area and keep clean.
D. Keep installed work clean, and clean again when soiled by other operations.
1. Provide periodic cleaning as required to prevent damage due to soiling.
2. Remove liquid spills promptly.
E. Protect installed work from soiling and damage.
1. Provide protective coverings as required.
2. Provide protective coverings for work which may be damaged by subsequent operations.
3. Where heavy abuse is expected, use minimum of plywood for protection.
4. Maintain protective coverings until substantial completion.
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING PROCEDURES
A. Fire/Smoke Barriers: Do not cut more than absolutely necessary.
1. Cut penetration holes to sizes required for penetration seal assemblies required.
2. Patch all oversize holes and cuts made in error.
3. Perform patching in a manner which complies in all respects with the original
construction; if not possible, report nature of difficulty to the architect and request
instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
A. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations,
whether conveyed in writing or not.
B. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install components at mounting
normally encountered for similar components.
1. Obtain the architect'S instructions for uncertain mounting heights.
C. Separate incompatible materials with suitable materials or spacing.
1. Prevent cathodic corrosion.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01700-5 900-9264
I.
D. Provide all anchors and fasteners required and use methods necessary to securely fasten work.
1. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction, and for building movement.
E. Joints in Exposed Work:
1. Make joints of uniform widths.
2. Where joint locations are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect.
a. When in doubt, obtain the architect's instructions.
F. After installation, adjust operating components to proper operation.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CORRECTION OF WORK
A. The following must be replaced (repair is not acceptable): .
1. Damaged surfaces exposed to view which cannot be repaired without visible evidence
of repair.
2. Components which cannot be repaired to proper operating condition.
3. Chipped and broken glass.
4. Scratched transparent materials.
5. Scratched reflective surfaces.
B. Repair or Replace:
1. Components which do not operate properly.
2. Surfaces exposed to view which cannot be cleaned to original condition.
3. Permanent facilities used during construction.
4. Other defective work.
C. Acceptable Repair Methods:
1. Replacing parts.
2. Refinishing.
3. Touching up with matching materials.
4. Proper adjustment of equipment.
D. When it is necessary to deviate from the contract documents in order to accomplish corrective
action, submit a field correction request.
E. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
3.8 FACILITY STARTUP
A. Put each item of equipment and each system into full, satisfactory operation.
B. Prior to Startup:
1. Verify that equipment and systems are complete, correctly connected to utilities, and
tested.
a. Comply with requirements of manufacturer.
2. Inspect and test as required to ensure that work is installed as specified and to determine
suitability for energizing.
3. Provide power and fuel for startup and testing.
4. Change over from temporary to permanent utility sources.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01700-6 900-9264
` 5. Re -adjust and lubricate operating components as required to ensure smooth and
unhindered operation.
a. Check drive rotations, belt tension, control sequences, and other features which
might cause damage if not properly adjusted.
6. When required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative prepare for startup
or supervise such preparation.
t;
C. Execute startup under supervision of responsible personnel in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. When required by manufacturer, have manufacturer's representative perform startup.
2. Submit a written report of startup operation.
D. After startup, adjust equipment and systems as required for proper operation.
I. Where specified, perform tests or inspections to determine status of operation.
E. Demonstrate the operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to personnel designated
by the owner, prior to substantial completion.
1. Have final operating and maintenance data available during demonstration.
F. For equipment and systems which have different operation at different seasons, demonstrate
operation during subsequent seasons until fully demonstrated.
3.9 FINAL CLEANING
A. Dispose of debris in a lawful manner.
1. Do not bum or bury debris on the site.
2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes in storm or sanitary drains.
3.10 PROJECT COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Complete the work, prior to substantial completion, as required to obtain consent to occupancy
from the governing authorities.
B. Arrange for final inspections by governing authorities to be accomplished prior to substantial
l completion.
l 1. Obtain certificate of occupancy.
C. If temporary locking systems differ from permanent locking systems, change over to permanent
systems prior to substantial completion.
D. Final Extermination: Engage a licensed exterminator to make final inspection and rid the
project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
E. Upon request of the contractor, the owner will perform inspection for substantial completion.
F 1. No partial certificates of substantial completion will be issued.
FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
END OF SECTION 01700
01700-7
F
7
C.
7
SECTION 01800 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project record documents consisting of:
E = a. Record drawings.
f b. Record project manual (specifications).
C. Record submittals:
r 1. Shop drawings.
C 2. Product data.
3. Samples.
2. Exceptions: The following are not required as project record documents:
a. Informational submittals.
b. Manufacturers' and installers' qualification statements.
r C. Test Reports.
I'
B. Related Sections:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Elsewhere in Division 1.
2. Warranties: Elsewhere in Division 1.
r•• 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit after substantial completion, but prior to final completion.
1. Record drawings: Submit in form of reverse sepia reproducibles.
a. Submit original marked -up print set.
b. Sets shall include all drawings, whether changed or not.
2. Other record documents: Submit originals or good quality photocopies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction purposes.
B. Maintain record documents in a secure location at the site while providing for access by the
contractor and the architect during normal working hours; store in a fire -resistive room or
container outside of normal working hours.
r
! C. Record information as soon as possible after it is obtained.
D. Assign a person or persons responsible for maintaining record documents.
E. Record the following types information on all applicable record documents:
1. Dimensional changes.
2. New and revised details.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 01800-1 900-9264
3. Depths of foundations.
4. Locations and depths of underground utilities.
S. Actual routings of piping and conduits.
6. Revisions to electrical circuits.
7. Actual equipment locations.
8. Sizes and routings of ducts.
9. Locations of utilities concealed in construction.
10. Particulars on concealed products which will not be easy to identify later.
11. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note identification numbers if applicable.
12. New information which may be useful to the owner, but which was not shown in either
the contract documents or submittals.
3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Maintain a complete set of opaque prints of the contract drawings, marked to show changes.
B. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the drawings, mark this set to show the
actual work.
1. Mark location of concealed items before they are covered by other work.
2. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings, whichever are best suited to
show the change.
3. Where changes are marked on record shop drawings, mark cross-reference on the
applicable contract drawing.
C. When the contractor is required by a provision of a modification to prepare a new drawing,
rather than to revise existing drawings, obtain instructions from the architect as to the drawing
scale and information required.
D. Keep drawings in labelled, bound sets.
1. Mark with red pencil.
2. Mark work of separate contracts with different colors of pencils.
3. Incorporate new drawings into existing sets, as they are issued.
E. Review completed record set with the architect.
F. Upon authorization by the architect, prepare a full set of transparencies of contract drawings
with all record changes marked.
G. The architect will furnish transparencies of original contract drawings at the cost of $20.00
(twenty dollars) per sheet.
H. Where record drawings are also required as part of operation and maintenance data submittals,
make copies from the original record drawing set.
3.3 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL
A. Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, marked to show changes.
B. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project manual, mark the record copy to
show the actual work.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01800-2 900 9264
1. Include a copy of each addendum and modification to the contract.
2. In addition to the types of information required on all record documents, record the
following types of information:
a. Proprietary name and model number of actual products furnished, for each
product, material, and item of equipment specified.
b. Name of the supplier and installer, for each product for which neither a product
data submittal nor a maintenance data submittal was specified.
r3.4 RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Maintain a complete set of all submittals made during construction, marked to show changes.
1. Maintain submittals in cardboard file boxes, labeled to show contents.
2. Sort submittals by applicable specification section and file in order of submittal
identification number.
B. Record Shop Drawings: Record the types of information specified for all record documents.
1. Mark changes on record shop drawings only when contract drawing would not be
capable of showing the change clearly or completely.
2. Mark changes in manner specified for record drawings.
C. Record Product Data Submittals: Record the types of information specified for all record
documents.
1. In addition, record the following types of information:
�• a. Changes in the products as delivered to the site.
b. Changes in manufacturer's instructions or recommendations for installation.
F„y D. Record Coordination Drawings: Record the types of information required for all record
documents.
1. Mark up in the manner specified for record drawings.
{ r 3.5 TRANSMITTAL TO owner
A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference.
1. Provide cardboard file boxes for submittals.
2. Provide cardboard drawing tubes with end caps for transparencies.
3. Bind print sets with durable paper covers.
4. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with "PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS - This document has been prepared using information furnished by
" (insert the contractor's name], and the date of preparation.
B. Submit directly to the owner.
END OF SECTION 01800
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 01800-3 900-9264
SECTION 02200 - EARTfIWORK
7 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Site clearing.
2. Earth moving and excavation.
3. Utilities trenching.
4. Grading.
S. Backfilling.
6. Compacting.
7. Subbase course for walks and pavements.
B. Related Documents: Geotechnical data.
1. Geotechnical data prepared by: Terra Engineers, Inc.
2. Geotechnical data consists of the following, which is available for the contractor's
` inspection at the office of the architect:
a. Geotechnical engineer's report.
3. Geotechnical data is not a part of the contract documents. The contractor is entitled to
rely upon the factual information contained therein, such as locations and depths of tests
or explorations made at the site and material encountered at each location, all as of the
dates made. The contractor is not entitled to rely upon the nonfactual information
4 l contained therein such as interpretations, opinions, or extrapolations of data; nor is the
contractor entitled to rely upon the completeness of the information for the contractor's
purposes.
C. Related Sections:
1. Changes in the work: General Conditions.
2. Paving: Elsewhere in Division 2.
3. Concrete: Elsewhere in Division 2.
4. Concrete: Division 3.
S. Installation of underground utilities: Divisions 15 and 16.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698-91 — Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft4bf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 1991.
B. ASTM D 1556-90 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand -Cone Method; 1990.
C. ASTM D 2167-94 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by
the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994.
t D. ASTM D 2487-93 — Standard. Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
r, Classification System); 1993.
4
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02200-1 900-9264
1
E. ASTM D 2922-91 — Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1991.
F. ASTM D 2940-85 — Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or
Subbases for Highways or Airports.
G. ASTM D 3017-88(93) - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1988 (Reapproved 1993.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Plastic marking tape.
B. Test Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit the following reports directly to the architect and
shall copy the contractor: •-
1. Analysis of soil materials, whether procured on or off site, and including fill, backfill,
and borrow materials.
2. Verification of each footing subgrade. -�
3. In -place density test reports.
4. Moisture -density relationship test reports.
5. Gradation test reports for pavement base course aggregates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Secure and pay for the services of a qualified, independent geotechnical engineer to _
classify existing soil materials, to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials
when necessary, to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to '
perform required field and laboratory testing. Geotechnical engineer shall be acceptable
to the architect and the owner and shall be licensed to practice in the state in which the
project is located.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of governing
authorities. Do not interfere with adjacent private facilities.
B. Site Utilities:
1. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately
advise utility owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show �-
actual locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Where sufficient approved materials are not available from required excavations on site, obtain
and pay for materials from approved sources 'off site without charge to the owner.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02200-2 900-9264
�! a
B. For each soil material proposed for use as fill or backfill, whether obtained on or off site,
testing laboratory shall classify soil material, develop Proctor curve, and perform any other
tests required.
C. Obtain approval of the architect for each soil material.
D. Topsoil: Friable clay loam surface soil.
_ E. Satisfactory Topsoil: Fertile agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining
i vigorous plant growth; free of subsoil, rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, clay, toxic
matter, plants, weeds, and roots.
F. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials classified as satisfactory.
G. Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D 2487): Free of stones larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, trash, debris, organic material, other objectionable material and the liquid limit and
plasticity index shall not exceed 35 and 12 respectively.
H. Aggregate Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a
1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
2.2 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE
A. Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film specifically manufactured for marking and
identifying underground utilities.
1. Minimum width, 6 inches; minimum thickness, 4 mils.
2. Continuous printed inscription shall describe utility. Tape color:
a. Electric: Red.
b. Gas: Yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Provide markers indicating limits of work and clear identification of items and
areas requiring protection.
B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and warning lights around open excavations as necessary
to prevent injury to persons.
C. The contractor is solely responsible for determining the potential for injury to persons and
damage to property.
1. Where such potential is present, take appropriate protective measures.
2. Protect persons from injury and protect existing and new improvements from damage
caused directly or indirectly by construction operations.
' D. Do not allow excavation subgrades and soil at foundations to be subjected to freezing
temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Should prepared,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02200-3 - 900-9264
i}
compacted subgrades be damaged by freezing, remove soil materials to the depth required by
the architect and replace and recompact in conformance with specified requirements.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove all vegetable matter from within the site. `~
1. Fill holes thus created with approved, compacted soil.
2. Remove and dispose of grass and other vegetation before stripping topsoil. Strip topsoil
down to subsoil without contaminating topsoil with subsoil.
3. Stockpile in a manner to freely drain surface water and to prevent contamination by
subsoil or other materials; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust.
4. After removing topsoil, scarify surface soil to a depth of 16 inches and compact in 8 inch
lifts to a dry density not less than 95 T of the standard maximum dry density as
determined in ASTM D698.
3.3 DEWATERING
A. Do not allow surface or ground water to flow into or accumulate in excavations. B. Do not allow water to flow in an uncontrolled fashion across the project site or to erode slopes
or to undermine foundations. Do not allow water to be diverted onto adjacent properties.
Arrange excavation operations so as to provide continual and effective drainage of excavations.
C. Provide and maintain temporary diversion ditches, dikes, and grading as necessary; do not use
trench excavations for this purpose. When required by surface or subsurface water conditions,
provide sumps, wellpoints, French drains, pumps, and other control measures necessary to keep
excavations free of water. When existence of ground water near or above final excavation level
is indicated or suspected, provide control measures prior to excavating to water level and
maintain water level continuously below working level.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavation includes the removal of any materials necessary to achieve the required
subgrade elevations and includes reuse or disposal of such materials.
B. Unnecessary Excavation: The expense of excavation of materials outside of limits indicated
or ordered in writing by the architect and the correction thereof to the satisfaction of the
architect shall be borne by the contractor.
1. Unnecessary excavation under footings: Either deepen footings to bear on actual
subgrade elevation without changing top elevations or place concrete fill up to required
elevation, as required by the architect.
2. Unnecessary excavation other than under footings: Either place compacted fill or "
otherwise correct conditions, as required by the architect.
C. Approval of Subgrade: Notify the architect when required elevations have been reached.
I. When required by the architect due to the unforeseen presence of unsatisfactory materials
or other factors, perform additional excavation and replace with approved compacted fill
material in accordance with the architect's instructions.
2. Payment for unforeseen additional work will be made in accordance with established unit
prices or, if none, in accordance with provisions for changes in the work. No payment
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02200-4 900-9264 ,.._
q
1'
will be made for correction of subgrades improperly protected against damage from
freeze -thaw or accumulation of water, or for correction of otherwise defective subgrades.
D. Excavation Stabilization: Wherever it is possible to slope faces of excavations to achieve
stabilization, do so in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Otherwise,
provide shoring and bracing.
1. Design, provide, maintain, and remove shoring and bracing in compliance with
requirements of governing authorities. Remove temporary shoring and bracing when
stabilization is no longer required.
E. Excavation for Structures:
1. Excavate beyond footings and foundations so as to allow proper construction and
i inspection of concrete formwork and other materials. Excavate to the required elevation.
a. Tolerance: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
F. Excavation for Footings and Foundations:
1. Delay excavation to final grade and final compaction until just before concrete will be
placed.
2. Remove any loose or sloughed material and adjust excavations to conform to required
lines, grades, and tolerances and to form a suitable bearing surface. Do not disturb
0^ bottom of completed excavations.
G. Excavation for Trenches:
1. Unless otherwise required, begin trenching, utility installation, and backfilling at lowest
portion of utility line, working toward highest portion of line.
2. Required trench width: Excavate accurately to provide not less than 6 nor more than 9
inches of clearance on each side of pipes and conduits, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where indicated trench widths are exceeded, redesign, stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures may be required by the architect at no additional cost to the
owner.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, trench walls for piping shall be vertical from trench bottom
to one foot above top of pipe or to top elevation of initial backfill, whichever is higher.
4. Excavate trenches to the depths necessary to achieve required flow lines and invert
elevations and to prevent freezing of liquids or frost heave during winter.
5. Dig trenches to depths indicated.
6. Trench bottoms: Unless otherwise indicated, excavate and shape trench bottoms as
follows:
a. Support pipes and conduit up to 5 inches diameter on smooth, accurately graded
subgrade. Shape surface by hand to provide continuous support on undisturbed
soil for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit.
b. Support pipes and conduit 6 or more inches diameter on 4 inches of approved
subbase material. Place and carefully compact additional layer of subbase material
of depth required to support pipe haunches. Shape surface to provide continuous
support for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit.
,... H. Excavation for Walks and Pavements: Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to
indicated cross -sections, elevations and grades.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02200-5 900-9264
l
3.5 STORAGE
A. Stockpile materials to be used for filling and backfilling, including excavated materials
classified as satisfactory soil materials, at locations indicated or as directed. Stockpile in a
manner to freely drain surface water; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust.
1. Store soil materials without intermixing. Protect from contamination with other soils or
debris.
3.6 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE
A. Install tape directly above utilities, 4 to 6 inches below finished grade.
3.7 FILLING AND BACKFUJUNG
A. Preparation: Backfill excavations as soon as practicable. Complete the following operations
before backfilling:
1. Inspection and acceptance of below -grade construction.
2. Inspection, testing, and approval of underground utilities.
3. Surveying of underground utilities for record documents.
4. Concrete formwork removal.
5. Removal of loose material, muck, debris, and trash from excavation.
6. Installation of temporary or permanent horizontal bracing for structures to receive
backfill.
B. Remove temporary shoring and bracing as the work progresses and when its use is no longer
necessary.
L' Backfilling near footings, general: Where trenches occur underneath of footings, or
Where trend bottoms occur below and within 18 inches horizontally of footing bottoms,
backfill trench with concrete to top of footing and up to 4 feet perpendicularly from each
face of footing.
C. Installation: Place approved soil materials in layers to required elevations.
1. Do not place material on muddy or frozen surfaces or on surfaces containing frost.
D. Installation: Place fill materials to required elevations in lifts of required depth. Provide fill
materials beneath each area as indicated.
1. Planted areas: Satisfactory soil materials.
2. Building slabs: Satisfactory soil materials.
3. Piping/conduit: Subbase material where indicated; otherwise use satisfactory soil
materials. ^_
4. Walks/pavements: Use base material or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material
3.8 BUILDING SLAB AREAS
A. Place fill or backfill lifts such that compaction true to grade and level is accomplished with a
minimum of surface disturbance and segregation or degradation of materials. Maintain grade
control and cross section by means of line and grade stakes. Maintain moisture content within
prescribed limits during placing and compacting.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02200-6 900-9264
m
B. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is less than the maximum lift thickness
r permitted, place material in a single lift. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is
` ! greater than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place materials in two or more lifts of
uniform thickness with no lift less than 3 inches in thickness.
3.9 COMPACTION
A. Place materials used in backfilling and filling in layers not exceeding loose depths as follows:
1. Heavy equipment compaction: 8 inches.
_ 2. Hand -operated tampers: 4 inches.
B. Place material simultaneously on opposite sides of walls, small structures, utility lines, etc. to
avoid displacement or overstressing.
C. In -Place Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the values given below,
expressed as a percentage of maximum density at optimum moisture content.
1. Unpaved areas: Top 6 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts:
a. 85 percent.
2. Building slabs and structures: Top 12 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts:
a. 95 percent.
3. Utility trenches: Compact backfill and fill materials to in -place density specified for
applicable area of trench, but in no case less than 90 percent.
4. Paved areas: Base course materials:
a. 95 percent.
D. Moisture Control: During compaction, control moisture of subgrades and subsequent lifts to
within tolerances from optimum moisture content as recommended by testing laboratory. Wet
surface with water when additional moisture is required. Aerate soil to aid in drying or replace
soil when excessive moisture is present.
3.10 GRADING
A. General: Smooth grade to a uniform surface that complies with compaction requirements and
required lines, grades, and cross sections and is free from irregular surface changes.
B. Provide smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and changed grades. Cut out soft
spots, fill low spots, and cut down high spots to conform to required surfaces tolerances.
C. Slope grades to direct water away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrade to
required elevations within the following tolerance:
1. Unpaved areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2. Inside building lines: 112 inch as measured with a 10-foot straightedge.
3. Paved areas: Plus or minus 114 inch.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
rq A. Testing Laboratory Services: Provide timely notice to testing laboratory. Do not proceed with
construction until testing of each subgrade and lift of fill or backfill has been performed and
p required inspections and approvals have been obtained.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02200-7 900-9264
B. Maximum Density at Optimum Moisture Content: Determine in accordance with ASTM D
698.
1. For each subgrade, fill, and backfill material, perform one moisture -density relationship
test for each 1500 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of material used.
C. In -Place Density Tests: ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon j
method), or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method), as applicable.
1. When ASTM D 2922 is used, check and adjust calibration curves using ASTM D 1556
only. ASTM D 3017 shall be performed to measure water content of soil at the time
in -place density tests are conducted. Calibrate density and moisture gages at the start of
testing on each type of material encountered and at intervals as directed. `
r.
D. Areas under Slabs and Pavements: Conduct not less than one in -place density test of subgrade
and one in -place density test of each compacted fill or backfill layer for every 2000 square feet
of overlying paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests per lift.
E. Foundation Wall Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift. -__
F. Trench Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift per trench.
G. If testing service reports indicate that subgrade or fills are below specified density, scarify or
remove and replace to the required depth, recompact, and retest at no cost to the owner.
3.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Completed Areas: Protect from damage by pedestrian or vehicular traffic, freezing, erosion,
and contamination with foreign materials.
1. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances in settled, eroded, or rutted areas.
B. Damaged Areas: Where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted,
settled, or lose compaction and whether due to subsequent construction operations or weather
conditions, restore materials to required conditions: Scarify or remove and replace to the
required depth, return to optimum moisture content, and compact materials to the required _
density before continuing construction. -
C. Correction: Should settling occur within the project correction period, remove finished
surfacing, add additional approved material, compact material, and reconstruct surfacing.
Construct surfacing to match and blend in with adjacent surfacing as nearly as practicable.
3.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Properly dispose of any excess or unsatisfactory topsoil off site.
B. Remove any material not required for use on the project (including unsatisfactory soil, excess
satisfactory soil, trash, and debris) and legally dispose of it off the owner's property.
C. On -site burning is not permitted.
v
END OF SECTION 02200
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02200-8 900-9264
SECTION 02280 - SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
I'
1.1 SUMMARY
{ A. Section Includes:
1. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new
j' construction.
2. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress.
P 1.2 REFERENCES
A. Title 7, United States Code 136 through 136y — Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and
Rodenticide Act as amended; 1947 (Revised 1988).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federal
Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under applicable
state and local law.
2. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use.
C. Contract Closeout Submittals:
i. Project record documents:
f a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has
been applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in
accordance with this specification.
b. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual
application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of
application and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity.
2. Warranty.
.^ 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Licensed to install specified products in the state in which the project is located and in
the local jurisdiction.
2. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located.
r.. a. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations.
191aLID:I OKIII I &11
A. Special Warranty:
1. Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas.
2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the
1 owner may have under the contract documents.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02280-1 900-9264
PON
B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following:
1. Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDE
A. Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a
termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site.
B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with
local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use �-
prevailing at the project site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to �.
be treated and methods of treatment used.
C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated.
D. Schedule ant of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the
soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's
instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur.
B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not
pressure -preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non -pressure -preservative treated wood
to contact with or remain proximate to soil.
END OF SECTION 02280 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02280-2 900-9264
s
SECTION 02520 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for pavements.
2. Formwork accessories.
3. Form stripping.
4. Reinforcing steel for pavements.
S. Cast -in -place concrete for pavements.
6. Concrete curing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Earthwork: Elsewhere in Division 2.
2. Cast -in -place concrete for structures: Division 3.
3. Joint sealers: Division 7.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 192-91I — Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf;
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991.
B. ACI 201.2R 92 — Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992.
C. ACI 211.1-91 — Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
D. ACI 301-89 — Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
E. ACI 302.1R-89 — Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
F. ACI 304R-89 — Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute; 1989.
G. ACI 305R-91 — Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
H. ACI 306R-88 — Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute, 1988.
I. ASTM A 185-90a — Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement; 1990.
J. ASTM A 615-92 — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1992.
K. ASTM C 31-91 — Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field; 1991.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02520-1 900-9264
fi
4
L. ASTM C 33-92 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992.
M. ASTM C 39-93a— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1993.
N. ASTM C 42-90 — Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete; 1990.
O. ASTM C 94-92a — Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992.
P. ASTM C 143-90a — Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990.
Q. ASTM C 150-94 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994.
R. ASTM C 171-92 — Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992.
S. ASTM C 172-90 — Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990.
T. ASTM C 173-78 — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 1978.
U. ASTM C 231-91b — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method; 1991.
V. ASTM C 260-94 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994.
W. ASTM C 309-93 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete; 1993.
X. ASTM C 494-92 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992.
Y. ASTM C 618-94a — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994.
Z. ASTM D 1751-83(91) — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types);
1983 (Reapproved 1991).
AA. ASTM E 329-93b — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993.
BB. CRSI MSP-1-90 — Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Concrete admixtures.
2. Curing compound.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-2 900-9264
T.
B. Quality
Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance
.+` requirements specified:
1.
Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations
begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been
�.
selected.
a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individaul strength test results,
standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations.
b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results,
and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr).
C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete.
d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required.
2.
Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified.
3.
Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all
materials furnished under this section conform to specifications.
*=� 4.
Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that
chloride content complies with specified requirements.
5.
Delivery tickets: Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each
load of concrete delivered to site.
6.
Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
7.
Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Services:
1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the
architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance.
a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements.
B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size,
t-' lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings.
1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation
of dirt or rust.
B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of
shipment and use.
C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or
other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile.
D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDMONS
A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02520-3 900-9264
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures,
and insulating blankets.
B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during
mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing,
shading, and windbreaks. ~_
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Pavement Forms: Standard steel paving forms in sections not less than 10 feet in length.
1. Single piece; depth equal to slab thickness.
2. Base width at least three -fourths of form depth but not less than 8 inches, unless
otherwise approved.
3. Straightness tolerance: 1/8 inch in 10 feet from true plane surface along top; 1/4 inch
in 10 feet along face.
4. Locking provisions at ends of abutting form sections.
S. Wood forms complying with the above provisions, including base and locking, may be
used only where form of less than 10 feet is required.
6. Wet screeds will not be permitted.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where
otherwise indicated:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
w
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain.
C. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice."
a. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of
concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be
cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted.
D. Load Transfer Devices: —
1. Dowels: Plain round or deformed bars, as shown on the drawings. Provide corrosion
inhibitor on unbonded end.
a. Metal expansion caps: Designed to provide not less than 1 inch of bar movement.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows:
1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-4 900-9264
i�
2. Type I.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.
C. Water: Potable.
;I
D. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33.
_ a. Class 2M.
2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: One-third of depth of pavements.
E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride
ions by weight of cement are prohibited.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with
other mix components.
i,
G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E.
�► J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
` 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth.
B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows:
1. Curing paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting.
C. Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Curing compounds: Liquid membrane -forming curing compounds complying with
ASTM C 309, Type 1.
J " 2. Solvents: Provide water -based products.
lob D. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on
ell the basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 211, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ
an independent testing agency acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed
mix design.
y
B. Specified compressive strength f(c) at 28 days: 3,500 psi.
loo- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-5 900-9264
C. Fly Ash:
1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to
a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20
D. Admixtures:
1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table
1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total
air content between 2 percent and 4 percent.
2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability.
3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed
at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. r.
4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be
placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement
and workability.
6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved.
E. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may
submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when
circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur.
Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests.
2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD
A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1
batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used,
provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained.
B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-112 percent of approved design mix air
content will be allowed for field measurements.
C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances.
2.7 CONCRETE MDM4G
A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ^,
ASTM C 94.
1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75
minutes. =
2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The
contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its
timely removal.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-6 900-9264
B. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by
concrete documents, properly located and accurately aligned. Provide for screeds, bulkheads,
anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required.
�. C. Release Agent: Provide field -applied form coating. Thoroughly clean and recondition
formwork and reapply coating before each use.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified.
B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which
adversely affect bond with concrete.
C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required
r, for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do
.•R. not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved.
1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with
or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not
F- permitted.
kr 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than
one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice
.� laps with tie wire.
D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Provide joints of the types and in the locations shown on the drawings.
1. Construct joints in adjacent panels in precise alignment. Do not offset joints.
2. Tool slab edges and formed joints with 1/8-inch radius jointing tool.
B. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide positive, firm support of filler during placement of concrete to ensure accurate
alignment.
2. Install expansion joint filler to the full concrete depth.
3. Recess top edge of filler to the depth indicated to accommodate joint sealant. Protect top
edge of filler with removable metal channel while concrete is being placed, or provide
filler with removable portion of the required depth.
4. Where dowels are used, punch or drill filler to exact dowel diameter, spacing, and depth.
C. Load Transfer Devices:
j 1. Apply a thin brush coat of approved lubricant to free end of dowels immediately before
concrete placement.
2. Place at right angles to joints, in precise horizontal and vertical alignment and spacing,
and firmly supported against movement during placing of concrete.
D. Sawn Contraction Joints:
P1. Use only wet saws of an approved type.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02520-7 900-9264
1
i
2. Time sawing to occur before cracking occurs but after concrete has hardened sufficiently
to avoid rough joint surfaces.
3. Saw to one-fourth of slab depth.
4. Extend saw cut to full width of concrete section, including adjacent curbs and gutters,
if any. r
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during
inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete.
B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed.
C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows:
1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints.
2. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide keyed construction joints with tie bars
of size and spacing as approved by the architect.
3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation.
D. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned `
construction joints.
1. Tboroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items,
using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable
to architect.
E. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures
are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before _
concrete has cured.
1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials.
2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates.
F. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient
temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or
when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that
the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per v
square foot per hour.
1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions.
2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of
poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation.
3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing
concrete.
3.5 FINISHING PAVEMENTS
A. Finishing Operations - General: r
1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement.
2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R.
3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify
conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-5 900-9264
Z
4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water
appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and
correct surface tolerances.
5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has
disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch
indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness.
6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact
concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture.
Recheck and correct surface tolerances.
B. Float Finish: As specified above.
r=
V C. Slab Surface Tolerances:
I. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains.
2. Flatness tolerance: Maximum depression between high spots when measured by placing
a 10-foot straightedge on surface at any orientation: 1/4 inch.
D. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows:
1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days.
2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low
areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect.
3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold
or hot temperatures until concrete has cured.
2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service
conditions and type of applied finish in each case.
B. Curing Period:
1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry.
2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the
following:
a. Water ponding.
b. Water -saturated sand.
C. Water -fog spray.
d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints.
r, 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete
has dried.
too, a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal
with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with
same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete
surface. Secure to avoid displacement.
1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab.
t
poll LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-9 900-9264
2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when
in service.
b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with
moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at
right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain.
4. Continue final curing to end of curing period.
D. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period.
E. Ensure that joints and slab edges receive adequate curing.
1. Ensure that sawn joints receive adequate curing after sawing.
2. Where joints subsequently will be sealed, do not apply curing compounds unless joint
faces will be sandblasted free of compound.
F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air
in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust
protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. -
3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms may be
removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 8 hours. Maintain curing
and protection operations after form removal.
3.8 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31.
1. Take samples at point of discharge.
2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein
at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same
frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used
for acceptance of concrete.
B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency
changes. _
1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94.
C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per
strength test performed on air -entrained concrete.
D. Concrete Temperature:
1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below.
2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above.
3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.
I. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test required.
2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete:
a.. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 02520-10 900-9264
i
C
f
b.
Minimum frequency:
1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each
concrete class.
2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each day's
r:
pour of each concrete class.
3. When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at
architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these
-- _
specimens is not waived.)
4. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests
for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not
r
less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5.
I
C.
Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is
required.
d.
Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless
other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens.
If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the
test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such
evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect.
C.
Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required.
f.
Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of
the following criteria are met:
`
1. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more
than 500 psi.
2. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified
compressive strength f (c).
,.,
3. Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds
1
specified compressive strength f (c).
g.
Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action
when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test
i
values for companion laboratory -cured specimens.
F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor
within 24 hours of test.
1. Test reports shall contain the following data:
a. Project name, munber, and other identification.
b. Name of concrete testing agency.
C. Date and time of sampling.
d. Concrete type and class.
!' C. Location of concrete batch in the completed work.
f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods.
2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at
r architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various
r i locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the
architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete
characteristics have not been attained.
r a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or tests as directed.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-11 900-9264
b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable
concrete has been verified.
3.9 OPENING PAVEMENTS TO TRAFFIC
A. Do not allow traffic, including construction traffic, on pavements until authorized.
B. Pavements may be opened to traffic only after seven (7) days have elapsed after placement and
pavements have developed at least 85 percent of specified final design strength.
END OF SECTION 02520
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02520-12 900-9264
SECTION 02930 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain link fencing and accessories.
2. Fence gates and related hardware.
3. Gate operator.
B. Related Sections:
1. Electric power for gate operators: Division 16.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 90-81(91) — Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles; 1981 (Reapproved .1991).
B. ASTM A 392-91b — Standard Specification for Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric;
1991.
C. ASTM F 567-93 — Standard Practice for Installation of Chain -Link Fence; 1993.
D. ASTM F 669-92 — Standard Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal Posts and Rails
for Industrial Chain Link Fence; 1992.
E. ASTM F 900-94 — Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 1994.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Indicate post sizes and thicknesses, protective coatings,
fabric characteristics, and accessories.
2. Manufacturer's technical data, catalog ruts, specifications, and installation instructions
for gate operator and keypad.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Showing location of fences, gates, posts and details of installation of hardware and
accessories. Location of gate operator and keypad are critical and are to be approved by
the Owner.
1.4 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMIIALS
A. Gates and Operators:
1. Complete and detailed operations and maintenance data for each component, including
diagrams and part numbers for ordering spare or repair parts.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02830-1 900-9M4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the _
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Galvanized steel fencing:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. American Security Fence Corporation.
C. Anchor Fence, Inc.
d. Boundary Fence & Railing Systems, Inc.
2.2 FENCING ACCESSORIES
A. Material and finish of accessories shall match fence fabric, except as noted.
2.3 FENCE
A. Fence Configuration:
1. Fence shall be constructed with:
a. Barbed wire top, 3 strands, inclined arm.
b. Top tension wire.
C. Brace rails at each terminal post.
d. Bottom tension wire. ._
B. Fabric:
1. Material: Zinc -coated steel, ASTM A 392.
2. Zinc coating weight: 1.2 ounces per square foot.
3. Wire diameter: 0.148 inch (9 gage).
4. Mesh size: 2 inches.
5. Fabric width: 72 inches.
C. Fence Framework:
1. Zinc coating of steel pipe (ASTM A 90):
a. Interior and exterior coating: Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces
per square foot of coated area, average.
2. Zinc coating of steel shapes (ASTM A 90):
a. Hot -dip zinc -coated; weight of coating, 1.8 ounces per square foot.
3. Material: Except where specific requirements are indicated on the drawings, the
contractor may select any framework material listed below.
4. Material: Conform to ASTM F 669, Light Industrial category.
a. Group IA: Steel pipe.
1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.112 inch wall thickness, 1.82 --
pounds per foot.
2. line post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.123 inch wall thickness,
2.96 pounds per foot.
3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.162 inch wall
thickness, 4.69 pounds per foot.
b. Group I-C: Steel pipe, commercial standard, yield strength 50,000 psi.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02830-2 900-9264
1. Rail size: 1.660 inches outside diameter by 0.083 inch wall thickness, 1.40
pounds per foot.
2. Lice post size: 2.375 inches outside diameter by 0.095 inch wall thickness,
2.31 pounds per foot.
3. Terminal post size: 2.875 inches outside diameter by 0.110 inch wall
thickness, 3.25 pounds per foot.
C. Group II: Roll -formed steel sections, commercial standard, yield strength 50,000
psi (see ASTM F 669).
D. Gate Type 1 :
1. Construct gate (and gateposts) according to manufacturer's standard heavy-duty design.
A. Type: Single rolling.
E. Gate Type 2 :
1. Comply with ASTM F 900.
a. Type: Single swing.
b. Frame: Round tubular steel.
C. Zinc coating of steel (ASTM A 90): Interior and exterior coating, 1.8 ounces per
square foot of coated area.
2. Provide gate hardware, including keeper for each leaf.
F. Gate Operator
1. General: Manufacturer's standard design and construction, suitable for gates specified.
Select operator size and features according to manufacturer's published data, taking into
consideration size, type, weight, and construction of gate, as well as Project conditions
and specified requirements.
2. Type: Electric motor with enclosed gear reducer and chain drive.
3. Speed: Minimum 45 feet per minute.
4. Features: Continuous duty without overloading or overheating. Rated by manufacturer
at 30 or more complete cycles per hour. All components UL approved. Furnish
disconnect switch with NEMA KS 1; Type 3R enclosure.
a. Provide equipment with suitable electrical characteristics including phase, voltage,
branch circuit wire size, overcurrent protection, and connection devices
coordinated with Division 16.
b. Self-locking.
C. Weather -resistant steel enclosure protecting all operating parts.
d. Automatic reversing upon obstruction during closing cycle and automatic stop
upon obstruction during opening cycle.
5. Controls: Electric and electronic programmable controls separated from motor and drive
mechanists, sealed from water and insects, with space for addition;l optional equipment.
Provide adjustable automatic closing timer and the following remote control device:
a. Keypad control allowing access by typing in numeric codes. Should allow
virtually unlimited number of codes.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 02830-3 900-9264
t
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 POST INSTALLATION
A. Layout:
1. Space line posts at equidistant intervals not exceeding 10 feet on center measured parallel
to grade.
2. Locate terminal posts at the beginning and end of each continuous length of fence, at
abrupt changes in line or grade, additionally at intervals not to exceed 500 feet, and as
otherwise shown on the drawings.
3. Install posts plumb and in proper alignment.
3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Install posts, braces, fabric, and other components in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and to meet or exceed requirements of ASTM F 567.
3.3 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, plumb, level, and secure.
B. Gates shall operate freely without binding or dragging and shall be easily operable by hand.
3.4 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION
A. Install gate operators according to manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for smooth, trouble -free -
operation.
B. Advise and consult with the Architect to obtain the Owner's requirements for standard available
programmable features or adjustable controls (such as time delays, interlocks, or safety
devices), and make necessary adjustments.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Gates and Gate Operators: After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3
days' use by normal traffic, readjust gates and gate operators and controls for optimum
operating condition and safety. Lubricate operating equipment and clean exposed surfaces.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of gate operators.
END OF SECTION 02830
_s
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 028304 900-9264
f
r,
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PIACE CONCRETE
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
2. Formwork accessories.
3. Form stripping.
4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete.
S. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following:
a. Foundations, footings.
b. Slabs on grade.
C. Supported slabs.
6. Concrete curing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Portland cement concrete paving: Division 2.
2. Joint sealers: Division 7.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 182-911 — Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf,
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991.
B. ACI 117-90 — Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American
Concrete Institute; 1990.
C. ACI 201.2R-92 — Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992.
D. ACI 211.1-91 — Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
E. ACI 301-89 — Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
F. ACI 302AR-89 — Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
G. ACI 304R-89 — Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute; 1989.
H. ACI 30SR-91 — Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
1. ACI 306R-88 — Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988.
J. ACI 318-89 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-1
900-92614
K. ACI SP-66-88 — ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute; 1988.
L. ASTM A 185-90a — Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement; 1990.
M. ASTM A 615-92 — Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1992.
N. ASTM C 31-91 — Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field; 1991.
O. ASTM C 33-92 — Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992.
P. ASTM C 39-93a— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1993.
Q. ASTM C 42-90 — Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete; 1990.
R. ASTM C 94-92a — Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992.
S. ASTM C 143-90a — Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990.
T. ASTM C 150-94 — Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994.
U. ASTM C 171-92 — Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992.
V. ASTM C 172-90 — Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990.
W. ASTM C 173-78 — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 1978.
X. ASTM C 231-91b — Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method; 1991.
Y. ASTM C 260-94 — Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994.
Z. ASTM C 309-93 — Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete; 1993.
AA. ASTM C 494-92 — Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992.
BB. ASTM C 618-94a — Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994.
CC. ASTM C 881-90 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 1990.
DD. ASTM C 1059-91 — Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; 1991.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-2 900-9264
EE. ASTM C 1107-91a — Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 1991.
FF. ASTM D 1751-83(91) — Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types);
1983 (Reapproved 1991).
GG. ASTM E 154-88 — Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 1988.
HH. ASTM E 329-93b — Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993.
II. CRSI MSP-1-90 — Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990.
JJ. NBS PS 1-83 — Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce/National
Bureau of Standards; U.S. Government Printing Office; 1983 (Revised 1984).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed
concrete concealed from view after completion of construction.
B. Exposed Finish: A general -use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and
including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1.
Formwork accessories.
2.
Concrete admixtures.
3.
Grout.
4.
Chemical hardener.
5.
r
Curing compound.
6.
Bonding compound.
7.
Epoxy bonding system.
B. Aggregates: Submit test reports showing compliance with specified quality and gradation.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following:
{ 1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars,
arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices.
p-a. Show stirrup spacing.
1 D. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance
requirements specified:
j 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations
begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been
f-= selected.
f;
,.� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-3 900-9264
a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results,
standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations.
b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results,
and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr).
C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete.
d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required.
2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified.
3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all
materials furnished under this section conform to specifications.
4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that
chloride content complies with specified requirements.
5. Delivery tickets: Submit copies of delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94 for each
load of concrete delivered to site.
6. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
7. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of
the contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 318.
3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Testing Agency Services:
1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the
architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. _
a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements.
C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project.
D. Mock -Ups: Cast mock-up of size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints and
proposed texture and color for slabs utilizing a hardener/sealer, using specified concrete and
formwork. Upon acceptance of visual qualities by the architect, maintain sample panel exposed
to view for duration of concrete work.
1. Approved mock-up may be incorporated in the work, at the contractor's option.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size,
lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings.
1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation
of dirt or rust.
B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of
shipment and use.
C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or
other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-4 900-9264
r+�
r
D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures,
and insulating blankets.
B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during
mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing,
shading, and windbreaks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Facing Materials:
1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound
concrete.
2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final
appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength
to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances,
and as follows:
a. Overlaid plywood: PS-1 'B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class I.
B. Formwork Accessories:
1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or
prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings.
2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or
other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-112 inches from surface of concrete
when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter hole in concrete
surface.
3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
AO`` A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where
t
otherwise indicated:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 195, cold -drawn steel, plain.
.� C. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-112 gage or heavier.
2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice.'
�. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-5 900-9264
i
a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to
weather.
b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed
surfaces.which will be exposed to view but not to weather.
c. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of
concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be
cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows:
1. Type I.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33.
a. Class 2M.
2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least:
a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms.
b. One-third of depth of slabs.
c. Three -fourths of minimum clear distance between, reinforcing bars or between bars
and side of form.
d. Columns and piers: Two-thirds of minimum clear distance between bars.
E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride
ions by weight of cement are prohibited.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with
other mix components.
G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E.
J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, and as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 8 mils thick.
B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107.
1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 - 03300-6 900 9264
C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless, aqueous solution of fluosilicates and wetting agents for
application to cured concrete for surface densification.
1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Lapidolith"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
D. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or tenaf cloth.
_ E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows:
1. Curing paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting.
F. Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
*w 2. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1.
a. Non -yellowing formulation where subject to ultraviolet light.
b. Where compounds are proposed for use on surfaces to which finishes, coatings,
or coverings subsequently will be applied, compound shall possess demonstrated
compatibility with finish, coating, or covering, and use shall be subject to
i approval of the architect.
�,. C. Curing and sealing compound: Where indicated, provide curing and sealing
formulation with long-lasting finish that is resistant to chemicals, oil, grease,
deicing salts, and abrasion.
r- 3. Solvents: Provide water -based products.
G. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type H.
H.
I.
Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project
conditions.
Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the
architect.
B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1.
C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on
the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion
mixes accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency
acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design.
D. Specified compressive strength f (c) at 28 days: 3000 psi.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-7 900-9264
i
i
E. Fly Ash:
1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to
a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20
F. Admixtures:
1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table
1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total
air content between 2 percent and 4 percent.
a. Do not use in slabs -on -grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer
of topping recommends use over air -entrained concrete.
2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability.
3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete nixes to be placed
at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F.
4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete nixes to be
placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement
and workability.
6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved.
G. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may
submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when
circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur.
Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with nix adjustment requests.
2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD
A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1
batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used,
provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained.
B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design nix air
content will be allowed for field measurements.
C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances.
2.7 CONCRETE MD(ING
A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of
ASTM C 94.
1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75
minutes.
2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60
minutes.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-8 900-9264
r
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION
�,.., A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The
k contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its
timely removal.
B. Earth Forms: Hand -trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the
drawings. Remove loose dirt before placing concrete.
C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to
! concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until
concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits.
D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by
contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for
necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required.
1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete.
a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions.
2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and
located accurately. Securely support items built into forms; provide additional bracing
at openings and discontinuities in formwork.
4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most
inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight -fitting panels designed to
minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work.
E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings.
F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory -applied nonabsorptive liner or
field -applied form coating. If field -applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and
recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is
unacceptable.
3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer dimension
parallel to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate tape. Cover with
sand to depth shown on drawings.
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
r,. A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified.
B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which
adversely affect bond with concrete.
f
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-9 900-9264
i
i
C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required
for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do.
not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved.
1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with
or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not
permitted.
2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than
one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice
laps with tie wire.
D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If
construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will
have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the architect.
1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep.
2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints,
unless details specifically indicate otherwise.
B. Isolation Joints: Construct isolation joints in slabs poured on grade at points of contact with
vertical components, such as foundation walls and column pedestals. Install expansion joint
filler to full concrete depth. Recess top edge of filler 1/8 inch where joints are unsealed.
C. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints where indicated.. Install expansion joint filler to
full depth of concrete. Recess edge of filler to depth indicated to receive joint sealant (and
backer rod where necessary) specified in Division 7.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or
supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from
suppliers of items to be embedded.
1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to
achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during
inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete.
B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and
items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed.
1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form
coatings are not used.
C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows:
1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-10 900-9264
l
2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be
,... placed in a continuous operation:
3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation.
D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but
r in no event greater than 24 inches.
tr 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly
placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed
concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together.
2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of
coarse aggregates.
3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally.
E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned
construction joints.
1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items,
using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable
to architect.
2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull
floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until
finishing operations are commenced.
F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures
are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before
concrete has cured.
1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials.
2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates.
G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient
temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or
when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that
the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per
square foot per hour.
1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions.
2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of
poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation.
3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing
concrete.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing
formwork.
1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete,
" cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and
area immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar.
2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete
in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white
and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate
thoroughly and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-11 900-9264
i
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins
or other raised area exceeding 1/4 inch height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections
completely removed and smoothed.
1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form
removal.
a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other
abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved.
b. Do not apply separate grout mixture.
2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of
walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with
formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces,
unless otherwise specifically indicated.
3.8 FINISHING SLABS
A.
Finishing Operations - General:
1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement.
2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R.
3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify
conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic.
4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water
appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and
correct surface tolerances.
S. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has
disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch
indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness.
6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact
concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture.
Recheck and correct surface tolerances.
7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with
power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand
trowels. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel.
Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it.
Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance
specified.
a. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering
system.
B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect before
application.
C. Trowel Finish: As specified above.
D. Chemical Hardener Finish:
1. Trowel finish and allow complete curing and drying of concrete surface.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-12 900-9264
f
2. Apply chemical hardener finish following manufacturer's printed application instructions,
applying in 3 coats diluted with water. Evenly apply each coat, allowing 24 hours for
drying between coats.
3. Remove any surplus hardener according to manufacturer's instructions.
r
j E. Slab Surface Tolerances:
1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains.
2. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots
-- - do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10-foot straightedge:
a. 1/4 inch.
F. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown
on the drawings:
1. TroweI finish:
a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled.
b. Surfaces to receive resilient tile.
C. Surfaces to receive carpet.
2. Chemical hardener finish: In locations shown on the drawings.
G. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows:
1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days.
2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low
areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired area to blend with adjacent
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect.
3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes
not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply
bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent
concrete.
4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in
diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry
pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to architect while bonding compound
is still active:
a. Dry -pack mix: One part Portland cement to 2.1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough
water as required for handling and placing.
b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and
matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out
prematurely.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
T-- A. General:
1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold
or hot temperatures until concrete has cured.
2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service
conditions and type of applied finish in each case.
B. Curing Period:
! 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes.
,,, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-13 900-9264
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full
curing period or until forms are removed.
1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun.
2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of
the applicable methods specified.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry.
2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the
following:
a. Water ponding.
b. Water -saturated sand.
C. Water fog spray.
d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried.
a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal
with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with --
same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete
surface. Secure to avoid displacement.
1. Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab.
2. Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when
in service.
b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with
moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application at
right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain.
C. Curing and sealing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform _
with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate
application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain.
Apply additional coat near substantial completion to act as sealer.
d. Use curing compounds only in locations permitted or required, and where use will
not interfere with other finishes, coatings, or coverings to be applied.
4. Continue final cluing to end of curing period.
E. -Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period.
F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air
in excess of S degrees F per hour and SO degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust
protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS
A. Non -Load -Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not
be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may
be removed after concrete has cured at not less than SO degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain
curing and protection operations after form removal. _
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 03300-14 900-9264
r-
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other
trades after such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing
construction, using same mix and curing methods.
3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application.
B. Perform structitual repairs with prior approval of the architect for method and procedure, using
epoxy bonding systems. The architect's approval is required for repair methods using materials
other than those specified.
3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31.
*- 1. Take samples at point of discharge.
2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein
at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same
frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used
for acceptance of concrete.
T- B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency
changes.
1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94.
C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per
strength test performed on air -entrained concrete.
D. Concrete Temperature:
1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below.
2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above.
3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.
1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test required.
2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete:
a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis.
b. Minimum frequency:
1. One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each
concrete class.
2. One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for
each day's pour of each concrete class.
3. When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at
architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these
specimens is not waived.)
PIN LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-15 900-9264
i
i,
4. When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than S strength tests
for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not
less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5.
C. Test one specimen per set . at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is
required.
d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless
other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens.
If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the
test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such
evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect.
e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required.
f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of
the following criteria are met:
1. No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more
than 500 psi.
2. Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified
compressive strength f (c).
3. Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds
specified compressive strength f (c).
g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action
when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test
values for companion laboratory -cured specimens.
F. Test Results: ` Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor
within 24 hours of test.
1. Test reports shall contain the following data:
a. Project name, number, and other identification.
b. Name of concrete testing agency.
C. Date and time of sampling.
d. Concrete type and class.
e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work.
f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods.
2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at
architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various
locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
3. 'The testing agency shall make additional tests of in place concrete as directed by the
architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete
characteristics have not been attained.
a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or tests as directed.
b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable
concrete has been verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
V
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 03300-16 900-9264 `
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Mortar and grout.
3. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
4. See Section 04255 for Veneer Brick and CMU.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit published data from manufacturers of products and accessories specified,
indicating compliance with requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Ratings: Where fire -rated masonry construction is indicated or required, provide materials
and construction methods identical to those of assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E
119 for hourly ratings required. Provide evidence acceptable to governing authority that
proposed construction complies with fire performance requirements.
B. Mock-up: Prior to commencement of exposed masonry work, erect sample panel to serve as
standard of appearance and workmanship throughout construction period.
1. Build at location and to design indicated on drawings, or as otherwise directed by the
architect.
2. Upon completion of construction and at the direction of the architext, demolish mock-up
construction completely and remove debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long and 8 inches high
(15-518 by 7-518 actual), with nominal thicknesses as indicated on drawings for various
locations.
2. Special shapes: Provide special block types where required for corners, control joints,
headers, lintels, and other special conditions, whether or not specifically indicated on the
drawings as special.
a. Outside corners: Square -edged units except where otherwise indicated.
3. Hollow load -bearing units: ASTM C 90, and as follows:
a. Type I: Moisture -controlled units.
b. Lightweight.
C. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.
4. Non -load -bearing units: ASTM C 129, and as follows:
a. Hollow.
b. Type I: Moisture -controlled units.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 04230-1 900-9264
E
l
C. Lightweight.
S. Solid load4earing units: ASTM C 90, and as follows:
a. Type I: Moisture -controlled units.
b. Lightweight.
C. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture.
B. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55, and as follows:
1. Grade S.
2. Type I: Moisture -controlled.
3. Lightweight.
4. Size: As indicated on drawings.
5. Special shapes: Provide special block types where required for corners, control joints, —
headers, lintels, and other special conditions, whether or not specifically indicated on the
drawings as special.
a. Outside corners: Bullnose units except where otherwise indicated. r
6. Color and texture:
a. Match texture of adjacent CMU.
2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I• _
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. White mortar aggregates: Sand or ground stone.
D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.
E. Water: Potable.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, except as specifically indicated
otherwise.
B. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: Comply with the following general
requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and anchorage devices:
1. Steel wire: ASTM A 82.
a. Zinc coating: ASTM A 641, Class 1.
1. Use: Interior locations.
b. Hot -dip galvanizing (after fabrication): ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
1. Use: Exterior locations or in contact with earth.
2. Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 635 or ASTM A 366; galvanizing in
compliance with ASTM A 153, Class B.
a. Use: Anchors and miscellaneous sheet metal in masonry accessories at exterior
exposures.
3. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. AA Wire Products Company.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04230-2 900-9264
�I
b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
C. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
d. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.
e. Masonry,Reinforcing Corporation of America.
f. National Wire Products Industries, Inc.
C. Joint
Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not less than 10
feet,
with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods.
1.
Width: Approximately two inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less than
5/8 inch mortar coverage on exterior exposures and 1h inch elsewhere.
2.
Wire sizes:
a. Side rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
f
b. Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
3.
Configuration:
r-
a. Applications of single unit width: Truss design, diagonal cross rods at not more
than 16 inches on center.
b. Applications of more than one unit width: Truss design, diagonal cross rods at
r-
not more than 16 inches on center, and number of side rods as follows:
1. One rod per face shell of concrete masonry.
C. Corners: Prefabricated L- and T-shaped units.
r
D. Bent -Wire Ties: Individual prefabricated units, and as follows:
1.
Wire diameter: 0.1875 inch.
�..
2.
Length: Adequate to extend 1-1/2 inches minimum into wythes of solid masonry and to
provide embedment of 1h inch minimum at face shells of hollow masonry, with 518 inch
of mortar coverage on exterior exposures and 1h inch elsewhere.
3.
Tie shape, hollow masonry: Rectangular, not less than 2 inches wide.
4.
Use adjustable 2 leg, 2-part pintle and eye units where coursing between wythes does not
r
align.
2.4 CONCEALED FLASHING MATERIALS,
A. Laminated Sheet Flashing: Furnish materials as specified in Division 7.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Foam Insulation Inserts: Equal to Korfil, all exterior wall surfaces including upper Apparatus
Bay walls to 16' below adjacent low roof.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D 226, Type I; No. 15 asphalt felt.
B. Sealant and Backer Rod: As specified in Division 7.
2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MDMS
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Limit cementitious materials to lime and portland cement.
s
2. Reinforced masonry: Type S.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 04230-3 900-9264
3. Applications as follows: Type N.
a. Locations for which another mortar type has not been specifically indicated.
B. Grout: ASTM C 476; provide consistency required at time of placement to fill completely all
spaces indicated to be grouted. _
1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension.
2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Concrete Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to laying.
B. Cutting: Where cutting is required, use power saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
1. Do not use wet cutting techniques with concrete unit masonry.
3.2 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in pattern bonds indicated on drawings.
1. Lay concealed masonry in running bond, or lap units at least 2 inches. _
B. Expansion and Control Joints: Build in movement joints where indicated, installing accessory
items as masonry is constructed.
C. Nonbearing Partitions: Extend full height to solid structure above, unless otherwise detailed.
D. Lintels: Install lintels of types indicated at all openings.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
A. Solid Masonry Units: Install in full bed joints and with head joint completely filled prior to
laying each unit; do not slush head joints.
B. Hollow Masonry Units: Install so that face shells are solidly mortared, horizontally and
vertically. Bed webs solidly in mortar at starting course.
C. Joints: Make mortar joints visually and dimensionally consistent.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain mortar joint widths of 3/8 inch.
x
D. Exposed Joints: Using concave jointer slightly larger than joint width, tool exposed joints
before mortar has assumed final set.
E. Cavities: Keep clear of mortar droppings and strike flush mortar joints facing cavity.
3.4 CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION
A. At contractor's option, provide either of the following structural tie systems.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04230-4 900-9264
0
4
B. Individual Ties: Connect wythes of cavity walls with ties staggered in alternate courses and
spaced at 16 inches on center maximum vertically and 24 inches on center maximum
horizontally.
C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: Install continuously in bed joints at 16 inches on center
vertically to bond wythes of cavity walls, lapping individual sections at least 6 inches. Use
prefabricated L-shaped and T-shaped sections at corners and intersections. Do not span
movement joints with reinforcement.
D. Space reinforcement at parapets at 8 inches on center vertically, unless otherwise detailed at
specific locations.
3.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, SINGLE-WYTHE WALLS
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for all single-wythe masonry walls,
unless otherwise indicated. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
B. Vertical Spacing: Not more than 16 inches on center.
3.6 INSTALUNG REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. Placing Reinforcement: Secure reinforcement accurately at locations indicated and to avoid
displacement; minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be bar diameter or
1/4 inch for fine grout and 1h inch for coarse grout, whichever is greater.
B. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities to be
grouted. Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide minimum
clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical
reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Grouting Technique: Perform all grouting by means of low -lift technique; do not use high -lift
grouting.
3.8 INSTALLING CONCEALED MASONRY FLASHING
A. Heads and Sills: Turn up ends of flashing at least 2 inches at heads and sills to form a pan, and
seal joints.
B. Sealing: Seal all joints in flashing to assure watertight integrity.
C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints of the first course of masonry immediately
above concealed flashings. Space at intervals of 24 inches on center.
3.9 PARGING
A. Parge face of CMU at exterior cavity walls prior to installing veneer system.
r
r
r , LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04230-5 900-9264
i
B. Mortar: Parge in two coats, using Type S or Type N mortar, to total thickness of not less than
1/4 inch.
C. Finishing: Trowel to dense, hard surface; taper at top of parging and form cove at bottom and
at horizontal interruptions.
D. Curing: Damp -cure for at least 24 hours.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean masonry after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Scrape off adhered mortar particles by hand, using non-metallic tools.
2. Comply with directions of concrete unit masonry manufacturer and NCMA Tek Bulletin
No. 45 for cleaning CMU.
B. Protection: Institute protective measures as required to ensure that unit masonry work will be
clean and undamaged at substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 04230
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04230-6 900-9264_.
1
r
I
P
' SECTION 04255 - VENEER MASONRY SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry veneer with anchorage to masonry backup.
2. Brick masonry veneer with anchorage to masonry backup.
3. Mortar.
4. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
r^ A. Product Data: Submit published data from manufacturers of products and accessories specified,
i indicating compliance with requirements.
B. Verification Samples: Submit samples of the following actual materials; include no fewer than
four masonry unit samples displaying extremes of color and texture variation to be anticipated
in the completed construction:
1. Facing brick.
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
3. Colored mortar samples.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-up: Prior to commencement of exposed masonry work, erect sample panel to serve as
standard of appearance and workmanship throughout construction period.
1. Build at location and to design indicated on drawings, or as otherwise directed by the
architect.
2. Upon completion of construction and at the direction of the architect, demolish mock-up
construction completely and remove debris.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRICK MASONRY UNITS
A. Type H Veneer - (designated on Drawings by "Type H") Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, and as
follows:
1. Equal to Henderson Brick No. 6000 F or FW, Velour, light range, modular size.
a. Comparable products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance
under standard substitution request procedures. Submit full range of samples.
2. Special shapes: Provide specially molded units as required to meet conditions indicated,
unless standard units can be sawn to produce the same effect. Do not use standard units
in any configuration which exposes cores or frogging.
B. Type III Veneer (designated on Drawings by "Type III") Facing Brick: (Same as Type H above,
except "Rock Faced").
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 04255-1 900-9264
4
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards for types required, and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long and 8 inches high
(15 5/9 by 7 5/8 actual), with nominal thicknesses as indicated on drawings for various
locations.
2. Special shapes: Provide special block types where required for corners, control joints,
headers, lintels, and other special conditions, whether or not specifically indicated on the
drawings as special.
a. Outside corners: Square -edged units except where otherwise indicated.
3. Type I Veneer (designated on Drawings by "Type I"): Non -load -bearing units: ASTM
C 129, and as follows:
a. Hollow.
b. Type I: Moisture -controlled units.
C. Lightweight.
d. Exposed Faces: Equal to Featherlite 8 x 8 Scored Face Burnished Block - Granite
color.
4. Type IV Veneer (designated on Drawings by "Type IV"): Same as Type I except color
equal to "Texas Cream" (Not Scored).
5. Submit full range of samples for final color selections.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
1. Provide portland cement of color required to produce approved mortar sample.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. White mortar aggregates: Sand or ground stone.
D. Water: Potable.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, except as specifically indicated
otherwise.
B. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: Comply with the following general
requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and anchorage devices:
1. Steel wire: ASTM A 82.
a. Zinc coating: ASTM A 641, Class 3.
1. Use: Interior locations.
b. Hot -dip galvanizing (after fabrication): ASTM A 153, Class B-2.
1. Use: Exterior locations or in contact with earth.
2. Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 635 or ASTM A 366; galvanizing in
compliance with ASTM A 153, Class B.
a. Use: Anchors and miscellaneous sheet metal in masonry accessories at exterior
exposures.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04255-2 900-9264
r--
i
3. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
�.. requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. AA Wire Products Company.
t b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
C. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
d. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.
e. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.
f. National Wire Products Industries, Inc.
C. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not less than 10
feet, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods.
?" 1. Width: Approximately two inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less than
5/8 inch mortar coverage on exterior exposures and th inch elsewhere.
2. Wire sizes:
r' a. Side rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
b. Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch.
3. Configuration:
r-- a. Applications of single unit width: Truss design, diagonal cross rods at not more
F than 16 inches on center.
b. Corners: Prefabricated L- and T-shaped units.
2.5 CONCEALED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Laminated Sheet Flashing: Furnish materials as specified in Division 7.
B. Flexible Sheet Flashing: Furnish materials as specified in Division 7.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Expansion Joint Strips: Neoprene filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Classification
2 Al, capable of 35 percent compression and sized for specific conditions indicated.
B. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D 226, Type 1, No. 15 asphalt felt.
C. Weep Holes: Cotton sash cord of length required to allow 2-inch exposure while leaving 18
inches within cavity.
D. Sealant and Backer Rod: As specified in Division 7.
2.7 MASONRY CLEANER
A. Detergent Solution: Job -mixed solution of 1h cup trisodium phosphate and 1h cup laundry
detergent per gallon of water.
2.8 MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
1. Limit cementitious materials to lime and portland cement.
2. Reinforced masonry: Type S.
t 3. Locations indicated on the drawings: Type S.
�., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04255-3 900-9264
i
4. Applications as follows: Type N.
a. Exterior, above -grade walls.
b. Locations for which another mortar type has not been specifically indicated.
B. Mortar Colored with Pigments: Proportion selected pigments with other ingredients to produce
required color. Do not exceed ratio of pigment -to -cement recommended by pigment
manufacturer.
1. Submit full range of samples for selection. At least 2 colors will be used plus standard
may•
PART 3 4 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Clay masonry: Before laying, wet clay masonry with initial absorption rate of more than 1
gram per square inch per minute, when measured in accordance with ASTM C 67, using
technique that will saturate clay masonry but leave it dry to the touch.
B. Cutting: Where cutting is required, use power saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges.
1. Do not use wet cutting techniques with concrete unit masonry.
3.2 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL
A. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in pattern bonds indicated on drawings.
1. Lay concealed masonry in running bond, or lap units at least 2 inches.
B. Expansion and Control Joints: Build in movement joints where indicated, installing accessory _
items as masonry is constructed.
1. Create pressure -relieving joints beneath supports for masonry veneer, either leaving
completely open for subsequent installation of backer rod and sealant, or installing
compressible filler material as backing for sealant.
C. Lintels: Install lintels of types indicated at all openings.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Masonry Units: Install so that face shells are solidly mortared, horizontally and
vertically. Bed webs solidly in mortar at starting course.
B. Joints: Make mortar joints visually and dimensionally consistent.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain mortar joint widths of 3/8 inch.
C. Exposed Joints: Using concave jointer slightly larger than joint width, tool exposed joints —
before mortar has assumed final set.
D. Cavities: Keep clear of mortar droppings and strike flush mortar joints facing cavity.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 04255.4 400=9264
4
1
3.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, SINGLE-WYT RE WALLS
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for all single-wythe masonry walls,
unless otherwise indicated. lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
B. Vertical Spacing: Not more than 16 inches on center.
3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY
A. Veneer Anchorage: Anchor masonry veneer to masonry backup with anchors specified, and
as follows:
1. Space plates of two-piece anchors so they will be centered on horizontal mortar joints,
allowing maximum vertical movement of ties due to differential movement of veneer and
backup.
2. Embed tie sections of two-piece anchors in mortar as masonry is being laid.
3. Space anchors at maximum of 24 inches on center horizontally and 16 inches on center
vertically. At openings and ends of veneer panels, provide additional anchors so that
maximum spacing at perimeter is 9 inches on center.
3.6 INSTALLING CONCEALED MASONRY FLASHING
A. Veneer Faashings: Turn flashings up not less than 4 inches at backup. Lap top of flashing with
building paper, or otherwise seal to prevent moisture penetration between flashing and backup.
B. Heads and Sills: Turn up ends of flashing at least 2 inches at heads and sills to form a pan, and
seal joints.
C. Sealing: Seal all joints in flashing to assure watertight integrity.
1. Lap end joints of flexible flashings at least 4 inches; seal in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
t D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes in head joints of the first course of masonry immediately
above concealed flashings. Space at intervals of 24 inches on center. Attach weep rope
vertically to back-up wall with "u" shaped nails in mortar joints.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean masonry after mortar is thoroughly set and cured.
1. Scrape off adhered mortar particles by hand, using non-metallic tools.
2. Before applying cleaning solution, saturate masonry surfaces with water; rinse
thoroughly immediately after cleaning.
3. Use bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes No. 20
Revised for brick masonry, except use detergent mixture only.
4. Comply with directions of concrete unit masonry manufacturer and NCMA Tek Bulletin
No. 45 for cleaning CMU.
B. Protection: Institute protective measures as required to ensure that unit masonry work will be
clean and undamaged at substantial completion.
r END OF SECTION 04255
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 04255-5 900-9264
I
r-
1;
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code
and as indicated on the drawings.
2. Welding.
3. Shop painting.
B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section:
1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete.
2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry.
C. Related Sections:
1. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
2. Steel decking: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-94 — Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1994.
B. ASTM A 307-94 — Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile
Strength; 1994.
C. ASTM A 325-93 — Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1993.
D. ASTM A 500-93 — Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1993.
E. ASTM A 501-93 — Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 1993.
F. ASTM C 1107-91a — Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 1991.
G. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
H. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1986.
I. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design;
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (RISC); 1989.
J. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, Research Council on
Structural Connections; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1985.
r., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05120-1 900-9264
s
K. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC); 1995, 7th Edition.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC 'Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges,' and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the
structural framing.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, ~
and kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown.
1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless
otherwise indicated. Contact the architect promptly to verify design of members or
connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear.
2. Substitution of other shapes of equivalent or greater strength and no greater dimension
may be allowed by the architect, but only under normal substitution procedures.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Producer's or manufacturer's information for products as follows, including ~
sufficient data to show compliance with specified requirements:
1. Mill test reports for each type of structural steel furnished. —
2. Specifications for primer paint, including manufacturer's data on chemical composition,
adhesion of spray fireproofing, and dry film thickness per applied coat.
3. Specifications for nonshrink grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location,
type, and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made
in the field.
1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS)
welding symbols.
2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others.
3. The fabricator is specifically responsible for the adequacy of any connections designed
by the fabricator to performance standards established in the contract documents.
Approval by the architect of shop drawings shall not relieve the fabricator of this
responsibility, despite wording to the contrary in paragraph 4.2.1 of the AISC Code.
C. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified —
under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in
accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures.
B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society
(AWS) qualification procedures.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05120-2 - 900-9264
C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular
requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following:
1. RISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. RISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings — Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
r- Design," with Commentary and Supplements.
3. AWS D1.1, 'Structural Welding Code - Steel."
t., 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I - A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of
work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection.
{� 1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work
I in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation.
B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If
temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using
platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36.
B. Structural Tubing, Cold -Formed: ASTM A 500.
�. C. Structural Tubing, Hot -Formed: ASTM A 501.
f D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washers.
r E. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
F. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325.
1. Type 1, plain (medium carbon steel).
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1; types as required by materials being welded.
B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying
with ASTM C 1107, and as follows:
1. Natural aggregate (nonmetallic) type.
C. Shop Primer: Fabricator's standard primer.
,... 2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate
r- and assemble to maximum degree possible.
i
r., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05120-3 900-9264
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine.
1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded.
C. Connections:
1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required.
2. Field connections: Bolted, unless welds are specifically indicated.
3. Bolts: High -strength steel bolts, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Bolting: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
4. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of
welds, including appearance.
a. Built-up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will
maintain proper alignment of finished section.
D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in
bearing.
E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right
angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning.
1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others.
2.4 SHOP COATING -PAINT
A. Shop prime all steel members.
1. Do not paint the following surfaces:
a. Machined or milled surfaces.
b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds.
C. Faying surfaces of bolted connections.
B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose
mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 2: Hand tool cleaning.
C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with
instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils.
2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection:
1. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
2. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop -fabricated welds as follows:
a. Visually inspect all welds.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05120-4 M9264
F
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine area and conditions for erection of structural steel and
verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted
with the architect's agreement.
r
r 3.2 PREPARATION
" A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements
C required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove
such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel
�^ framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads.
3.3 ERECTION
A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications.
B. Assembly:
r1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances
established in RISC Code, before making final connections.
r 2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member.
a. Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the architect upon
request, but only when members involved are not loaded.
C. Columns and Bearing Surfaces:
C 1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and
masonry surfaces to improve bond.
7 2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
L required.
3. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between
plates and bearing surfaces.
~' a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout.
,-, D. Bolting:
1. Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise
specifically permitted by contract documents.
t.. 2. High -strength bolts: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural
f Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
E. Welding:
1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or
when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind.
2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field -welded construction.
f
F. Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean painted
rareas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or other field
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05120-5 - 900-9264
r
}
operations- Apply touch-up paint matcbin shop coating by brush or spray to all damaged paint
areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection:
1. Field -bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
2. Field -welded connections: Inspect and test field -fabricated welds as follows:
a. Visually inspect all field welds.
END OF SECTION 05120
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05120-6
SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. K-series open web steel joists.
r` 2. Bracing.
t B. Related Sections:
E^" 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
2. Metal decking: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 — Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel
Joist Institute; July 1987.
B. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel
Joist Institute (SJI); 1992.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide joist system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the
contract documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection
requirements of the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders' (referred to hereinafter as SH "Specifications").
1. Wind uplift: Design joists and connections to comply with wind uplift requirements
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each distinct type of joist required and for accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings for fabrication and erection of joists; include plans, elevations, and
r-- large scale details of typical sections, special connections, joining, and accessories.
1. Show location and spacing of joists; indicate mark number and type.
2. Show bridging.
C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. SH certification of joist characteristics.
2. Manufacturers' certification of joist characteristics.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Strictly conform to requirements of SH Technical Digest No. 9.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05210-1 900-9264
r
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordination Data: Prepare and distribute to affected installers, drawings or templates detailing
placement of bearing plates and anchor bolts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Conform to requirements of SH "Specifications."
B. Steel Primer for K-Series Joists: Conform to requirements of SJI "Specifications."
C. Accessories: Provide accessories required for erection of steel joists, complying with SH
"Specifications" and with contract documents. —
2.2 JOIST FABRICATION
A. General: All materials shall be clean and straight.
B. Bridging is schematically shown on drawings. Detail and fabricate _bridging in complete _
accordance with SJI requirements.
C. Joists:
1 Top chord extensions: Provide extensions where indicated. Extension members shall
be designed as cantilever beams, with their reactions carried back at least to the first
panel point of the joists.
2. Bottom chord extensions: Where indicated, provide extended bottom chords or separate
extension units properly designed to support ceilings attached directly to joist bottom
chords. Maximum clearance between wall finish and end of extension: 1/2 inch, unless
indicated otherwise.
3. Camber: Comply with recommendations of SJI "Specifications."
4. Surface preparation for shop priming: Hand clean steel in accordance with SSPC-Paint
15 requirements.
5. Shop priming: Provide 1-mil continuous dry paint film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION —
3.1 ERECTION
A. Do not begin joist erection until structural support components have been installed and are in
suitable condition to receive joists.
B. Do not overload or exceed carrying capacity of any joist during construction period.
C. Accurately position and space joists before permanent attachment to structural supports.
D. Provide safe, stable structure throughout construction period. Do not remove bridging after
construction is completed, unless specifically authorized to do so by the architect.
1. Install bridging in accordance with SJI requirements.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05210-2 900-9264
E.
F.
2. Bridging installation shall proceed concurrently with joist erection and shall be completed
before joists are subjected to construction loads.
K-Series Joist Anchorage:
1. Bolt joists to structural support members as required by SJI "Specifications."
Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, solvent clean and hand- or power -tool clean
(SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3) completed field connections and damaged surfaces of shop primed
joists and adjoining structural steel. Apply corrosion -resistant touch-up paint compatible with
primer.
END OF SECTION 05210
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05210-3 900-9264
r
SECTION 05313 - STEEL ROOF DECK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard roof deck.
2. Formed steel accessories.
3. Framing for openings up to 18 inches.
B. Related Sections:
1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
2. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Steel form deck: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASIM A 446/A 446M-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993.
B. ASTM A 525-93 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993.
C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990.
D. AWS D1.1-92 — Structural Welding Code —Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
E. AWS D1.3-89 — Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989.
F. MIL P-21035B(NAVY) — Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S.
Department of Defense; 1991.
G. SDI Publication No. 28 — Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution;
Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992.
H. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and
Steel Institute (AIST); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics.
2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics.
3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners.
',,, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05313-1 900-9264
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support
locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and
accessories.
C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and —
section properties.
1. Prepare calculations under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the state
in which the project is located.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by
the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel."
3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks,
and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution."
B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures
specified in AWS D1.1.
C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented
experience.
D. Testing: Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by an independent agency
paid by the owner. If testing indicates that welds do not comply with requirements, remove
defective work and replace at no additional expense to the owner.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage.
Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark -'
each unit clearly to identify differences.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446.
B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, galvanized. —
C. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60 coating where indicated.
D. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G90 coating where indicated. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MEL P-21035B, _
Type I or H.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05313=2 900A264
1
7
2.2 FABRICATION
fA. Roof Deck Units - General: Provide deck complying with SDI specifications for properties
indicated.
B. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 1 : Comply with the following:
1. Profile type: Wide n'b Cl)q a WR).
2. Material: G60 galvanized steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch.
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span.
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option.
S. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option.
6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces.
E
C. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 2: Comply with the following:
1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR) Cellular.
2. Material: G90 galvanized steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch.
r-
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span.
i
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option.
S. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option.
�..
6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces.
7. Cellular bottom plate:
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Factory fabricated.
r,
C. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch.
D. Ridge/Valley Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, in slope to match roof
r
slope, not less than 4-112 inches wide.
E. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping.
F. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck
units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
7 3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing
conditions are acceptable before commencing installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute
specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section.
r^ Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed
sheets unattached at end of working day.
r- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05313-3 900-9264
1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings.
2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level
deck units.
3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection.
a. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches.
5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure.
B. Fastening:
1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as follows:
a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength.
1. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness. —
b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds.
C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not
fewer than 2 fasteners at any support. —
2. Side laps: At contractor's option, fasten side laps of adjacent deck units using one of the
following methods:
a. Weld laps. _
b. Mechanically clinch, or button punch.
C. Mechanically fasten, using self -tapping machine screws of No. 8 size or larger.
d. Spacing: Not to exceed 18 inches on center.
C. Openings:
1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks.
2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips r
as shown or as required for strength and rigidity.
D. Metal Accessories: Fasten metal accessories securely to deck units, using welding or
mechanical fasteners as appropriate to conditions.
1. Install other metal accessories as indicated.
E. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and
abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint.
1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's --
instructions.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site.
END OF SECTION 05313
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05313-4 900-9264
r
PART 1 - GENERAL
SECTION 05315 - STEEL FORM DECK
�.- 1.1 SUMMARY
f
t
A. Section Includes:
1. Noncomposite steel form deck.
t
- 2. Framing for openings up to 18 inches.
B. Related Sections:
1. Concrete: Division 3.
2. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
3. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
4. Steel roof deck: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993.
B. ASTM A 525-93 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993.
r' C. AWS D1.1-92 — Structural Welding Code --Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
I
D. AWS D1.3-89 — Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989.
E. MIL P 21035B(NAVY) — Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S.
Department of Defense; 1991.
F. SDI Publication No. 28 — Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution;
Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992.
G. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and
r" Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata).
I
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics.
2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics.
3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support
locations and anchorages; projections, openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and
accessories.
r, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05315-1 900-9264
I
C. Calculations: Submit manubctu er's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and
section properties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." —
3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks,
and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution."
B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures
specified in AWS D1.1.
C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented
experience.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING —
A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage.
Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark
each unit clearly to identify differences.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446. —
B. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60 coating where indicated.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MIL P-21035B,
Type I or 11.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Steel Form Deck - General: Provide units complying with SDI specifications for deck type
indicated.
B. Steel Form Deck: Comply with the following: —
1. Profile type: Corrugated.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. _
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.014 inch.
C. Maximum profile height: 9/16 inch.
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. _
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05315-2 900-9264
r
5. Side joints: Lapped seam.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping.
D. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck
units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing
conditions are acceptable before commencing installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute
specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section.
Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed
sheets unattached at end of working day.
1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings.
2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level
deck units.
3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection.
4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches.
5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure.
B. Fastening:
1. Fasten form deck units to steel supporting members as follows:
a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength.
1. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness.
b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds.
C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not
fewer than 2 fasteners at any support.
2. Side laps: Fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as follows:
a. Weld laps.
b. Spacing: Not to exceed 24 inches on center.
C. Openings:
1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks.
2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips
as shown or as required for strength and rigidity.
D. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and
abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint.
�. 1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
I instructions.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05315-3 900-9264
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clear debris from deck before concrete is placed.
B. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site.
END OF SECTION 05315
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05315-4 900=9264'
F
7 SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).
2. Dietrich Industries, Incorporated.
3. Dale/Incor.
4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
5. Marino Industries Corporation.
6. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG).
2.2 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
A. Fabricate metal framing units from ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611 steel sheet.
1. Finish: Galvanized (zinc -coated), Class G60, minimum.
B. C-Shaped Studs: Provide load -bearing studs fabricated from steel and sized as indicated;
C-shaped in cross section, 1.625-inch flange, with flange return lip.
C. Framing Accessories: Fabricate from minimum 16 gage steel sheet of the type and finish used
for framing members. Provide manufacturer's standard configuration for the following
accessory items:
1. Track channel.
2. Cold -rolled channels, 1-1/2 inch depth.
3. Clip angles.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners:
1. Threaded fasteners: ASTM A 90, hot -dip galvanized.
2. Anchorage devices: Hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel. Acceptable types
include:
a. Power -driven anchor screws.
b. Drilled expansion bolts.
C. Screws with sleeves.
B. Sheathing: Moisture -resistant inorganic, glass fiber reinforced boards.
1. The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract
documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
r a. "Wonder -Board'; Custom Building Products, Inc.
f LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05400-1 900-9264
I.
b. 'Durock"; USG Corporation.
C. "Dens -Glass Gold"; Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
2. Fasteners: ASTM C 954; self -drilling, self -tapping, bugle head galvanized or
cadmium -plated steel screws.
C. Joint Tape: Rubberized asphalt with polyethylene film backing, minimum 30 mils thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1007 except where exceeded by other requirements.
B. Install framing accessories such as web stiffeners, diagonal bracing, and bridging as indicated
or required.
C. Fastening: Join components using screws or bolts.
1. Wire tying of framing elements is prohibited.
3.2 STUD FASCIA & SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Correctly position runner tracks at base and top of studs. Attach runner tracks to structure in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for substrate and fastener type used. Use
fasteners at all track terminations and corners.
B. Construct corners using minimum of 3 studs.
3.3 WALL SHEATHING
A. Install sheathing so that long edges are parallel to studs. Center edges over studs.
B. Provide solid wood blocking or metal framing to support horizontal edges which do not bear
on horizontal framing members.
C. Coordinate installation of fleshings, anchors, and similar items necessary to construct and
weatherproof wall systems.
D. Apply rubberized asphalt joint tape to edges and joints of sheathing.
E. Install to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8
inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION 05400
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05400-2 960-9264
r
r
i
7
r
t
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Shop coatings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - METALS
A. Steel Shapes:
1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A 36.
2. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance: with ASTM A 123.
3. Tube:
a. Hot -rolled: ASTM A 501.
b. Cold -formed: ASTM A 500.
4. Pipe: ASTM A 53 (black steel and hot -lip galvanized).
B. Steel Sheet:
1. For nonstructural uses: Cold -rolled, ASTM A 366; hot -rolled, ASTM A 569.
2.2 MATERIALS -MISCELLANEOUS
A. Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with
ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
B. Concrete: Normal weight ready -mix concrete as specified in Division 3.
1. Compressive strength: 2500 pounds per square inch, minimiun, at 28 days, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application.
D. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection
required.
1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or
cadmium plated.
2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated.
3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307.
4. Nuts: ASTM A 563.
5. Lag bolts: FS FF B-561.
6. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92.
7. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111.
8. Plain washers: FS FF-W 92.
9. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84.
10. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325.
11. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588.
�^ LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05500-1 - 900-9264
f
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MiL P-21035B,
Type I or H.
F. Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with FS
TT=P-664, or equivalent.
2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Fabricate and shop -assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline.
B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible.
1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item
except where specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Welding:
1. Provide continuous welds at welded corners and seams.
2. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth.
E. Joints Exposed to Weather: Fabricate to keep water out, or provide adequate drainage of water
that penetrates.
2.4 FABRICATION - SHEET METAL
A. Comply with general fabrication requirements.
B. Bend sheet metal corners to smallest possible radius.
C. Welding Steel Sheet: Comply with AWS D1.3 recommendations.
2.5 FABRICATION - SHOP COATINGS
A. Shop prime all iron and steel fabrications, except:
1. Galvanized fabrications.
2. Fabrications embedded in concrete or mortar.
3. Fabrications specified as not to be primed.
4. Fabrications which are not to receive a finish paint system.
5. Fabrications for which an entirely field -applied coating is required.
B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as follows:
1. Solvent -dean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
2. Exterior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8,
or SSPC-SP 10.
3. Interior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6,
SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05500-2 ;900-9264
C. Shop Priming: Comply with SSPC PA 1.
1. Apply primer immediately following surface preparation.
2. Do not prime surfaces to be welded.
3. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete.
4. Apply extra coat to corners, welds, edges, and fasteners.
D. Shop Painting: Comply with SSPC-PA 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION -GENERAL
A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required.
B. Perform all field fabrication required for installation.
1. Fit joints tightly.
2. Weld joints as indicated.
a. Weld in accordance with AWS code.
b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth.
C. Do not cut or weld items galvanized after fabrication that are indicated for bolted or screwed
connections.
D. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp.
3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
A. Touch up damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanizing repair paint in accordance with
ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
END OF SECTION 05500
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05500-3 900-9264
e�
SECTION 05530 - GRATINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gratings.
2. Shop coatings.
B. Toeboards: Where toeboards are indicated as required, but are not detailed, design toeboards
to conform to the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - METALS
A. Steel Shapes:
r1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H-sections: ASTM A 36.
2. Grating bars: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 569.
r,* 3. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
4. Tube:
a. Hot -rolled: ASTM A 501.
b. Cold formed: ASTM A 500.
d 5. Pipe: ASTM A 53 (black steel and hot -dip galvanized).
6 B. Steel Sheet:
! roll 1. For nonstructural uses: Cold -rolled, ASTM A 366; hot -rolled, ASTM A 569.
2.2 MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS
A. Bar Gratings: Manufacture in accordance with "Standard Specifications for Metal Bar Grating
and Metal Bar Grating Treads" (part of NAAMM MBG 531), except for specific requirements
specified here.
1. Galvanizing, where indicated: Minimum 1.5 ounces zinc per square foot of coated
surface; galvanized after fabrication.
B. Bar Gratings:
1. Steel.
2. Welded construction.
3. Bar sizes, dimensions, and spacings as indicated on drawings.
4. Cross bar spacing. 4 inches.
r 5. Top surface: Plain.
6. Finish: Hot -dip galvanized.
2.3 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS
A. Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying with
ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05530-1 900-9264
t
B. Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application.
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection
required.
1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or
cadmium plated.
2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated.
3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307.
4. Nuts: ASTM A 563. --
5. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561.
6. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92.
7. Wood screws: FS FF-S-111.
8. Plain washers: FS FF-W 92.
9. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84.
10. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325.
11. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL P-21035B, _
Type IorH.
E. Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with FS _
IT P-664, or equivalent.
2.4 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Fabricate and shop -assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. -
3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline.
B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible. --
1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item -�
except where specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Welding:
1. Welding of steel: Comply with AWS DIA recommendations.
2. Provide continuous welds at welded comers and seams.
3. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. _
E. Joints Exposed to Weather: Fabricate to keep water out, or provide adequate drainage of water
that penetrates. r
2.5 FABRICATION - SHEET METAL
A. Comply with general fabrication requirements.
B. Bend sheet metal corners to smallest possible radius.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05530-2 900-9264.
C. Welding Steel Sheet: Comply with AWS D1.3 recommendations.
2.6 FABRICATION - GRATINGS
A. Gratings - General:
1. Provide toeboards at open sides of elevated gratings when curb is not otherwise
indicated.
2. Arrange removable panels to permit removal without displacing penetrating items.
B. Bar Gratings:
1. Banding bars: Cross section not less than bearing bars.
2. Provide banding bars welded to perimeter of removable grating sections.
a. Provide minimum of 4 hold-down fasteners for each removable section.
b. Fasteners: As recommended by grating manufacturer, or as suitable for the
purpose.
3. Make no cuts or notches in bearing bars.
2.7 FABRICATION - SHOP COATINGS
A. Shop prime all iron and steel fabrications, except:
1. Galvanized fabrications.
2. Fabrications embedded in concrete or mortar.
3. Fabrications specified as not to be primed.
4. Fabrications which are not to receive a finish paint system.
S. Fabrications for which an entirely field -applied coating is required.
B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as follows:
1. Solvent lean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
2. Exterior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6, SSPC-SP 8,
or SSPC-SP 10.
3. Interior fabrications: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 3, SSPC-SP 5, SSPC-SP 6,
SSPC-SP 8, or SSPC-SP 10.
C. Shop Priming: Comply with SSPC PA 1.
! 1. Apply primer immediately following surface preparation.
2. Do not prime surfaces to be welded.
* 3. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete.
4. Apply extra coat to corners, welds, edges, and fasteners.
r.. D. Shop Painting: Comply with SSPC-PA 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required.
B. Perform all field fabrication required for installation.
1. Fit joints tightly.
2. Weld joints as indicated.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 05530-3 900-9264
r
a. Weld in accordance with AWS code.
b. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth.
C. Do not cut or weld items galvanized after fabrication that are indicated for bolted or screwed
connections.
D. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp.
3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
A. Touch up damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanizing repair paint in accordance with
ASTM A 780.
B. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection.
END OF SECTION 05530
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 05530-4900-9264
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not
exposed, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Rough carpentry for:
a. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work.
b. Construction panels for miscellaneous uses.
3. Preservative treatment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. APA PRP-108 — Performance Standards and Policies for Structural -Use Panels; American
Plywood Association; 1988 (Revised 1989).
B. ASTM A 153-82(87) — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987).
C. AWPA C27-91 - Plywood - Fire -Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American
Wood -Preservers' Association; 1991.
D. AWPB LP-2-88 — American Wood Preservers Bureau Quality Control and Inspection
Procedures for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne
Preservatives for Above Ground Use; 1988.
E. NBS PS 1-83 — Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce, National
Bureau of Standards, 1983 (with 1984 Revision).
F. NIST PS 20-94 — American Softwood Lumber Standard; U.S. Department of Commerce,
National Institute of Standards and Technology; 1994.
G. NFPA WCD #1 — Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper
Association (formerly National Forest Products Association); 1988.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
B. Inspection Agency: Any agency whose rules are approved by American Lumber Standards
Committee.
C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and
showing compliance with each specified requirement.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 06100-1 900-9264
D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with
APA PRP-108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing
compliance with each specified requirement.
1.4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
J
A. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several
uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to
protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all $-
around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove
from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply
with the specified moisture requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes
are specifically required.
1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S).
2. Moisture content: S-dry or MC19 (19 percent maximum moisture content).
r
a. Any allowed under referenced grading rules.
3. Grade: Construction (Light Framing).
B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of
work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not
limited to blocking, hailers, etc.
1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry).
2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Construction PaneWPlywood: Miscellaneous uses.
1. Concealed plywood: C-C Plugged exterior.
2. Electrical/telephone panel backer: APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, Treating Grade
fire -retardant treated.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. I. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and
where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to
weather.
2.4 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP-2 (waterborne preservatives).
1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 18
percent for plywood.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 06100-2 900-9264
i
2. Treat the following:
a. Wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
b. Wood in contact with masonry or concrete.
C. Wood within 18 inches of grade.
d. Other members indicated.
B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153).
1. Fire -retardant treated plywood: AWPA C27.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially
available lengths. Discard pieces with. defects that would lower the required strength or
appearance of the work.
B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level.
C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards.
D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler.
E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid
splitting wood.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, milers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for
support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required
size. Provide in locations required by other work.
B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading.
C. Install permanent grounds for concrete and masonry where required.
3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL
A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated,
comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction.' Splice
members only where specifically indicated or approved.
B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes
and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction"
and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction."
1. Nail or screw miscellaneous plywood panels to supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 06100-3 900-9264
I
SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETWORK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior architectural woodwork.
a. Wood cabinets.
b. Cabinet hardware.
C. Plastic laminate clad tops.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
B. Cabinets: Full-size sample cabinet, showing actual construction and materials to be used.
C. Plastic Laminate:
1. Product data.
2. Samples for selection.
3. Maintenance data.
D. Cabinet Hardware:
1. Product data.
2. One sample of each type.
3. Samples showing each finish on each item of hardware exposed to view.
4. Maintenance data.
S. Operation data for drawer slides.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality of Materials and Workmanship: Provide woodwork that complies with requirements
of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," published by Architectural Woodwork
Institute (AWI) (hereinafter referred to as "woodworking standard").
B. Where contract documents indicate deviations from the woodworking standard, the contract
documents shall govern.
C. Coordinate installation of woodwork with other work to avoid damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETWORK
A. All Cabinetwork:
1. Grades: As indicated on drawings.
2. Species: As indicated on drawings.
3. Finishes: As indicated on drawings.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 06410-1 900-9264
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Species and grade as specified in woodworking standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 100.
2. Moisture content at time of fabrication: Not greater than optimum moisture content as �.
specified in woodworking standard.
3. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber.
5. Sizes indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Do not mark or color lumber, except where such marking will be concealed in finish
work.
B. Plywood: Types. grades. and cores as specified in the woodworking standard, except as
otherwise specified in this section.
1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 200. =
2. Medium density overlaid plywood: Exterior Type.
C. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD.. D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; tempered, with exposed faces smooth.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. High -Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Grades and thicknesses required by AWL.
B. Transparent Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9.
C. Opaque Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9.
D. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork: Match final finish color.
E. Fasteners: Style, size, material, and finish as required for the purpose.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE
A. Cabinet Hardware: Provide hardware and accessories indicated and as required for a complete
installation.
1. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with BHMA A 156.18.
a. Satin stainless steel: 630.
2. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard finish. complying with applicable
requirements of BHMA A156.9.
3. Hinges: Totally concealed style, self -closing, opening 180 degrees.
4. Pulls: Standard wire style, 3-1/2-inch centers by 5/16-inch diameter, no escutcheons.
5. Spring catch as part of the hinge.
6. Drawer slides: Side -mounted, 75-pound capacity, full extension, with nylon ball -bearing
rollers; positive pull-out stop, self -closing, lift -out feature.
7. Locks: 5-pin tumbler, dead bolt.
8. Cabinet -mounted shelf supports: Drilled holes, at 1 inch spacing, with shelf support G
clips for each shelf indicated.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 06410-2 000-9264 _
t
9. Closet Rod: 7/8" diameter stainless steel with mounting flanges; provide in each
„► wardrobe.
10. Coat Hooks: Stainless steel or solid brass, 2 per wardrobe door.
N B. Hardware Quantities:
1. Hinges: 18" oc maximum starting 5" maximum from each end.
2. Pulls: One per door or drawer.
3. Catches: 2 per door if over 36' high.
4. Drawer slides, side mounted: Two per drawer.
I 5. Other items: As indicated or as required.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in sizes and shapes indicated and using details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication and assembly in shop.
1. For applied fixtures and fittings, cut openings in shop.
2. Ease edges of solid lumber members using:
a. 1/16-inch radius for members 1 inch or less nominal thickness.
b. 1/8-inch radius for members more than 1 inch nominal thickness.
C. Prepare for finishing in accordance with woodworking standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Do not begin installation of interior woodwork until potentially damaging construction
operations are complete in the installation area.
B. Field Joinery: Comply with requirements of the woodworking standard for shop joinery.
C. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance.
D. Install woodwork in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp.
1. Install with no variation in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
E. Touch-up shop finishes at field cuts.
F. Secure woodwork to blocking or use anchors indicated.
1. Where anchorage method is not indicated, conceal all fasteners where possible.
2. Where exposed nailing is required or indicated, use finishing nails, countersink, and fill.
G. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and functional defects; where
repair is not possible, replace woodwork.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 06410-3 900-9264
6
H. Cabinets:
1. Install so doors operate smoothly, with edges aligned.
2. Install so drawers operate smoothly.
3. Install all hardware not installed in shop.
4. Anchor tops securely.
S. Install tops level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain design environmental conditions.
r.
END OF SECTION 06410
J'.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 06410-
F
s
4 ,
SECTION 07180 - WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces:
a. Exterior:
1. Brick masonry.
2. Concrete unit masonry.
B. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data and recommendations for use of each type
of product required.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed application instructions, including weather limitations,
condition of substrates, surface preparation or cleaning, protection of adjacent surfaces,
application of product, and cleaning of accidental over -spray and spills.
C. Samples - Clear Water Repellent: Submit 16-inch-square samples of each material to receive
r; water repellent. Leave 1/3 of panel untreated, apply 1 coat of water repellent to 1/3 of panel,
and apply 2 coats to remaining 1/3 of panel.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory
agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents.
B. Mock-up: Apply water repellent to mock-up constructed as work of other section(s).
1. Do not apply water repellents to project surfaces without the architect's approval of
water-repellent mock-up.
1.4 WARRANTY
' A. Furnish warranty to provide. materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which
fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. Ibis warranty shall be in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have against the contractor
�i under the contract documents.
1. Warranty period is S years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEAR, WATER REPELLENTS
A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper
f� performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07180-1 900-9264
w
L.
B. Products:
The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract
documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Silane — 40 percent active ingredients: Ethanol based, water based, or solvent based
polymerized silane solution:
a.
"Aridox"; Anti Hydro International, Inc.
b.
"Versaseal 'S' 40"; Applied Polymers of America, Inc.
C.
"Dri-SH 40 Silane"; Dow Corning Corporation.
d.
"Chem-Trete BSM-40% Huls America Inc.
e.
"Pentane 40"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
f.
'Hydrozo Envirosea140"; Hydrozo Inca
g.
"Klere-Seal 940S"; Pecora Corporation.
h.
"Weather Seal 1140% ProSoCo, Inc.
2. Siloxane — Mineral spirit based alkyl-alkoxy siloxane solution:
a.
"CP-250"; Chemical Products Corporation.
b.
"Euco Weather -Guard"; The Euclid Chemical Company.
C.
"Hydropel"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d.
"Shed Ox", L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
e.
"Rainstopper 100"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc.
f.
"Rainstopper 200"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc.
g.
"Water -Guard"; Nox-Crete, Inc.
h.
"Weather Seal Special Siloaane"; ProSoCo, Inc.
i.
"Weather Seal Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces
to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
B. Protection:
1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents
whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water repellents to all exterior masonry surfaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions.
C. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray
equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat
after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed.
D. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION 07180
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07180-2 900-9264
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured metal roofing system:
a. Manufactured metal roof panels.
b. Installation accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Sheet metal flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 792-93a — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated
by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements; 1993.
` B. ASTM D 226-89 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing; 1989.
C. ASTM D 4601-91 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used
in Roofing; 1991.
D. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL); 1993.
F
E. UL 590 — Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
1994.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Provide for expansion and connaaron of system components due to ambient temperature
and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to tempe-rature change without
buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other
damaging effects.
a. Anticipated ambient temperature range: 0 to 110 degrees F.
B. Wind Uplift: Provide metal roof panel systems which have been tested in accordance with UL
580 and listed in the UL "Roofing Materials and Systems Directory" for the following rating:
1. Class 60.
1 CY1=0IIV ;-`
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data,
details, and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that metal panel assembly
components comply with contract documents.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07410-1
r.
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings which show arrangement and orientation of panels and details of
panel joints, corners, custom profiles, supporting devices, and closure trim and flashing. Show
panel system in relation to adjacent construction.
C. Samples for Selection of Coated Finish Colors: 4 x 6 inch square pieces of actual panel
materials. Submit full range of samples.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years' successful experience
in the design, fabrication, and installation of metal panel systems comparable in size and nature
to those required for this project. ='
B. Field Measurements: Measure in -place construction on which panel system will be installed
if possible, before fabrication of panels. If not feasible, fabricate material to allow in -field
trimming of panels to assure proper fit.
1. Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with shop fabrication to minimize
field adjustments, splicing, and mechanical joints.
'r
C. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warrant coated finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk in excess of 8 units, and fade _
in excess of 5 NBS points, for a period of 20 years, without reducing or otherwise limiting any
other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS '
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufactured Metal Panel Systems: Furnish basic materials, including panels, accessories, and
fasteners, from a single source manufacturer. Furnish other products integral with panel
system from the same manufacturer as basic materials, or from a manufacturer approved or
recommended by the basic materials manufacturer.
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: --
a. AEP-Span Division/United Dominion Co.
b. Fabral-Alvan Building Products.
C. Architectural Panels, Inc.
d. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
e. Flexospan,Inc.
f. Robertson, a United Dominion Company.
g. Metal Building Components, Inc.
h. Steelite, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. "Cralvalume" Sheet: ASTM A 792; steel sheet, coated with zinc -aluminum alloy, manufactured
under licensing requirements of B1EC International Inc.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07410-2 900-9264
2.3 ROOF SYSTEM
E A. System Type: Uninsulated system consisting of roof panels with concealed attachment clips
in panel; clips secured directly to rigid substrate.
1. Seam type: Panel joint covered and locked by applied cap or strip (batten cover).
2. Fabricate panels from "Galvalume" sheet steel, minimum 22 gage (0.034 inch thick).
l 3. Exterior finish: Fluoropolymer.
4. Interior (underside) finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -inhibiting wash coat.
5. Panel width (nominal coverage): 16 inches.
6. Panel profile: Match MBCI Craftsman Series H1316-1/2. Color to be selected from
standard colors.
B. Underlayment: Unperforated asphalt -saturated felt; ASTM D 226, Type 11 or ASTM D 4601,
Type H.
C. Concealed Panel Clips:
1. Fabricate from galvanized steel.
2. Provide roof system manufacturer's standard type clips to suit project requirements,
including but not limited to the following:
a. Live loads.
b. Thermal movement; accommodate expansion and contraction without introducing
stress into roof system.
C. Slope of roof.
d. Special conditions at transitions, penetrations, and terminations.
D. Fasteners:
1. Threaded fasteners - general: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant
fasteners of size and type required for intended application.
a. Use of cadmium -plated fasteners is not allowed.
2. Rivets: Noncorrosive metal, compatible with metals to be fastened.
E. Accessories:
1. Flexible closures: Closed -cell neoprene rubber, formed to fit panel profile with 5 to 10
percent compression when secured in place.
2. Sheet metal closures, flashing, and trim: Fabricate from same type of sheet metal, and
with same finish, as adjacent roof panel.
3. Flexible sheet flashing: Neoprene or EPDM sheet, minimum 0.060 inch thickness.
4. Concealed sealants and gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
S. Exposed joint sealant: As specified elsewhere in Division 7.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Fluoropolymer Finish:
1. Pretreatment: Caustic etch and conversion coating, each followed by water rinse.
2. Primer: Modified epoxy primer, minimum 0.2 mil thick; bake to cure.
3. Finish coat: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish coat, minimum 0.8
mil thick; bake to cure. Match MBCI standard colors.
4. Protective film: Provide strippable plastic film, applied to finish of coil stock before
forming.
1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07410-3 -900-9264
r
E
r
B. Mill Finish: As -fabricated, welds cleaned and dressed, exposed welds ground smooth.
Remove oil, grease, dirt, and weld spatter from finished units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate or structural system to receive work of this section is complete, properly
sized, and is laid out correctly in plan and elevations.
B. Correct unacceptable substrate installations before start of metal panel erection.
C. Coordinate work with other adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight
construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manufactured metal panels in accordance with panel manufacturer's
recommended practices.
I. Fasten panels to structure as necessary to comply with performance criteria, allowing for
expansion and contraction due to temperature variations and building movement.
2. Install gaskets, sealants, closures, and trim as the work progresses to ensure airtight and
watertight performance of the completed installation.
B. Roof System Installation:
1. Underlayment: Install one layer of underlayment, starting at low point of roof. Lap
seams a minimum of 2 inches. Conceal or arrange fasteners to prevent contact between
fastener head and underside of metal roofing.
2. Install roof panels in single, continuous piece from eaves to ridge.
3. Roof panel installation: Install roof panels using concealed clips in panel joints.
a. Use of exposed fasteners is not permitted unless specifically approved by the
architect.
4. Do not penetrate finish ceiling in Apparatus Bay with screws.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Roof Systems:
1. Alignment: 1/4 inch in 20 feet for conformity to lines of roof slope and seam locations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective coverings from prefinished metal surfaces after each panel is installed.
B. Touch up or refinish marred or abraded surfaces. Replace damaged units and units which
cannot be refinished to the architect's satisfaction.
C. Clean finished surfaces using techniques and materials recommended by panel manufacturer.
Protect cleaned surfaces until project completion. t
END OF SECTION 07410 `^
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07410-4 900-9264
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Substrate preparation.
2.
Insulation.
3.
Roof membrane.
4.
Base flashings.
5.
Roof accessories.
B. Related Sections:
I. Carpentry - wood blocking and milers: Division 6.
2. Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base flashings): Elsewhere in Division
7.
3. Roof accessories: Elsewhere in Division 7.
4. Roof drains, curbs for equipment: Division 15.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 208-94 — Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1994.
B. ASTM C 518-91 — Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1991.
C. ASTM C 728-91 — Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 1991.
D. ASTM D 4897-89 — Standard Specification for Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Base Sheet Used
in Roofing; 1989.
E. ASTM E 84-91a —. Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 1991.
F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide 1992; Factory Mutual System; 1992 (with Supplement 1).
G. The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association,
1989.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Factory Mutual System Classification: Provide roofing.. materials and a roofing system
assembly which have been listed in the Factory Mutual System "Approval Guide" as being
acceptable for Class I roof assembly construction.
1. Provide roof system, including insulation and fasteners, rated by FM for Class I-60 wind
uplift.
h
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07525-1 900-9264
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical product information, installation instructions, and
recommendations for each type of roofing material. Furnish additional information as
necessary to demonstrate products comply with project criteria.
B. Color samples for selection.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Man's Qualifications: A company that has produced roofing materials and accessories
of the type included in this section for at least three years.
B. Installer Qualifications: A company approved or licensed by the roofing materials manufacturer
and which has completed at least 10 previous installations of roofing material similar to the type
included in this section.
1. Certification: Furnish to the architect, before roofing contract award, written
documentation that installer is manufacturer certified to install roofing systems of the
type included in this section.
2. Installer supervision: Have installer identify a supervisor with at least 5 years experience
in the application of the type of modified bituminous sheet roofing system included in
this section, to provide full-time review of built-up roofing installation work.
3. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this
contract.
C. FM Label: Roofing material packaging shall bear FM Classification marking.
D. Pre -Roofing Meeting: Organize and conduct a meeting at the construction site 2 weeks before
scheduled start of roof system installation with roofing installer; installer of each component
of related work, including deck or substrate construction, roof equipment, penetrations of roof
deck, and other work integral with or adjacent to roofing; the architect; the owner; roofing
manufacturer's representative; and other parties involved with roofing system performance,
including owner's insurance representative, independent testing agencies, and governing
authorities. •�
1. Walk roof areas to review and discuss substrate preparation including repair of
unacceptable surfaces, roof drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and work
performed by other trades which requires coordination with roofing system. ._
2. Examine steel deck for proper flatness and slope, review structural capability for
supporting roofing system and methods of fastening.
3. Review contract document requirements and submittals for roofing system, including
roofing schedule, inspection and testing, and environmental conditions. Identify what
are considered unacceptable weather conditions for roofing, and which governing
regulations or insurance requirements will affect roofing system installation.
4. Document discussions in writing, including actions required, and distribute copy of
report to each meeting participant.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Begin roofing installation when weather conditions are within acceptable limits according to
manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07525.2 900-9264
E
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened, sealed containers or packages,
with manufacturer's labels intact.
B. Store materials in weather -protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Project Installation Guarantee: Submit written agreement signed by the installer and the
contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in product and workmanship for a 2-year period
from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting other rights to
correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to
include product failure which leads to interruption of a water -tight installation. Guarantee shall
cover work of this section, including:
1. Roof membrane.
2. Base flashings.
3. Insulation.
4. Roof accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty
signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product
which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other
rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents, for the following
period of time:
1. 15 years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Roof System:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Celotex Corporation.
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
C. GAF Building Materials Corporation.
d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
e. Intec/Permaglas, Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Venting Base Sheet: Asphalt -coated fiberglass mat with venting channeLs on underside; ASTM
D 4897. Use over:
1. Insulation.
j B. Modified Bituminous Sheet, Smooth Surface: Preformed sheets of reinforced rubberized
asphalt for 'torch" application.
1. Modifier (rubberizing agent): Styrene butadiene styrene (SBS).
2. Bottom surface: Exposed bitumen, sand coating, or polyethylene sheet.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07525-3 900-9264
3. Top : Manufacturer's standard smooth surface, suitable for application of coating
or additional plies.
4. Thickness: 100 mils, minimum.
C. Modified Bituminous Sheet, Granular Surface: Preformed sheets of reinforced rubberized
asphalt for "torch' application.
1. Modifier (rubberizing agent): Styrene butadiene styrene (SBS).
2. Bottom surface: Exposed bituminous sheet, sand coating, or polyethylene sheet.
3. Top surface: Mineral granules, manufacturer's standard white or light gray color.
4. Thickness: 70 mils, minimum.
D. Flashing Sheet: Same as roofing membrane sheet.
2.3 ROOF SUBSTRATE BOARD
A. Perlite Board: 3/4 inch thick; ASTM C 728.
B. Fasteners: Self -drilling, self -tapping, galvanized steel screws with integral washers or �-
large-diameter heads. Type recommended by deck and sheathing manufacturer.
2.4 UNIFORM THICKNESS INSULATION
A. System Requirements:
1. Minimum "R-value" in accordance with ASTM C 518 after conditioning: 30 at 75
degrees F.
2. Flame spread: 75 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
3. Maximum system thickness: 4 inches.
4. R Value: As indicated on drawings. J
B. Roof insulation: Provide any type and style of insulation which meets contract requirements
and which is approved by the manufacturer for the indicated installation. "
C. insulation Overlay Board:
1. Wood fiberboard: 1/2 inch thick; ASTM C 208 roof insulation board. 6 `
2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, fluoropolymer-coated steel, or nonferrous metal. Size, length,
and type recommended by manufacturer as suitable for material to be fastened, substrate, and
that will comply with requirements of governing authorities and listing agencies.
B. Sealant: One -component urethane, nonsag, compatible with membrane and flashing materials.
C. Nailers and Blocking: Fabricate from treated wood as specified in Division 6 section on rough
carpentry.
D. Cants: Perlite board, ASTM C 728.
1. Size: 4 inches by 4 inches by 1-1/2 inches thick.
E. Tapered Edge Strips: Rigid perlite board, ASTM C 728.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 075254 900-9264
1. Size: 18 inches by 1-1/2 inches thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where roofing is to be installed. Correct substrate surfaces which are
unacceptable to the installer, and are not in agreement with manufacturer's installation
instructions, before starting roofing application.
B. Metal Deck: Verify that flatness and fastening of metal roof decks comply with metal deck
installation provisions specified in Division 5 and as recommended in "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual."
3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. General: Remove trash, debris, grease, oil, water, and contaminants from roof deck surface.
B. Metal Deck: Mechanically fasten one layer of roof substrate board to deck.
1. Fastener spacing: Comply with FM requirements and fastener manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Fastener spacing: Comply with fastener manufacturer's recommendations for metal deck
type, substrate board type, and substrate board thickness.
C. Install blocking, nailer, cants, reglets, and similar attachment devices as indicated or required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Schedule inspections and field tests required for roofing system with independent testing
agencies, and cooperate with the testing agency personnel during field visits.
B. Prevent roofing materials from damaging or spilling on adjacent construction. Replace adjacent
materials damaged by roofing system installation.
C. Interruptions of Roofing Work:
1. install insulation, roofing plies, asphalt, and other roofing materials in a way to prevent
insulation and roofing plies from being left exposed during precipitation or overnight.
2. Provide cutoffs at end of each day's work. Cover exposed insulation and
water -permeable materials with a course of roofing sheet. Seal joints and edges with
roofing cement. Remove cutoffs immediately before resuming work.
D. Installation of Roofing Sheets:
1. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation to ensure proper installation of
sheet without irregularities such as fishmouths or wrinkles.
2. Place and press sheets during installation to ensure proper adhesion to substrate and
�., adjacent roofing sheet.
3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that joints are solidly adhered
and weathertight.
J _
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07525-5 9004264
1"'
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before the
end of the work day or before start of unacceptable weather for roofing.
2. Butt units tightly together and trim to fit penetrations and interruptions so that gaps
between units and between insulation and adjacent construction do not exceed 1/4 inch.
3. Shape insulation or provide preformed units to provide crickets, saddles, and tapered
areas as indicated or as required to provide drainage. r.
4. Install insulation units in continuous application of roofing bitumen or insulation
adhesive.
5. Mechanically fasten insulation units at roof perimeter to meet wind uplift requirements,
but using not less than one fastener per 4 square feet and at least 2 fasteners per board.
B. Uniform Thickness Insulation:
1. Install insulation in 2 layers with end joints staggered and joints of upper layer staggered
in both directions from joints of layer below.
C. Overlay Board: In-
1. Embed one layer of insulation overlay board over top of insulation in a continuous
application of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive.
3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with roofing manufacturer's current application instructions.
1. Spot -adhered base ply: install base ply in spot applications of interply adhesive.
Overlap ends and edges a minimum of 2 inches. Embed ply in spots spaced not more
than 9 inches on center each way and covering at least 33 percent (1/3) but not more than
67 percent (2/3) of the sheet. Install in the following locations:
a. Over insulation.
B. Roofing Plies:
1. Torch -apply one layer of smooth surface modified bituminous roofing sheet, followed
by one layer of granule -surfaced modified bituminous roofing sheet.'
3.6 FLASHING AND STRIPPING
A. Fasten edge of membrane at terminations to receive base fleshings in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide one- or two-ply modified bituminous flashings. Apply using methods recommended
by modified bituminous sheet roofing manufacturer.
1. Extend all plies of fleshings at terminations and curbs to height indicated, but to not less ,
than 4 inches above top of cant or to top of curb less than 6 inches high.
2. Nail flashings at 8 inches on center, approximately 1 inch from top edge.
3. Seal top edge of flashing at terminations and curbs with sealant.
C. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16-oz copper or
0.040-inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07525-6 900-9264
1. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive
stripping.
2. Install stripping as specified for flashings above, except for nailing requirements.
a. Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof
membrane.
D. Install other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA
Construction Details as applicable.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are
soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult
manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.
END OF SECTION 07525
�,. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07525-7 900-9264
1
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sheet metal flashing and trim.
2. Flexible flashings.
3. Composite flashings.
4. Gutters and downspouts.
r-. 5. Fasteners and attachment devices.
6. Coatings and slip sheets to isolate sheet metal from dissimilar materials.
B. Flasldngs which are integral with membrane roofing or waterproofing systems (base flashings)
are not included in this section.
C. Flashings which are integral with prefabricated roof accessories, equipment, and the like are
not included in this section.
D. Wood blocking, milers, edge strips, and battens are not specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
lot
A.
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National
Association, Inc. (SMACNA); 1993.
«-
B.
ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated. (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990.
0"
C.
AS1M A 527/A 527M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
i
by the Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality; 1990.
D.
ASTM D 412-92 — Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers
and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension; 1992.
E.
ASTM D 573-88 — Standard Test Method for Rubber —Deterioration in an Air Oven; 1988.
F.
ASTM D 746-79(87) — Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact; 1979 (Reapproved 19".
G.
ASTM D 1149 91— Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration —Surface Ozone Cracking
in a Chamber; 1991.
H.
ASTM D 2240-91— Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness; 1991.
I.
FS TT-C494B — Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant; 1985.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07600-1 900-9264
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions, in sufficient
detail to demonstrate products comply with contract documents.
B. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings clearly indicating component profiles, joints, transitions,
fastening methods, and relationship of flashing materials to adjacent construction.
C. Samples: Submit 6-inch-square samples of each type of metal and finish required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A company familiar with installing products included in this section and which has
completed at least 20 installations similar in scope to work included in this section.
B. Quality Standard:
1. Fabricate and install sheet metal work in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual," unless specifically indicated otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: Coil coated, commercial quality steel sheet, ASTM A 526
or ASTM A 527, G90 hot -dip galvanized.
1. Finish: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish over epoxy primer;
minimum system thickness 1.0 mil. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat on
underside.
a. Color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
color selection.
2. Provide strippable plastic protective film on prefinished surface.
3. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Atas Aluminum Corporation.
b. Copper Sales, Inc.
C. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
e. Vincent Metals DivisionlRio Algom, Inc.
B. Sheet Lead: Hard tempered, containing 4 to 6 percent antimony, 3.0 pounds per square foot
minimum weight for exposed sheet. Soft lead sheet, 4.0 pounds per square foot minimum
weight for concealed uses.
C. Laminated Sheet Flashing: Laminate one layer of asphaltic kraft paper or asphalt -impregnated
fabric to each face of a 3 ounce copper sheet.
1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "AFCO Cop -A -Bond Duplex"; AFCO Products, Inc.
b. "Cop-R-Tex Duplex"; York Manufacturing, Inc.
Z
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07600-2 9004264
rr^
D. Sheet Rubber Flashing: Use uncured neoprene or EPDM sheet.
E. EPDM Flashing: Uncured EPDM sheet; minimum 60-mil thickness; minimum properties as
follows:
1.
Tensile strength (ASTM D 412): 130S pounds per square inch.
2.
Elongation (ASTM D 412): 300 percent.
`
3.
Tear resistance (ASTM D 412): ISO pounds per inch.
Awl-
4.
Ozone resistance (ASTM D 1149): No cracks after 168-hour exposure to one part per
million ozone at 104 degrees F and 20 percent strain.
5.
Maximum brittleness temperature (ASTM D 746): Minus 49 degrees F.
6.
Resistance to heat aging (ASTM D 573): Minimum properties (ASTM D 412) after
aging at 240 degrees F for 672 hours:
a. Tensile strength: 1205 pounds per square inch.
b. Elongation: 200 percent.
f '
C. Tear resistance: 125 pounds per inch.
7.
Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
Contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Sure -Seal Elastoform Flashing"; Carlisle Syntec Systems.
b. "SPM Flashing% Manville Roofing Systems, a Division of Schuller International,
Inc.
F. Neoprene Sheet Flashing: Uncured neoprene sheet; minimum 60-mil thickness; minimum
properties as follows:
1. Shore hardness (ASTM D 2240): Minimum, 55 plus or minus 10.
2. Tensile strength (ASTM D 412): 1305 pounds per square inch.
3. Elongation (ASTM D 412): 250 percent.
4. Tear resistance (ASTM D 412): 150 pounds per inch.
5. Ozone resistance (ASTM D 1149): No cracks after 168-hour exposure to one part per
million ozone at 104 degrees F and 20 percent strain.
6. Maximum brittleness temperature (ASTM D 746): Minus 35 degrees F.
7. Resistance to heat aging (ASTM D 573): Minimum properties (ASTM D 412) after
aging at 240 degrees F for 672 hours as follows:
a. Tensile strength: 1000 pounds per square inch.
b. Elongation: 150 percent.
C. Tear resistance: 125 pounds per inch.
8. Products: The following products, provided they Comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Emseal Elastomeric Flashing"; Emseal Joint Systems Ltd.
b. "Contourflash," black; Haartz-Mason, Inc.
C. "Contourflash," gray (with hypalon coating); Haartz-Mason, Inc.
d. "Wingprene," black; Versico Incorporated.
G. Foam Backing For Flexible Flashings: Closed -cell foam rubber; polyethylene, neoprene, or
similar soft, compatible material.
�.� H. Self -Adhesive Sheet Flashing - Through -wall Flashing: Rubberized asphalt sheets with
polyethylene film facing; packaged in rolls with disposable release paper.
1. Minimum total membrane thickness: 30 mils (0.03 inch) including rubberized asphalt
and film facing.
t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07600-3 900-9264
r
2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing"; W. R. Grace & Company.
b. "Polyguard 300 Membrane"; Polyguard Products, Inc.
C. "Polyguard 400 Membrane"; Polyguard Products, Inc.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant metal of same material as the material being fastened, or other
material recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish and color of exposed
fastener heads to finish and color of sheet material being fastened.
B. Installation Accessories, Flexible Flashings: Provide joint tape, adhesives, sealers, and
fasteners as recommended by flexible flashing manufacturer for indicated applications.
C. Sealant: As specified in Division 7.
1. Use noncuring type for concealed joints.
2. Use nonsag elastomeric type for exposed joints.
D. Joint Adhesive: Two -component noncorrosive epoxy adhesive, recommended by metal
manufacturer for sealing of nonmoving joints. _
E. Bituminous Coating: Heavy bodied, sulfur -fine, asphalt -based paint; FS TT-C-494.
2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Form sheet metal to match profiles indicated, substantially free from oil -canning, fish -mouths,
and other defects.
B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for applications indicated.
C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15 feet running length.
1. Flashing and trim: Provide movement joints at maximum spacing of 10 feet; no joints
allowed within 2 feet of corner or intersection.
D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible.
1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
E. Form a 1/2-inch hem on underside of exposed edges.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. `
1. Gage: As recommended by SMACNA or metal manufacturer for application, but in no ,..
case less than gage of metal being secured.
2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General: As a minimum, fabricate flashings using materials in the thickness listed for each
flashing application.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07600-4 900-9264
B. Exposed Flashings - Low Slope Roofs or Waterproofing:
1. Formed copings:
a. Prefinished galvanized steel sheet: 24 gage (0.0239 inch).
C. Concealed Wall Flashings:
1. Masonry through -wall flashing:
a. Laminated copper/kraft paper.
2. Flashings around window or door openings:
a. Self-adhesive rubberized asphalt sheet with polyethylene facing.
K
D. Vent Stack Flashing: Fabricate from 2-1/24b soft sheet lead.
t~
2.5 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
A. Fabricate from same material and finish used for adjacent exposed fleshings.
B. Form sheet metal to profile dimensions indicated, free from distortions and defects detrimental
to water -tight system.
i.
C. Provide expansion joints in gutters at spacing not to exceed 30 feet.
D. Provide removable debris screens far gutters, fabricated from 1/4 inch mesh wire cloth of same
material used for gutters or approved compatible material. Provide formed sheet metal frame
on 4 sides of each screen unit. Length of screen units not to exceed 10 feet.
E. Provide precast concrete splash blocks at downspout discharge.
F. Provide formed metal splash pans fabricated from same type of sheet metal used for
downspouts. Locate where downspout discharges onto lower roof.
G. Gutter Supports: Spikes and ferrules.
H. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
i
P I. BackVaint Concealed metal surfaces with bituminous coating to a minimum of 15 mils dry film
thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
KJFW*4:���I-W-1s0
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be installed and
verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
Conditions have been fully resolved.
1. Verify that milers, blocking, and other attachment provisions for sheet metal work are
properly looted and securely fastened to resist effects of wind and thermal stresses.
` 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Deliver the following items to entities performing work, for incorporation into their work:
-900-9264
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07600-5
r:
1. Masonry through -wall flashings: Division 4.
B. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
C. Isolate dissimilar metals by means of a heavy bituminous coating, approved paint coating,
adhered polyethylene sheet, or other means approved by the architect. "
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with sheet metal manufacturer's installation methods and recommendations
in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
B. Sealed Joints: Form minimum 1-inch hooked joints and embed flange into sealant or adhesive.
Form metal to completely conceal sealant or adhesive.
1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
2. Moving joints: When ambient temperature is moderate (40-70 degrees F) at time of
installation, set joined members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting
position of joined members proportionally for temperatures above 70 degrees F. Do not
install sealant at temperatures below 40 degrees F. Refer to section on sealants
elsewhere in Division 7 for handling and installation requirements for joint sealers.
C. Flexible Flashing Installation:
1. Comply with flashing manufacturer's instructions regarding surface preparation,
handling, use of adhesives, and use of fasteners.
2. Take care during and after installation to avoid puncture or rupture of flexible flashing.
3. Secure flexible flashing to vertical surfaces using adhesive or combination of adhesive
and fasteners.
4. Form continuous watertight seams between pieces of material using seam adhesive as
recommended by flashing manufacturer.
5. Do not stretch flexible flashing sheets tight between points of anchorage. At moving
joints or where drawings indicate slack or loop in flashing, form to approximate profile
indicated and adhere foam rubber filler to back of flexible flashing. Anchor edges in a
bed of sealant.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective film from prefinished sheet metal immediately after installation.
B. Repair or replace work which is damaged or defaced, as directed by the architect. —
1. Refinish marred and abraded areas of prefinished sheet using finish manufacturer's
recommended methods and materials. Replace units which, in the opinion of the
architect, cannot satisfactorily be refinished in place.
C. Protect sheet metal work as recommended by the installer so that completed work will be clean,
secured, and without damage at substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 07600
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07600-6 900-9264
f'
SECTION 07700 - ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
f
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured curbs.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 or A 527, minimum G90 coating.
B. Hot -Dip Galvanizing (fabricated products and hardware): ASTM A 123.
C. Fasteners:
1. For attachment of roof accessories to supporting structure: Hot -dip galvanized zinc
plated or cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel
2. For steel and galvanized steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel
D. Steel for Structural Supports and Reinforcements: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
E. Sealant: Single- or multi -component urethane as specified in Division 7 section on sealants.
2.2 MANUFACTURED CURBS
A. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Custom Curb, Inc.
2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
3. The Pate Company.
4. Penn Ventilator Company, Inc.
S. S & L Manufacturing Company.
6. ThyCurb Fabricating DivisionPIbybar Corporation.
7. Uni-Curb, Inc.
8. Vent Products Company, Inc.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07700-1 900-9264
i:°
B. Manufactured Curbs: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 18 gage, with seams
fully welded, ground smooth, and painted with zinc -rich primer. Engineer units to support
superimposed loads.
1. Style: Vertical sides (no cant).
2. Insulation: Provide noncombustible rigid insulation, minimum 1-1/2 inches thick,
secured to inside face of curbs.
3. Slope bottom edges to match slope of roof deck so that top is level when installed.
4. Nailers: Provide on top of curb units, fabricated from softwood lumber
preservative -treated by the pressure process in accordance with AWPB LP-2.
5. Provide units of heights indicated; where height is not indicated, provide units of
manufacturer's standard height.
6. Curbs for mechanical units: Provide minimum 20 gage galvanized steel cap over areas
not weatherproofed by mechanical units. Where unsupported cap dimension exceeds 8
inches, provide minimum 3/4 inch exterior grade plywood support or formed metal
framing capable of supporting 200 pound concentrated load at any point.
7. Vibration isolating curb units: Provide units with spring isolation dampers supporting
channel frame equipment support, acoustically isolated from curb base. Minimum
effective vibration isolation coefficient 90 percent.
8. Pipe supports: Provide formed galvanized steel (strut) channel attached to top of flashing
cap, fully threaded galvanized steel support rods, pipe roller chair of size to
accommodate piping, stainless steel top bracket (retainer), and galvanized steel nuts for
securement and adjustment.
C. Pipe Portals: Top exit type of construction similar to manufactured curbs specified above,
with split components for installation around in -place piping.
1. Pipe boots: Molded EPDM or neoprene rubber, with stainless steel geared band clamps
top and bottom; sized to fit pipe or conduit at top, portal opening at bottom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra
precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
END OF SECTION 07700
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07700-2 900-9264
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The sealing of joints indicated on schedule at the end of this section.
2. The sealing of other joints indicated on drawings.
B. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated on the schedule shall be sealed with same
sealer, whether indicated on drawings to be sealed or not.
1.2 DEFINMONS
A. Substrates:
1. M-type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The
term "masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work.
2. G-type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets.
3. A -type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics.
4. 0-type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories.
1.3 SUBMTITALS
A. Product data.
B. Samples for Color Selection. (Products exposed to view only.)
C. Certified Product Test Reports.
D. Manufacturers' certificates.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sealers if any of the following conditions exist:
1. Air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by sealer manufacturers.
2. Substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost.
B. Dimensional Limitations: Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than
that recommended by sealer manufacturer; notify the architect and get sealer manufacturer's
recommendations for alternative procedures.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Submit written warranty signed by contractor and installer guaranteeing to correct failures in
sealer work that occur within S years after substantial completion, without reducing or
otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract
documents. Failure is defined as failure to remain weathertight due to faulty materials or
workmanship. Correction is limited to replacement of sealers.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07900-1 900-9264
{
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. General: Provide only products which are recommended and approved by their manufacturer
for the specific use to which they are put and which comply with all requirements of the
contract documents.
1. Provide only materials which are compatible with each other and with joint substrates.
2. Colors of exposed sealers: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard
colors.
B. Mom:
Products of the manufacturers listed, provided they comply with requirements -�
of the contract documents will be among those considered acceptable.
1. Urethane sealants:
a.
Bostlk Inc.
b.
Mameco International, Inc.
C.
Pecora Corporation.
d.
Products Research & Chemical Corporation. _
e.
Sika Corporation.
f.
Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
g.
Tremao, Inc. _.
h.
W. R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Acrylic solvent -release sealants:
a.
Pecora Corporation.
b.
Koch Protective Treatments, Inc.
C.
Tremco, Inc.
3. Acrylio-latex emulsion sealant:
a.
Bostik Inc.
b.
Pecos Corporation.
C.
Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing elastomeric sealants of types indicated, '—
complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as
well as all other requirements specified.
1. Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C 920 is specified,
sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in compliance with
the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with ASTM C 719, with base
joint width measured at the time of application.
2. For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M.
3. For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G.
4. For A -type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A.
5. For 04ype substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use 0 for
the particular substrate.
B. Two -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT,
plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression.
C. Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S or M. Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 07900-2 900-9264
r D. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
E. One -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type S. Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus
movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression.
P
F. Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion: One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously
in water.
2.3 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Two -Part Urethane Paving Sealant: Pourable, chemically curing (cold -applied) complying with
FS SS-S-200:
1. Composition: Urethane, with minimum movement capability of plus or minus 12-1/2
percent.
2. Composition: Bitumen modified polymer; also complying with ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
3. Composition: Bitumen modified urethane.
2.4 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Nonsag, one -part, solvent -release -curing; complying with ASTM C 920, Type
S, Grade NS, Use NT, with the following exceptions:
1. Weight loss: 15 percent, maximum.
2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in both extension and compression, minimum.
2.5 LATEX SEALANTS
A. Acrylic -Latex Emulsion Sealant: One -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable; complying
with ASTM C 834.
2.6 SEALANT BACKERS
A. Backers - General: Nonstaining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for
specific use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which
would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practical.
A. Comply with sealer imm facwrers' installation instructions and recommendations, except where
more restrictive requirements are specified.
t
fi",
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 07900-3 900-9264
E
3.3 SCBEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS
A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant.
b. One -part nonsag urethane sealant.
C. One -part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration.
B. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Acrylic -emulsion latex sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration.
C. Exterior Joints Well Protected from Weather and Not Subject to Movement:
I . Use one of the following sealants:
a. Acrylic sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
D. Vehicular Paving Joints, Not Over 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part cold -applied urethane paving sealant.
2. Use bond breaker tape.
3. Backer: Joint filler specified elsewhere.
E. Interior Floor Joints and Pedestrian Paving Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part nonsag urethane sealant for Use T.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration.
END OF SECTION 07900
r
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 079004 900-9264
i'
I
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard steel doors and frames.
2. Assemblies for fire -rated openings.
3. Insulated doors.
r- 1.2 REFERENCES
i
A. SDI 100-1991 — Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door
�.., Institute; 1991.
r 1.3 SUBMITTALS
r A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product information indicating compliance with
f specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of specified items,
coordinated with opening schedule included in contract documents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with SDI 100.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: In compliance with NFPA 80 and labeled per ASTM E 152 by
agency acceptable to governing authorities.
f '
C. Coordination: Transmit copy of final shop drawings to wood door manufacturer to allow
prefitting of wood doors to steel frames.
y
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
i 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, -provided they comply with
"— requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Allied Steel Products, Inc.
2. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
3. Benchmark Commercial Door Products.
4. Ceco Door Products, a Division of United Dominion.
S. Copco Door Company.
6. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Inc.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08110-1 900-9264
7. Kewanee Corporation.
S. Mesker Door, Inc.
9. Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industries, Inc.
10. Premier Products.
11. Republic Builders Products Division/DFSCO.
12. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries.
13. Trussbilt, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS ^'
A. Steel Sheets, Hot -Rolled: ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, pickled and
oiled. B. Steel Sheets, Cold -Rolled: ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, matte finish
exposed, oiled. C. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 525, commercial quality, A60 zinc -iron
or G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. --
D. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 591, electrolytic zinc -mated, Class A. mill phosphatized.
E. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage.
F. Fasteners and Inserts: Units standard with manufacturer.
1. Exterior walls: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized, Class C or D.
G. Paint:
1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish
coatings specified.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Exposed Door Faces: Fabricate from cold -rolled steel
B. Frames: Fabricate from cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel.
C. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from galvanized steel.
D. Seal top and bottom edges integrally with door construction, or use minimum 16 gage steel
channels to form flush closure. --
E. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel
F. Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips -head
fasteners.
G. Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies
which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance.
1. U-value: 0.24 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F, minimum.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08110-2 900-9264
J
H.
Hardware Preparation: Comply with DHI Al15 series specifications.
F
1. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings.
t
I.
Shop Painting:
r..
1. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces.
2.4 STEEL DOORS
i
A.
General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100.
B.
Interior Doors:
r-
1. Grade II - Heavy -Duty, Model 1 - Full Flush.
C.
Exterior Doors:
1. Grade III - Extra Heavy -Duty, Model i - Full Flush.
2.5 STEEL
FRAMES
r
1
A.
General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using
concealed fasteners.
1. Minimum thickness: 16 gage interior; 14 gage exterior.
r
2. Construction: Mitered and welded corners.
�..
B.
Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout,
plaster, or other materials aught interfere with hardware operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r
1
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings.
B.
Frame Installation:
1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105.
*'
2. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum 18
gage base anchors.
3. Fire -rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80.
C.
Door Installation:
1. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100.
r--;
2. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A.
Touch Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand
smooth and spray -apply compatible primer.
�„
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08110-3 900-9264
B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors,
making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and
undamaged.
END OF SECTION 08110
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
08110-4 900-9264
SECTION 08211 - SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUBMTITALS
A. Product data.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Dimensions and location of each product specified.
2. Elevation for each distinct door configuration.
3. Construction details for each distinct product type.
4. Dimensions and location of blocking for hardware.
S. Factory finishing details.
C. Samples:
1. Door construction: Show faces, edges, and core; minimum size 6 inches by 6 inches.
2. Factory finishes:
a. Verification samples: Minimum 8-inch-square sample for each color, effect, and
type of factory finish.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Flush Doors: Comply with the following, hereinafter referred to as referenced standard(s):
1. "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide Specifications and Quality
Certification Program," including Section 1300, "Architectural Flush Doors,"
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).
1.3 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty:
1. Solid core wood -faced interior doors: S years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS
A. Description:
1. Interior door, non -rated.
2. Faces: Veneers for transparent finish.
a. Species: Red Oak.
b. Cut: Plain sliced.
3. Finish: Factory -applied transparent finish.
4. Grade: Custom.
S. Construction: S ply or 7 ply.
6. Core: Particleboard, bonded to stiles and rails, sanded.
7. Wood stops, to match door fads.
f.. LlJtBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08211-1 900-9264
i
B. Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
b. Buell Door Company.
C. Benton Doors, Inc.
d. Eggers Industries.
e. Fenestra Corporation.
f. G1enMar Door Manufacturing Company. --
g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation.
h. Haley Brothers, Inc.
i. Ipik Door Company, Inc.
j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
k. Vancouver Door, Inc.
1. VT Industries, Inc.
In. Weyerhaeuser Company.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as indicated.
1. Hinge and lock edges: Provide standard (1/8-inch in 2 inches) bevel at edges, unless
standard bevel would not precisely match hardware bevel; provide proper bevel for
hardware.
2. Prefitting: Fabricate and trim the following types of doors to size at factory to
coordinate with frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish
schedule:
a. Prefinished doors.
B. Openings: Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Transparent Finish:
1. Type: AWI System TR-2 - Catalyzed Lacquer. —
2. Staining: Color to be selected by architect from manufacturer's full color range.
3. Grain effect: Open.
4. Sheen: Satin (low luster).
S. Grade: Custom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of
referenced standard.
B. Fitting of Doors:
1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08211-2 900-9264
C. Clearances:
1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/9 inch.
2. Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch.
3. Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 114 inch.
4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where
threshold is not indicated): 1/9 inch.
S. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch.
D. Factory -Finished Doors: Before installing doors, restore finish at door edges cut during field
fitting.
END OF SECTION 08211
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08211-3
900-9264
t
17
SECTION 08364 - STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel sectional overhead doors.
2. Locations for sectional overhead doors are indicated on the drawings and schedules.
B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section:
L Anchors installed in masonry for support of overhead door units.
2. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and manufacturer's instructions for anchor
installation to trades executing the work.
C. Related Sections:
1. Installation of anchors in concrete: Division 3.
2. Installation of anchors in masonry: Division 4.
3. Cylinder locks for overhead sectional doors: Elsewhere in Division 8.
4. Door schedule: Elsewhere in Division 8.
S. Electric service characteristics for motor operators: Division 16.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993.
B. ASTM A 525-93 — Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993.
C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 — Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
It
by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990.
D. ASTM E 330-90 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990.
E. NAGDM 102-1988 — Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; National Association
of Garage Door Manufacturers; 1988.
F. NEMA ICS 6-1993 — Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems; National Electrical
r Manufacturers Association; 1993.
G. NEMA MG 1-1993 — Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
1993.
H. UL 325 — Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 1986 (Revised 1988).
r
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08364-1 900-9264
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Sectional overhead doors standard: Comply with NAGDM 102.
2. Wind loading: Sectional overhead doors shall comply with NAGDM 102 wind loading
criteria unless otherwise indicated.
a. Design and construct sectional overhead doors to withstand indicated wind loads
as tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation directions demonstrate that
products comply with contract documents.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings only for components which are not described completely in
manufacturer's technical information.
C. Samples, for color selection:
1. Manufacturer's full range of metal finish colors on 4- by 6-inch base metal sample.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: For information only, manufacturer's written certification, indicating doors
comply with specified design criteria for the following:
a. General requirements of NAGDM 102.
b Wind loading.
C. Thermal performance.
2. Manufacturer's directions: Submit directions for installation and operation of door units;
distribute a copy to installer before start of work.
3. Installer qualification: For information only, submit installer's written statement of
compliance with installation experience requirement.
E. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Door operation instructions and maintenance data for
each door type.
F. Warranty: For information only, submit specimen copy of manufacturer's written warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire project.
B. Qualifications:
1. Installer qualifications: Door manufacturer's authorized installer.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Automatic reversing: Doors with motor operators shall comply with requirements of UL
325.
D. Certifications:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08364-2 900-9264
E
1. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with wind resistance design criteria.
2. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with thermal performance design criteria.
3. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with NAGDM 102.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule the building in of masonry anchors for support of overhead sectional doors with
masonry work.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year limited product
warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in
product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting
any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors:
r-, I. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
I contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Overhead Door Corporation.
-' b. Raynor Garage Door Company.
C. Wayne -Dalton Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel
1. Structural quality carbon steel, ASTM A 446, Class A, or commercial quality steel
sheets, ASTM A 526; minimum yield point, 33,000 pounds per square inch; gage as
indicated.
2. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525; minimum G90 zinc coating where indicated.
B. Paint:
1. Metal primer: Manufacturer's standard epoxy primer.
" 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
i A. Steel Sectional Overhead Door:
1. Wind resistance:
a. Load acting inward: 24 pounds per square foot of door surface area.
b. Load acting outward: 20 pounds per square foot of door surface area.
2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam.
a. Thermal resistance, R-value: 12
I
3. Interior surface: Painted galvanized steel.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08364-3 900-9264
4. Door section material: 20 gage galvanized steel.
S. Galvanized coating: G90, minimum.
6. Door section design: Ribbed profile.
7. Door finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on epoxy primer with polyester finish
coating.
a. Color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
colors.
8. Counterbalancing mechanism: Torsion spring type.
9. Rollers: Case-hardened steel double rollers.
10. Installation: High lift vertical and follow roof slope tracks.
11. Electric operator: Hoist type with worm and gear reduction primary drive.
a. Provide auxiliary manual chain hoist.
b. Installation: Side -mounted.
C. Electric motor: Totally enclosed nonventilated type.
1. Horsepower rating: 3/4 horsepower minimum, or as required to move the
door to the fully open position in 13 seconds or less. This requirement will
be tested and must conform.
2. Control enclosure: NEMA Type 1.
d. Control station: 3-button push-button type.
1. Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each
door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a
unique frequency.
e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch.
12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass.
13. Accessories:
a. Head and jamb weatherstripping.
b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door.
14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Tracks:
1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to
accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction.
2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support of roller guides, for
door type and size.
3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on
center.
4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld
or bolt to track supports.
B. Track Support:
1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight
of door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation.
2. Wall support: Provide continuous angle anchored to wall and welded to track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced
laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 083644 900-9264
r
EN
C. Counterbalancing Mechanisms:
1. Torsion spring:
a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular steel
shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft.
b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable
attached to door, heavy duty, high performance.
P
C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at
midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third
points to support shafts over 16 feet long.
d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door
rollers at each track.
r- C. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track.
D. Electric Door Operators:
1. Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction
mechanism and control devices.
2. Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain
operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use.
3. Door operator type:
a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary
chain hoist.
4. Electric motors:
a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload;
with capacity to move door at rate of 213 foot to 1 foot per second.
b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1;
controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with NEMA ICS 6.
5. Control station:
a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with
NEMA ICS 6.
E. Automatic Reversing Control:
i I. Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber
astragal located along full width of door bottom.
r- 2. Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated.
F. Weather Seals:
�- 1. Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and
jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation.
G. Vision Panels:
1. Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated,
located where shown on the drawings.
2. Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing
gasket..
3. Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material.
r-
x>
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08364 5 900-9264
r
I
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware:
1. Heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with noncorrosive
fasteners, as required for door type.
2. Hinges:
a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by
manufacturer for size of overhead door.
b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts, �-
or rivets where access to nuts is not available.
C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet
In width. _
3. Rollers:
a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections
from door surface as required to suit slope of track.
b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges.
C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch
diameter tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer
for required door size.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Steel Door Sections:
1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches
deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings.
2. Section end closures and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end
closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum
along interior surface of section.
3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile.
4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary
to comply with wind loading performance criteria.
B. Insulation:
1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation. —
2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet.
C. Factory Finishing:
1. Steel door sections:
a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and apply zinc phosphate conversion coat.
b. Factory paint system: Apply prime and finish coats to interior and exterior
surfaces of door faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION _
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit
proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation. `
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08364{ 900-9264
i
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center.
C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or
channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust
installation to provide smooth and quiet operation.
B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from
damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly.
END OF SECTION 08364
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08364-7
900-9264
SECTION 08415 - ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum door frames.
2. Aluminum framing system.
B. Related Sections:
1. Joint sealants: Division 7.
2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8.
3. Aluminum windows: Elsewhere in Division 8.
1.2 REFERENCES
�., A. AAMA 605.2-92 — Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 1992.
B. AAMA 1503.1-88 — Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation
r
Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural
r-
Manufacturers Association; 1988.
C. ASCE 7-95 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society
of Civil Engineers; 1995.
D. ASTM A 123-89a — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 1989.
E. ASTM B 209-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate;
1993.
F. ASTM B 221-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993.
G. ASTM C 864-93 — Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993.
H. ASTM E 283-91 — Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen, 1991.
I. ASTM E 330-90 — Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990.
J. ASTM E 331-93 — Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1993.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08415-1 900-9264
1-°
i
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below.
B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air
temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re -radiation.
C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and
without deflection greater than 1/175 of span.
1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge
clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that
which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension.
2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent
deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span.
D. Wind Loads: Determine in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7.
E. Air Infiltration:
1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area.
a. Measure at 6.24 psf.
F. Water Penetration:
1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psf.
G. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value):
1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.65.
2. Door frames: Not more than 0.93.
H. Color: Must match storefront system colors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and
installation recommendations.
B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance
Requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement,
anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing.
D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data.
E. Warranty on Fabricated Products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08415-2 900-9264
B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per
r- unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated.
C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential
indicated.
D. Standard for Thermal Transmission Testing: AAMA 1503.1; report result as U-value (Btu per
hour per square foot per degree F).
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication.
1.7 WARRANTY
F, A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which
occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting
�- any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified
performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal
weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement.
a
2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1 A. Packaged Entrances:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Arch Amarlite.
b. CMI Archtectural Products, Inc.
C. Kawneer Company, Inc.
r— d. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
C. United States Aluminum Corporation.
f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company.
r g. Besam, Inc.
h. Dor-O-Matic Division/Republic Industries, Inc.
i. Gyro Tech Inc.
�-- j. Horton Automaticsta division of the Overhead Door Corp.
k. Keane Monroe Corporation.
1. Stanley Magic Door, Division of The Stanley Works.
B. Aluminum Framing Systems:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
r a. Arch Amarlite.
b. CM1 Architectural Products, Inc.
C. Kawneer Company, Inc.
r" d. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
0
E
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08415-3 900-9264
C. United States Aluminum Corporation.
f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum.
1. Style: Flush glazed (without projecting stops), with glazing centered in frame members;
see drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members.
2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the
architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance.
3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance
material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members.
Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years.
4. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing
without disassembly of framing.
5. Finish:
a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat.
1. Color and sheen: As selected by the architect from standard products of
coating manufacturer.
B. Aluminum Door Frames: Extruded tube or channel frames with either mechanical or welded
joints.
1. Finish:
a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat.
1. Color and sheen: As selected by the architect from standard products of
coating manufacturer.
2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASIM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and
temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance,
and for the finish required.
B. Fluoropolymer Finish: Multiple coats of thermally cured primer and topcoats, resin minimum
70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X
(inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical coating; organic
coating).
1. Clean with inhibited chemicals and. conversion -coat with acid chromate -fluoride -
phosphate treatment, in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions.
2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Fluoroceram"; Morton International.
b. "Fluropon"; The Valspar Corporation.
C. "Nubelar" or "Nubelar S"; Lilly Industries, Inc.
d. "Trinar"; Akzo Coatings, Inc.
e. "Duranar"; PPG Industries, Inca
C. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other
noncorrosive, noncorrodible material.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08415-4 900-9264
r^
f
D. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded
r.. aluminum, 0.032 inch minimum.
E. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High -strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless
r, steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which
are not exposed to weather or abrasion.
F. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with
r ASTM A 123.
G. Dissinular Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive
material.
H. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with AS'TM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer.
I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional
variation allowed.
` B. Framing System: Pre-cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop.
1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship.
C. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind
exposed welds flush; match original finish.
D. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and
to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation.'
r-
E. Avoid damage to finishes.
�-- PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely
anchor.
C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are
in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc,
r cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other.
I
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08415-5 900-9264
D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of
the materials specified.
E. Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide
weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint
sealers.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to
finishes.
END OF SECTION 08415
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08415-6 900-9264
t
f^
k
SECTION 09520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Applications:
a. Individual window units.
b. Projected windows.
2. Other work included:
a. Sealants around perimeters of windows.
B. Related Sections:
1. Glazing: Elsewhere in Division S.
2. Sealants: Division 7.
3. Aluminum storefronts: Elsewhere in Division 8.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF45 — Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B. AAMA 101-93 — Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Prime Windows and Glass Doors; 1993.
A
C. AAMA 605.2-92 — Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers
r Association; 1992.
D. AAMA 803.3-92 — Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Narrow Joint Seam Sealer;
�- American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992.
c
E. AAMA 904.1-87 — Voluntary Specification for Friction Hinges in Window Applications;
�- American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1987.
F. ASTM A 123-89a — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products. 1989.
G. ASTM B 633-85 — Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 1985.
H. ASTM B 766-86 — Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium; 1986.
I. ASTM E 405-89 - Standard Test Methods for Wear Testing Rotary Operators for Windows;
1989.
k J. FS L S-125B — Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; 1972 (Notice 1, 1987).
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08520-1 900-9264
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or
deterioration. Failure includes the following:
1. Exterior assemblies: _
a. Excessive deflection.
b. Excessive water leakage.
C. Excessive air infiltration.
d. Failure of perimeter sealant.
e. Failure of glazing.
B. Performance Requirements: As specified in AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and class
indicated.
C. Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction.
D. Color must match aluminum windows.
1.4 SUBMTITALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing,
hardware, and accessories, and installation and handling recommendations.
B. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with requirements of contract documents.
C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following:
1. Elevations.
2. Cross -sections of all typical members.
3. Anchors.
4. Hardware.
5. Operators.
6. Accessories.
7. Glazing methods.
8. Sealants.
D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data.
E. Samples of Hardware Items.
F. Warranty. -�
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide windows bearing AAMA Certification labels showing compliance with testing
specified.
B. Test Methods General:
1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration test shall precede water resistance
test. _
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08520-2 900-9264 _
r
4
r
k
2. Concentrated load tests may, be performed on separate ventilators/sash of identical size
�.., and design as used for air, water, and uniform load tests.
3. Test each size of each type of window.
C. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully
assembled, and glazed.
1. Minimum size: As specified in AAMA 101.
D. Air, Water, and Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101.
E. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to fabrication.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the contractor, installer, and manufacturer,
guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 5 years after substantial
completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owner
may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship,
failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess
of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOWS - GENERAL
A. Windows - General: Frame and ventilator/sash members of extruded aluminum, complete with
all hardware, accessories, sub -frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or
required; complying with AAMA 101.
1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members.
B. Window Design:
1. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior.
2. Where insulating glass or laminated glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate
water standing in glazing channels.
3. Provide weatherstripping on all operable ventilator/sash in exterior wall.
C. Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and
compatibility with other materials.
D. Weatherstripping: Continuous weatherstripping at all points where frame of operable
ventilator/sash or ventilator contacts frame of window.
1. Use compression gaskets where other types are not indicated.
E. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame and ventilator/sash members with concealed,
r, structural, load4maring, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members
r'
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08520-3 900-9264
s
from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use at least
3 years. Do not bridge thermal gap with any fasteners or hardware.
2.2 PROJECTED WINDOWS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Acorn Window Systems, Inc.
b. Alenco Division/Redman Building Products, Inc.
C. EFCO Corporation.
d. Graham Architectural Products Corporation.
e. Modu-Line Windows, Inc.
f. TRACO.
g. Wino Wmdow Company.
h. Windows, Inc. ("DeSCo").
i. Kawneer, Inc.
B. Projected Windows:
1. Style: As indicated on drawings.
a. Top- and bottom -hinged.
b. In -swinging and out -swinging.
C. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the architect's
judgment, such differences do not detract from design concept or intended
performance.
2. Glazing method: Channel gasket.
3. Grade: P-HC40.
4. Hardware:
a. Operator: Rotary type.
1. Provide at out swinging windows.
b. Hinges: Two 4-bar hinges.
C. Locks: Lever handle, cam type.
5. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating.
6. Insect screens.
a. Provide at project -in ventilators.
b. Provide at project -out ventilators.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing
corrosion resistance, and as required for strength.
1. Minimum wall thickness of any member: 3116 inch. inch.
2. Fluoropolymer coating: Multiple coats of thermally cured fluoropolymer primer and top
coats, resin minimum 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA
605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid
chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical conversion coating; organic coating). Provide the
number and type of coats as recommended by coating manufacturer for color and sheen
required.
3. Colors: Where not indicated, colors are to be selected by the architect from
manufacturer's standard range.
08520-4 LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 900-9264
B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware.
�.. 1. Hardware fasteners: Match finish of members to which they are fastened.
2. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors.
3. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion -resistant material that is compatible with
materials being fastened.
C. Concealed Anchors (one of the following):
1. Steel, cadmium plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 766, Class 8.
2. Steel, zinc electroplated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 633.
x 3. Steel, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
4. Stainless steel.
D. Glass: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. See window elevations for glass
types used.
E. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials.
1. For nonworking, metal -to -metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant
conforming to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800.
2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application.
3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide products
specified in Division 7.
4. For glazing: Provide products specified elsewhere.
F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive
coating.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Corrosion -resistant material
B. Hinges:
1. For use without operators: Friction type; complying with AAMA 904.1; adjustable
friction pivots/slides; nylon or other nonabrasive material.
7 2. For use with operators: Nonfriction type.
3. 4- and 6-bar hinges: Concealed.
C. Rotary Operators: Gear -type; complying with ASTM E 405, after 500 cycles with operating
force of 120 pounds -force -inches, and after 7500 cycles with operating moment of 80
pounds -force -inches and closing torque of 60 pounds -force -inches.
D. Locks: Complete with strikes and fasteners.
1. Lever handle: Cam action sweep type.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
r., A. Insect Screens: Formed or extruded aluminum frames with screen fabric.
1. Design to fit tightly, but be removable, using as few exposed fasteners or latches as
possible.
r
k
r—
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08520-5 - 900-9264
2. Do not use wickets for access to window -operating hardware, unless absolutely
necessary; make wickets hinged or sliding, with the same type of frames as screens, and
tight -fitting.
3. Frame construction: Minimum wall thickness of 0.040-inch, with joints mitered or
coped and fastened with concealed fasteners.
4. Anchor screen fabric with removable plastic or rubber splines.
5. Finish: To match window.
6. Screen fabric: Glass fiber mesh; complying with FS L-S-125.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION —
A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions
exist. —
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square. _
C. Support properly and securely anchor.
D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage
cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas
of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals.
E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of
the materials specified.
F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated.
G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated. —
H. Coordinate with wall -flashing installation.
I. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING
A. Install as specified elsewhere in Division 8.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable ventilators/sash and hardware to operate smoothly and close tightly. —
END OF SECTION 08520
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08520-6 900-9264
1,
SECTION 08710
HARDWARE
PART1
GENERAL
`
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
All finish hardware necessary for completion of project.
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
B.
Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors
(�
C.
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same.
D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders
a
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
r
I
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications
1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
�..
e
experience.
G
B.
Regulatory Requirements
,.,
1. Fire Door Hardware
a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or
specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label.
r,
b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type
-
required by NFPA.
1.5
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges.
ff
B.
ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
C.
ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices.
"
f
D.
ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers.
r-
6
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-1 900-9264
r
_
E. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products.
F. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. —
G. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions.
H. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders.
I. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. —
J. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes.
K. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds —
L. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. —
M. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers.
N. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices.
O. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
P. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
Q. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature.
R. DRI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
S. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards
T. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
U. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. —
V. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.
W. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide product data on specified hardware. —
2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions.
3. Submit operation and maintenance data including data on operating hardware, lubrication
requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. _
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-2 900-9264
B. Hardware Schedule
1. Include for each item: quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail
information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and
hardware set identification cross-referenced to drawings; lock trim material thicknesses;
lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI or BHMA standard type
r number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI or
BHMA; and list of abbreviations.
2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
r` 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors.
4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and
associated hardware set.
C. Keying Schedule
1. Develop in accordance with DHI-03 and Owners requirements.
2. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project.
3. Master key all doors to one key.
D. Certificates of Compliance
1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR
and ANSI or BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that
proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are
indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e.
active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates.
E. Spare Parts Data
1. Not later than 1 month prior to date of substantial completion, furnish spare parts data for
locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer
holder release devices.
2. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of supply.
F. Maintenance Instructions
1. Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance
procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting,, guides.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
r
r B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton
or container, and properly mark or label to be 'readily identifiable with approved hardware
., schedule.
C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-3 900A264
r
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between
hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement
required, size of holes, and similar details.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. —
PART 2 PRODUCTS --
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hinges
1. Hager Hinge Co.
2. McKinney. _
3. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works.
B. Lock and Latches _
1. Best Lock Corporation.
2. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries.
3. Sargent Division, Emhart Hardware Group.
4. Schlage Lock Company. _
C. Push/Pulls
1. H.B. Sues, a Harrow Company. —
2. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
3. Trego Industries, Inc.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
D. Exit Devices
1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. —
2. Norton Industries, Inc.
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
4. Von Duprin, Inc. —
E. Closers
1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries. —
2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.
3. Norton Door Controls, Scovill Security Products.
4. Sargent Manufacturing Company. _
F. Overhead Holders
1. Glynn -Johnson. _
2. Door Components International.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 087104 : _ � a ! _ 900-9264
9
r
G. Manual Botts
1. Door Components International.
2. Glynn Johnson.
3. H.B. Ives, Barrow Co.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
H. Gasketing/Threshholds
1. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
2. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
3. Zero International, Inc.
I. Protection Plates
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW).
2. Trego Industries, Inc.
3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
J. Door Stops/Bumpers
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW).
2. Trego Industries, Inc.
3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
K. Door Silencers
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW).
2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
L. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hinges
1. General
a. Conformance: ANSI A156.1 and ANSI 156.7 on metal doors and frames.
b. Size: Except as otherwise specified, conform to hinge manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
c. Provide non -removable pins on hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks. Make
non -removable by means such as a set screw in the barrel, or safety stud, when the
door is in closed position.
B. Locks and Latches
1. General
a. To maximum extent possible, provide locksets and latchsets from single
manufacturer.
b. Furnish wrought strike boxes for wood frames and pairs of wood doors.
c. Design:
(1) Levers, roses, and escutcheons: 0.050 inch thick if unreinforced; 0.035 inch
thick if reinforced; combined thickness 0.070 inch. Provide levers with
radiused return to doors.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-5 900-9264 -
r
(2) Bored locksets and latchsets: Conform to ANSI A156.5.
(3) Lock Cylinders: Removable type, six pin, conforming to ANSI A156.6.
d. Provide all locks with core removal not requiring disassembly of knob or lockset. -
e. Series: 4000, conforming to ANSI A156.2, Grade 1.
f. Strikes: conform to ANSI A115.2.
g. Provide adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to door shape for doors 1-3/8 t--
inches thick and over.
h. Furnish strike boxes with latch strikes for Grade 1.
i. Install cylinders with cams that will freely operate all functions of the locksets _
specified.
j. Fit cylinders to locksets without adapters.
C. Push/Pull Plates ^
I. Combination push-pull plates: Category J300, 1/8 inch minimum stainless steel, beveled
four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches, with countersunk screw holes. —
2. Push and pull bars: Category J500, stainless steel with edges of mounting plates beveled.
3. Push plates: stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches.
D. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories
1. General
a. Conform to ANSI A156.3.
b. Trim: wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled, or
smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges.
c. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type devices.
d. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms.
e. Provide escutcheons not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inches and cut escutcheons to suit
cylinders and operating trim.
2. Removable Mullions
a. Type 22, box type furnished with mullion stabilizers of same manufacturer.
b. Use only with exit devices for which mullions were manufactured.
E. Closers
1. General
a. Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. —
b. Surface type closers: Size 1 or 2 through size 6.
c. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: size one size larger than manufacturer's
published recommendations, but not less than size 5. —
d. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published
recommendations, except as specified otherwise.
e. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jamb mount _
closers for outswinging exterior doors.
f. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall
at 90-degree open position. —
g. Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull
of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to
minimum required to relatch door. —
2. Surface Type Closers
a. Series CO2000 Full Cover with options PT-4C and PT-41).
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-6 900-9264
r
A
F. Overhead Holders
1. Conform to ANSI A156.8
G. Auxiliary Hardware
1. Conform to ANSI A156-16 for auxiliary hardware, consisting of flush bolts and door
stops.
2. Lever extension flush bolts: Type L04081.
3. Dust -proof strikes:
a. Type L04011 for non -fire rated doors.
b. Type L04021 for fire rated doors.
H. Protection Plates
1. Conformance
a. Kick plates: ANSI A156.6, category J102, stainless steel.
2. Fabrication: Bevel all edges, with countersunk screw holes.
3. Size
a. 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of
doors and height as follows:
(1) Kick Plates: 10 inches, except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, extend
to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead.
4. Automatic Door Bottoms
a. Surface type with aluminum housing cover, anodized clear finish.
b. Provide with rubber, vinyl, or neoprene seal.
c. Fabricate for actuation by opening and closing of door.
5. Metal Thresholds
a. Conformance: ANSI A156.21
b. Exterior doors: Extruded aluminum type as scheduled.
c. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolt exit
devices.
d. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated,
beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch.
Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch.
6. Rain Drips
a. Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.07 inch thick, clear anodized.
b. Door sill rain drips: 1-1/2 inches to 1-3/4 inches high by 5/8-inch projection.
c. Overhead rain drips: approximately 1-1/2 inches high by 2-1/2 inches projection;
extend 2 inches on door opening width.
7. Aluminum Housed Type Weatherseals
a. Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.07 inch wall thickness with vinyl,
neoprene, silicone rubber, polyurethane or vinyl brush inserts.
b. Finish: Clear anodized.
8. Smoke Gasketing
a. Compression -type seal, silicon based, self-adhesive product for use on steel door
frames with wood or steel doors for 20-minute label.
b. Color: Bronze
r I. Accessories
i
1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, required to adjust hardware items.
k
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-7 900-9264
r
I
J. Fastenings
1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware.
2. Concrete or Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields.
3. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
K. Fire Door Hardware
1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
L. Finishes
1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
2. Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows:
a. Hinges: BHMA 626 or 630
b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 or 630.
c. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 689 painted.
d. Miscellaneous hardware: BHMA 630
e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: BHMA 673
f. Thresholds: 673
3. Door Protection Plates: BHMA 630.
M. Keying _
1. Provide a master keying system.
2. Key locks in sets or subsets.
3. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved
means.
4. Supply keys in following quantities:
a. 3 keys for each lock
b. 2 master keys
c. 2 control keys and 5 extra cylinder cores
5. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in sets or subsets as scheduled.
6. Provide a key cabinet conforming to BMHA.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for
Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Install in accordance with DHI-02.
3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-8 900-9264
I
4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with
thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts.
5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped.
B. Door -Closing Device
1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by
manufacturer.
2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from
halls and corridors.
C. Key Control Storage System
1. Install where directed by Architect.
D. Kick Plates
1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors.
E. Auxiliary Hardware
1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt
F. Thresholds
1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields.
2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping.
3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions.
G. Weatherseals
1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal
screws after door and frames have been finish painted.
2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position.
3. Provide astragal seals at pairs of doors.
4. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Gasketing
1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame.
I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors
1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 90 AND NFPA 105. .
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 .08710-9 900-9264
r
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Door no's. 01 and 05
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A5112 NRP
1 ea.
E0231 x lever
1 ea.
Cylinder E09211
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
1 ea.
Pull J401
1 ea.
Stop L02131
1 ea.
Threshold J36170
Door no's: OIA and 04
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8112
1 ea.
Pull J401
1 ea.
Push Bar J501
1 ea.
Stop L02101
1 ea.
Kickplate
3 ea.
Silencers
SET #1
SET #2
SET #3
Door no's. 04A, 04B, 06, 14 and 25
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr. Hinges ASIII
1 ea. Panic Device Type 01, Function 08 with lever, less cylinder.
1 ea. Closer CO2021
1 ea. Stop L02101
1 ea. Kickplate
1 set Smokeseals
1 ea. Automatic Door Bottom
3 ea. Silencers
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09710-10 900-9264
l SET #4
Door no's. 07 and 17
Each door to have:
r 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112
1 ea. Closer CO2021 at door No .07, CO2011 at door no. 17.
1 ea. Privacy Set, F77
1 ea. Stop L02251
1 ea. Kickplate Plate
3 ea. Silencers
SET #5
Door no's. 02, 08, 11, 18, 19, 26, 27 and 28
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8112
1 ea. Lockset F81
1 ea. Closer CO2011; CO2021 at door no's. 08, 18, 19 and 28
l 1 ea. Stop IM251
t 1 ea. Kickplate Plate
3 ea. Silencers
SET #6
Door no's. 09 and 15
f Each pair to have:
3 pr. Hinges A8111 NRP
1 ea. Lockset F86
1 pr. Flushbolts L04081
2 ea. Overhead Holders C08511
2 ea. Kickplates
2 ea. Stops L02131
1 ea. Head and Sill Raindrip
1 ea. Threshold J32100
1 set Weatherstrip
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-11
C"
l
900-9264
SET V
Door no's. 10 and 13
Each pair
to have:
3 pr.
Hinges A8112
2 ea.
Panic Devices Type 01, Function 08 with lever
1 ea.
Removable Mullion Type 22
2 ea.
Closers CO2021
2 ea.
Kickplate Plates
2 ea.
Silencers
1 set
Weatherstripping
2 ea.
Automatic Door Bottom
SET #8
Door no's. 12B and 14A
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8111 NRP
1 ea.
Lockset F81
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
1 ea.
Kickplate
1 ea.
Head and Sill Raindrip
1 ea.
Stop L02131
1 ea.
Threshold J36190 with Vinyl Bubble
1 set
Weatherstrip
SET #9
Door no. 23
Each door to have:
1 112 pr.
Hinges A8111
1 ea.
Push Plate
1 ea.
Pull J401 and plate
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
1 ea.
Kickplate
3 ea.
Silencers
1 ea.
Stop L02101
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08710-12 900-9264
SET #10
L ;
Door no's. 12 and 12A
All hardware by door supplier.
SET #11
Have:
Each Cabinet Door to
1 pr. Hinges AS112
1 ea. Pull
CSET
#12
Each Cabinet Drawer to Have:
'
1 ea. Pull
END OF SECTION
l
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
08710-13 900-9264
i
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Portland cement plaster.
2.
Metal framing.
3.
Metal furring.
4.
Metal lath.
5.
Trim and accessories.
1.2 SUBMFITALS
A. Product data.
B. Samples:
1. Plaster finish: Submit 12-inch-square samples of each required plaster finish, mounted
on plywood or hardboard.
2. Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch-long samples of each type: of trim and accessory
which will be exposed in the finish work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing Components:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Dale/Incor.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
C. Marino Industries Corporation.
d. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG).
2.2 FRAMING TO RECEIVE METAL LATH
A. General: Size framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ML/SFA
"Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," unless specifically indicated otherwise.
As an optional method of framing soffits, the contractor may use Metal "C" Studs as shown in
the details, see "Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. If soffit framing is greater than
12" o.c., then soffit sheathing must be used.
r' B. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, with rust -inhibitive finish.
1. Main runner channels: 1-1/2-inch cold rolled channels; 0.475 pound per foot.
2. Crass -furring: 314-inch cold rolled channel; 0.3 pound per foot.
E C. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 8 gage wire.
r" 2. Tie wire: Minimum 18 gage wire.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09220-1 900-9264
r
D. Furring Channels: ASTM C 754 channels, galvanized ' per ASTM A 525, G60 coating
designation.
1. Channel size: Except as otherwise indicated, 3/4-inch cold -rolled channels; 0.3 pound per foot.
2.3 METAL LATH
A. General: Comply with ML/SFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Iathing and Furring" for type
and style of metal lath to suit application and support spacing. —
B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847.
1. Diamond mesh lath: 2.5 pounds per square yard nominal weight. .�
a. Galvanized.
b. Provide paper backing.
C. Paper Backing: Where paper backing is indicated, provide the following material, factory —
bonded to back of lath, complying with FS UU-B-790 for Type I, grade and style as indicated
below: _
1. Vapor -retardant paper: Grade B, Style IA.
2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Base Coat Materials:
1. Masonry cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
2. Aggregate: Manufactured or natural sand, ASTM C 897.
B. Finish Coat Materials: Same as base coat materials.
2.5 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Trim: Fabricate from ASTM A 446 or ASTM A 527 galvanized steel, with Class G90 —
zinc coating.
1. Corner bead: 1/8-inch-diameter bead with expanded flanges.
2. Bull nose corner bead: 3/4-inch-radius, 7/8-inch-wide (chord length) bead with
expanded flanges.
3. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster
thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange. --
4. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return; leg to match plaster
thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange with nominal 2-inch expanded -
extension. _
5. Control joint: M-shaped, with diamond mesh expanded flanges.
6. Flanged control joint: M-shaped, with flattened beads, removable tape to keep plaster
out of groove, and with diamond mesh expanded flanges.
B. Metal Lath Accessories:
1. Comerite: Diamond mesh expanded metal; brake -formed to 100 degree angle with
2-inch-wide flanges.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09220-2 900-9264
I
` 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by plaster
manufacturer.
2.7 PLASTER MIXES
A. Portland Cement Plaster: Comply with ASTM C 926 for type of substrate and for compatibility
between coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING
A. General: Comply with requirements of MIJSFA 'Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and
Furring," except where exceeded by other requirements, for framing to receive metal lath. See
paragraph 2.2.A for contractor option at soffits.
B. Ceiling Suspension: Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength
of hanger can be achieved.
1. Install ceiling framing components supporting plaster on metal lath at spacings not to
exceed those permitted by MUSFA specifications, and not to exceed the following:
a. Hangers: 36 inches on center.
b. Main runners: 48 inches on center.
C. Cross furring: 12 inches on center.
2. Reinforce openings and interruptions in horizontal framing system with additional furring
channels. Ensure that entire suspension system is laterally braced.
3. Install additional bracing at exterior soffits as indicated, or as required to resist wind
uplift.
C. Furring: Install furring members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
referenced framing standard.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATHING
A. Installation Standard: Install lathing in accordance with AST'M C 1063.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards for provision and location of plaster
trim and accessories.
3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 926.
B. Apply plaster in thickness indicated by referenced application standard for 2-coat work.
r C. Curing: Comply with Ampex A2 of ASTM C 926 for curing of each coat and for time between
coats of portland cement plaster.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09220-3 900-9264
D. Apply and work finish coat to produce uniform texture and color.
1. Finish texture: Float (sand) finish.
END OF SECTION 09220
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
L
SECTION 08800 -GLAZING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Monolithic glass.
2.
Insulating glass.
3.
Mirror glass.
4.
Glazing accessories.
B. Types of work in this section include work for:
1.
Exterior windows.
2.
Interior windows.
3.
Exterior storefront.
4.
Aluminum entrances.
S.
Exterior doors.
6.
Mirrors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without
failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration.
1. Design to withstand wind loading as specified by applicable code for parts/portions of
buildings.
a. Statistical probability of breakage: 8 per 1000, maximum, at 60-second wind
load.
B. Deterioration includes:
1. For insulating glass:
a. Moisture or dirt between panes.
b. Development of condensation between panes.
C. Damage to internal coating, if any.
d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure.
2. For coated glass: Development of visible defects in coating.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
r• A. Product Data.
'r B. Samples of Glass.
C. Certification by contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass thickness and
heat treatment have been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural
Pak performance requirements.
r
D. Insulating Unit Warranty.
E. Weathertight Warranty.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08800-1 900-9264
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Insulating Glass: Fabricator's standard warranty for 5 years.
1. Weathertight warranty: 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCT'S
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be
considered for substitution.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Insulating glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply
with
nquiremnents of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: -
a.
AFG Industries, Inc.
b.
Cardinal IG Company.
C.
Falconer -Lewistown, Inc. .--
d.
Guardian Industries Corporation.
e.
HGP Industries, Inc. —
f.
Inde-Pane, Inc.
g.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
h.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i.
Viracon, Inc.
2. Reflective glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a.
Cardinal IG Company.
b.
Ford Glass Division/Ford Motor Company.
C.
Guardian Industries Corporation.
d.
HGP Industries, Inc.
C.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company.
f.
Saint Gobain.
g.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
h.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i.
Viracon, Inc.
3. Spandrel glass, ceramic coated: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they
comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a.
Guardian - Jamestown.
b.
HGP Industries, Inc.
C.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
d.
Viracon, Inc.
4. Laminated glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a.
Falconer -Lewistown, Inc.
b.
Globe Amerada Glass Company.
C.
Guardian Industries Corporation.
d.
Tempglass DivisionlIndal Ltd.
e.
Viracon, Inc. �-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-2 900-9264
l
r
2.2 GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated.
1. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), minimum.
2. Interior glass thickness: 6 tun (1/4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide
strength necessary to resist specified loads.
a. Exception: Safety glazing requirements supersede this strength requirement.
4. Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering.
5. Cut or drill holes in laminated units.
6. Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by manufacturer.
B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units.
1.
Product: Opaque Insulating Spandrel Glass.
2.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
3.
Exterior pane: Reflective coated glass.
a. Float glass.
b. Color: Clear.
1. Color: Bronze.
2. On first surface.
C. Reflectance: 33 percent day and night.
4.
Interior pane: Transparent float glass.
a. Float glass.
b. Color: Gray.
C. Opacifier on fourth surface.
5.
Light transmittance: 60 Percent day.
6.
Winter U-value: 0.10, maximum.
7.
Summer U-value:.10, maximum.
C. Glass Type I - 2 : Sealed insulating units.
1.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
2.
Exterior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Gray.
C. Coating: Pyrolytic deposition type.
1. On second surface.
3.
Interior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Gray.
C. Coating: Pyrolytic deposition type.
1. On third surface.
4.
Light transmittance: 60 Percent daylight, 75 percent solar.
5.
Shading coefficient: 0.65.
6.
Reflectance: 33 percent daylight, 28 percent solar.
7.
Winter U-value: 0.19 maximum.
8.
Summer U-value: 0.10 maximum.
D. Glass Type 1-3: Sealed insulating, non -tempered units (same as Type I-2, except not tempered).
r„LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-3 90&02, 64
f
t�
E. Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass.
1. Fire -resistance rated.
2. Product: Pattern -diamond.
F. Glass Type M - 1 : Mirror glass.
1. Two-ply laminated glass with 0.0304nch-thick interlayer.
a. Silvered on second surface. .
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Color: Clear.
4. Edge treatment: Ground.
G. Glass Type L-1: Clear laminated.
1. Two or three ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch thick interlayer.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Color: Clear.
H. Glass Type A-1: Overhead Door
1. Acrylic Insulated. _-
2. Color: Tinted gray.
3. Thickness: 518 inch minimum.
4. Per overhead door manufacturer's standard.
2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory -assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers
forming air -tight, dehydrated air space(s).
1. ASTM E 774, Class A.
2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For mirrors: Quality ql or q2.
2. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I.
3. Heat -strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I.
4. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I. r`
a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel.
C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure,
without air pockets or contaminants between plies.
1. Interlayer for all -glass units: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, specifically designed for
lamination and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual =*
properties under installed conditions.
D. Reflective Glass: Float glass, coated as indicated. --
E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type H, Class 1, Quality q8.
1. Fire -resistance rated where indicated.
F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, with minimum 44ayer coating consisting of silver, copper, and 2
heat -cured protective coats; tested in accordance with FS DD-M-411. f
1. Fabrication: Always use gloves when handling mirror glass.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 088004 900-9264 _
low
a. Fabricate in the shop; avoid mechanical and chemical damage to backing.
b. Seal edges immediately after fabrication with coating recommended by backing
coating manufacturer.
C. Wash fronts, backs, and edges with clean water immediately after fabrication.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance
characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are
compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact.
B. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or
polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type II ductile back bedding compound, as
described in AAMA 800.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and
"Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or
glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation.
C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance
� or diminish appearance.
i
3.2 GLAZING IN FRAMES
A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections:
1. Compression gaskets, both sides.
B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing.
C. Do not block weep holes.
D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement.
1. Install so they fit tightly at comers, allowing for stretch during installation.
3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION
j� A. Install mirrors in accordance with the recommendations of the mirror manufacturer and with
FGMA "Glazing Manual."
1. Do not install mirrors having any damage to backing coating.
�.. 2. Do not install until all other work in the area is complete.
3. Do not install until permanent HVAC systems are in operation.
4. Do not install in areas where airborne solvents or heavy duty cleaners are being used;
ventilate areas thoroughly after use before installing mirrors.
f 5. Do not install over recently installed plaster, masonry, concrete, or paint.
1,,, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 08800-5 900-9264
r.
6. Install with at least 3/16-inch space between back surface of mirror and substrate.
7. Mount plumb; provide shims or spacers if required.
8. Mount adjacent pieces in the same plane.
END OF SECTION 08800
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 08800-6 - 900-9264 _
r•
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
r
a
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
4
A. Section Includes:
1. Portland cement plaster.
2. Metal framing.
3. Metal furring.
4. Metal lath.
5. Trim and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Samples:
1. Plaster finish: Submit 12-inch-square samples of each required plaster finish, mounted
on plywood or hardboard.
2. Trim and accessories: Submit 124nch4ong samples of each type of trim and accessory
which will be exposed in the finish work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Framing Components:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Dale/Incor.
b. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
C. Marino Industries Corporation.
d. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG).
2.2 FRAMING TO RECEIVE METAL LATH
A. General: Size framing members and establish spacing to comply with requirements of ML/SFA
4 "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," unless specifically indicated otherwise.
r.
B. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, with rust -inhibitive finish.
1. Main runner channels: 1-1/2-inch cold rolled channels; 0.475 pound per foot.
2. Cross -furring: 3/4-inch cold rolled channel; 0.3 pound per foot.
4
( I
C. Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
1. Ceiling hangers: Minimum 8 gage wire.
2. Tie wire: Minimum 18 gage wire.
D. Furring Channels: ASTM C 754 channels, galvanized per ASTM A 525. G60 coating
r} designation.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09220-1 900-9264
1. Channel size: Except as otherwise indicated, 3/4-inch cold -rolled channels; 0.3 pound
per foot.
2.3 METAL LATH
A. General: Comply with ML/SFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring" for type
and style of metal lath to suit application and support spacing.
B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847.
1. Diamond mesh lath: 2.5 pounds per square yard nominal weight.
a. Galvanized.
b. Provide paper backing.
C. Paper Backing: Where paper backing is indicated, provide the following material, factory
bonded to back of lath, complying with FS UU-B-790 for Type I, grade and style as indicated
below:
1. Vapor -retardant paper: Grade B, Style IA.
2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Base Coat Materials:
1. Masonry cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
2. Aggregate: Manufactured or natural sand, ASTM C 897.
B. Finish Coat Materials: Same as base coat materials.
2.5 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
r
A. Metal Trim: Fabricate from ASTM A 446 or ASTM A 527 galvanized steel, with Class G90
zinc coating.
1. Corner bead: 1/8-inch-diameter bead with expanded flanges.
2. Bull nose corner bead: 3/4-inch-radius, 7/8-inch-wide (chord length) bead with
expanded flanges.
3. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster =
thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange.
4. Casing bead: J-shaped, square -edge style, with 1/4-inch return, leg to match plaster
thickness, and nominal 1-1/4-inch nailing flange with nominal 2-inch expanded
extension.
5. Control joint: M-shaped, with diamond mesh expanded flanges.
6. Flanged control joint: M-shaped, with flattened beads, removable tape to keep plaster
out of groove, and with diamond mesh expanded flanges.
B. Metal Lath Accessories:
1. Cornerite: Diamond mesh expanded metal; brake -formed to 100 degree angle with
2-inch-wide flanges.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or . recommended by plaster
manufacturer. r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09220 2 900-9264
1 2.7 PLASTER MIXES
A. Portland Cement Plaster: Comply with ASTM C 926 for type of substrate and for compatibility
between coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING
A. General: Comply with requirements of ML/SFA "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and
Furring," except where exceeded by other requirements, for framing to receive metal lath.
B. Ceiling Suspension: Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength
of hanger can be achieved.
1. Install ceiling framing components supporting plaster on metal lath at spacings not to
exceed those permitted by ML/SFA specifications, and not to exceed the following:
a. Hangers: 36 inches on center.
b. Main runners: 48 inches on center.
C. Cross -furring: 12 inches on center.
2. Reinforce openings and intetruptions in horizontal framing system with additional furring
channels. Ensure that entire suspension system is laterally braced.
3. Install additional bracing at exterior soffits as indicated, or as required to resist wind
uplift.
C. Furring: Install furring members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
referenced framing standard.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL LATHING
A. Installation Standard: Install lathing in accordance with ASTM C 1063.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
A. General: Comply with referenced installation standards for provision and location of plaster
trim and accessories.
3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 926.
B. Frames: Grout hollow metal frames and similar work occurring in plastered areas with base
coat material. Grout 6-inch length at each frame anchor unless full grouting is indicated.
1. Unless plaster terminates in a casing bead, cut away from metal before plaster sets;
groove finish coat.
C. Apply plaster in thickness indicated by referenced application standard for 2-coat work.
D. Curing: Comply with Annex A2 of ASTM C 926 for curing of each coat and for time between
coats of portland cement plaster.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09220-3 900-9264
r
E. Apply and work finish coat to produce uniform texture and color.
1. Finish texture: Float (sand) finish.
END OF SECTION 09220
r
F
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 092204 900-9264
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal support systems.
2. Acoustic insulation.
3. Gypsum wallboard.
4. Drywall finishing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Cold -formed metal framing: Division S.
2. Cementitious backer units for application of ceramic tile: Elsewhere in Division 9.
3. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 36-93 — Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1993.
B. ASTM C 475-93 — Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 1993.
C. ASTM C 645-94 — Standard Specification for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs. Runners
('hack), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board; 1994.
D. ASTM C 665-91 — Standard Specification for Mineral -Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 1991.
E. ASTM C 754-88 — Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw -Attached Gypsum; 1988.
F. ASTM C 840-94 — Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;
1994.
G. ASTM C 919-84(88) — Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 1984
(Reapproved 1988).
H. ASTM C 1002-93 — Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases; 1993.
I. ASTM E 90-90 — Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions; 1990.,
J. ASTM E 119-88 — Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials; 1988.
K. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1994.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09260-1 900-9264
L. GA 214-90 Recommended Specification: Level of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association;
1990.
M. GA-219-89 Recommendations for Installation of Steel Fire Door Frames in Steel Stud -Gypsum
Board Fire -Rated Partitions; Gypsum Association; 1989.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Sound -Rated Construction: Where indicated, provide construction built in accordance with
manufacturer's assemblies which have been laboratory -tested per ASTM E 90 for designated
STC ratings.
1. STC rating: 45.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for systems required, including installation
instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that
required on this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies
tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required.
Provide assemblies as listed in the following:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names
and manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight.
C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage
to ends and edges.
D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging,
distortion, or other mechanical damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment
of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive
attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48
hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C)
when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment
G
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09260-2 900-9264
p
materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too
rapidly.
B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate
excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from
drying too quickly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with
requirements of ASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating.
1. Nominal depths: As indicated on drawings.
C. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel, with rust -inhibitive finish.
D. Grid Suspension System: Manufactured steel direct -hung grid ceiling suspension system with
interlocking main beam and cross -furring components, complying with requirements of ASTM
C 645.
E. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
1. Furring channel ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire.
F. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel, galvanized or coated with a rust -inhibitive paint.
G. Furring Members: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating.
1. Hat -shaped except as otherwise indicated.
2. C-shaped studs, in locations indicated.
H. Furring Fasteners/Connectors: Manufacturer's recommended system for specific application
indicated, complying with ASTM C 754.
I. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
r-' requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Dale/Incor.
2. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
t 4. Marino/Ware
5. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG).
6. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt
joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board.
1. Regular, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Edges: Tapered.
r� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09260-3 9W-9264
B. Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 36 wallboard; maximum lengths available.
C. Thicknesses: As indicated on drawings for each application. -�
D. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Centex American Gypsum Company.
2. Domtar Gypsum.
3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
5. USG Corporation.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and . accessories by
manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured
for concealment in joint compound.
1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions.
Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not
specific accessories are shown on the drawings.
L
B. Exposed Trim: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard metal trim units
designed to be left exposed or semiexposed.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT
A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475
and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions.
B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape.
C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows:
1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and
for prefilling.
2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping
compound.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of
gypsum products.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I; unfaced semirigid mineral fiber mat;
thickness as required for wall construction and STC rating indicated.
C. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer for project conditions.
D. Acoustical Sealants: ASTM C 919; nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning type for concealed
locations; nonoxidizing, skinning type for exposed locations.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09260 900 9264
J .
l
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation
of work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that
spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING
A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 940 requirements that apply
to framing installation except where exceeded by other requirements.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits:
1. Secure hangers to structure or to anchorage devices so that full strength of hanger can
be achieved.
a. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension
system.
b. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Install ceiling channels at spacing indicated or required, but not greater than permitted
by ASTM C 754.
3. Secure furring members by means of screws, clips, or wire ties, as appropriate to
substrate. Space furring members as follows:
a. 16 inches on center.
4. Grid suspension system: Secure perimeter angles to walls at designated ceiling height.
Install hangers at 48 inches on center along main beams spaced at 48 inches on center;
secure cross -furring members to main beams and perimeter angles at the following
spacing:
a. 16 inches on center.
5. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, as measured both lengthwise
on each member and transversely between parallel members.
6. Level soffits to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, as measured both lengthwise on each
member and transversely between parallel members.
7. Reinforce openings and interruptions in horizontal framing system with additional furring
channels.
8. Ensure that entire suspension system is laterally braced.
C. Steel Studs:
1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and as follows:
a. Stud spacing: As indicated on drawings.
2. Door openings: Comply with GA-214; reinforce openings as required for size and
.; weight of doors, using a minimum of two side -by -side studs on each side of opening.
{
�.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09260-5 900-9264
a. At openings in fire -rated partitions, comply with requirements of governing
authorities for framing.
3. Partition heights: Extend studs to face of suspended ceiling.
4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer
for adequate support of wall -mounted items installed as work of other sections.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other
requirements.
1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints.
2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end ---
joints near center of ceiling area.
3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls.
4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards.
S. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends
adjacent to wrapped edges.
6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that
long edges at right angles to framing members in non -fire -rated construction may be left
unsupported.
7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing
members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset.
8. In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing _
members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset.
B. Isolation Joints: Where gypsum board construction intersects structural components, provide
isolation by stopping board a minimum of 114 inch from structure, for finishing by means of
exposed or semiexposed trim.
C. Sound -Rated Construction: Seal perimeter of construction with acoustical sealant, complying
with ASTM C 919. Carefully seal around penetrations and at control joints and other openings.
1. At partitions shown or where required for STC ratings indicated, install sound
attenuation blankets after gypsum board has been installed on one side.
D. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring:
1. Single -layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment.
a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum
board is attached to open end of stud flange first.
2. Double -layer application: -
a. Install base layer by means of 1-inch screws, spaced at 24 inches on center.
b. Install face layer by means of screws at least 3/8 inch longer than total thickness
of gypsum board layers, spaced at 12 inches on center.
3. For fire -rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the
tested assembly.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09260-6 900-9264
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except
for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for
concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to
substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products.
B. Corner Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its
omission at specific locations.
C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board
otherwise would be exposed.
3.6 FINISHING
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 940 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other
requirements.
1. Do not nix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by manufacturer.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish per GA-214, except
where indicated otherwise on the drawings:
1. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two
separate coasts of compound at all joints, angles, fastener beads, and accessories. Provide
smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for
compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose.
1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas
roughened by sanding process.
D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces,
leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating.
END OF SECTION 09260
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09260-7 900-9264
f
k
SECTION 09300 - TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Cementitious Backer Units
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire -Rated Construction: At locations indicated, provide fire -rated assemblies tested per ASTM
E 119 and acceptable to governing authorities for designated fire ratings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Samples - Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color selection boards of actual tile materials
including a complete selection of available tile colors and finishes for each tile type indicated.
Include samples of accessory materials requiring color selection.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish not less than 2 percent of total product installed maintenance stock
for each type, color, pattern, and size of tile product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1.
1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise.
2. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
ell, A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory -Mounted Fiat Tile:
J 1. Tile body: Porcelain.
2. Surface finish: Slip -resistant with abrasive contact.
3. Nominal facial dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch.
! 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch nominal.
S. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edge.
6. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
^' colors.
} : 7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09300-1 900-9264
b. Dal Tile Corporation.
C. Mannington Ceramic Tile.
d. Wmburn Tile Manufacturing Company.
B. Glazed Wall Tile; Flat Tile:
1. Nominal facial dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches '~
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.
3. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edges.
4. Mounting: Prefabricated back -mounted.
5. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
colors.
6. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile:
a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated; coordinated with
indicated size and coursing of adjacent tile, where applicable:
1. Corner bead.
2. Bullnose.
3. Surface bullnose.
4. Cove.
5. Base.
7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Buchtal Corporation USA.
C. Dal-Tde Corporation.
d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
e. International American Ceramics.
f. Mannington Ceramic Tile.
g. Porcelanosa USA.
h. Quamagra Tile, Inc.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. United States Ceramic Tile Company.
C. Tile Accessories: Vitreous china accessories in color and finish selected by architect after
contract award.
1. Soap holder for each shower.
2.3 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to size to provide transition between tile floor and adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503.
1. White, honed marble; Marble Institute of America Group "A."
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A108.1A.
1. Setting bed reinforcing: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches, ASTM
A 195; with W0.3 by W0.3, 0.0625 inch diameter, wire, ASTM ' A 82 except for
minimum wire size.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09300-2 900-9264
i
° B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
2.5 CEMENTTTIOUS BACKER UNITS (GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS)
A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both
faces, complying with the following requirements:
1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High -density portland cement surface coating
on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed of portland cement and expanded
ceramic aggregate; fabricated in panels 7/16-inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36, 48, 60,
64, or 72 inches long and weighing 3.2 to 3.8 psf.
2. Vinyl -Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a continuous process from
aggregated pordand cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl -coated woven glass fiber
mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured; fabricated in
o- panels 1/2-inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48, 60, and 72 inches long; and weighing
31bs psf.
B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer
of cementitious backer units.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units which
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wonder -Board; Modulars Inc.
2. Durock Tile Backer Board; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc.
2.6 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Waterproof Membrane/Adhesive: One -part trowel -applied urethane waterproofing and
tile -setting adhesive.
2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.
1. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards.
B. Chemical Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
1. Service temperature: Product recommended and certified by manufacturer to resist
anticipated ambient temperature range, but not less than 140 F degrees on a continuous
basis.
2. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards.
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Compatibility: Provide sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates for project performance conditions.
B. Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and A.
1. Color: Match the grout color in adjacent tile joints.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09300-3 900-9264
r¢
r�
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Filler for Tile: Proprietary compound designed for filling unglazed file to prevent staining.
B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for
application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic
Tile Institute.
PART 3 - EXECUTION -�
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed.
B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type
of applications indicated.
C. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions as necessary
to result in a watertight installation.
D. Stone Thresholds: Install at locations indicated, with same setting material as adjacent field tile. y
1. Install with thinset mortar where thick mortar bed would be exposed above adjacent floor
finish.
3.2 TILE APPLICATIONS
A. Interior Floor, Thick -Bed:
1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic.
2. Installation method:
a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F112.
b. Install fluid-appliedladhesive type waterproof membrane in accordance with TCA
F121.
C. Mortar bed: Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.IA.
d. Install tile with specified grout in accordance with TCA F114.
e. Bond coat: Portland cement and water mix or portland cement dust coat on plastic
bed.
3. Grout: Chemical -resistant epoxy resin. --
B. Interior Wall, Thin -Bed:
1. Tile: Glazed wall.
2. Installation method:
a. Masonry: TCA W202.
b. Bond coat: Dry -set portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. _
3. Grout: Commercial portland cement.
C. Shower Ceilings, Tiffin Bed:
1. Tile: Glazed Wall
2. Installation Method
a. Cementitious Backer Units: TCA W244
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09300 900-9264
r-
b. Bond Coat: Dry -set portland cement mortar, ANSI A 108.5.
3. Grout: Commercial portland cement
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean the surfaces after installation is complete.
1. Tile filler: Clean and dry tile before applying filler. Apply filler at rate and by method
recommended by filler manufacturer to achieve complete coverage and a uniform color
over entire tile area.
B. ' Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile
manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from
subsequent construction activities.
END OF SECTION 09300
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09300-5 900-9264
ri
r'
# SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS
i
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exposed suspension system.
2. Acoustical lay -in panels.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Metal deck hanger clips.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
r--
i
A. Product data.
B. Samples: Submit the following:
1. Selection samples:
a. Acoustical units: Minimum 6-inch-square samples of acoustical units meeting the
requirements of the specification for each type specified.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. In a timely manner, furnish to affected installers, attachment devices for incorporation into
other work.
B. Do not begin installation of ceiling system until building's normal operating temperature and
humidity levels have been reached and will be maintained.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
i
A. Extra Materials: After ceiling installation has been completed, deliver to the owner
replacement materials for materials installed. Furnish products which precisely match installed
products. Protect with appropriate packaging and provide clear, legible labels.
1. Acoustical lay -in panels: Furnish full-sized panels in quantities not less than 2 percent
�- of quantity of panels installed.
i 2. Elements of exposed suspension members: For each distinct type of exposed element,
furnish quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units conforming to applicable requirements
of ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
B. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09511-1 900-9264
i
1. Mineral fiber acoustical units:
a. Armstrong World industries, Inc. _
b. Celotex Corporation.
C. USG Corporation.
2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS - GENERAL
A. Attachment Devices for Suspension System:
1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes capable of sustaining 5 times
the load -carrying capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" column.
2. Deck inserts and hanger clips: Fabricate from hot -dip galvanized steel.
3. Hanger wire: Zinc -coated (galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper,
with Class 1 coating, minimum 12 gage (0.106 inch diameter).
B. Edge Moldings and Trim:
C. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Exposed steel suspension system:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
C. WAVE Worthington Armstrong Venture (formerly National Rolling Mills).
d. USG Corporation.
2.3 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 1
A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 20.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.35.
4. Edge profile: Square.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint.
6. Color: White.
7. Face texture/pattem: Perforated (small holes) (ASTM E 1264 Pattern c).
B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot-4 galvanized steel with special corrosion -resistant painted finish.
1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide.
2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System.
3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture.
2.4 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 2
A. Ceiling Panels: Gypsum board with sealed edges, formulated especially for ceiling application
in humid environments; 5/8 inch thick.
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Finish: Unperforated vinyl film.
3. Color: White.
B. Exposed Grid: Same as specified for the preceding lay -in acoustical ceiling system.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09511-2 900-9264 _
A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 40.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.55.
4. Finish: Perforated vinyl film.
S. Color: White.
B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel for concealed portion of grid; painted,
formed aluminum for exposed portion.
1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide.
2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System.
3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture.
PART 3 - EXECUITON
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that products furnished as work of this section, but not installed under this section, have
been properly installed by the entity performing the installation.
3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 636, manufacturer's installation instructionst
and governing regulations.
2. Install hangers plumb and supported solely by building structure or carrying channels.
Do not allow hangers to contact any objects or materials in ceiling plenum which are not
actual components of ceiling system.
a. Do not attach hangers to piping, conduit, or duct. Provide carrying channel
trapeze support where obstruction cannot be avoided by splaying hanger 45
degrees from vertical or less.
3. Level ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, with cumulative
tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch. Bending or kinking of hangers is not allowed.
3.3 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install edge moldings and trim units at acoustical ceiling borders, at locations indicated, and
where required to cover acoustical unit edges.
1. Face -riveting of trim and moldings is not allowed.
3.4 LAY -IN PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Panel Installation: Install acoustical panels for accurate fit with suspension system and trim
members. Scxtbe and cut panels at ceiling perimeter and at obstructions to provide neat, precise
fit.
,:.: LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09511=3 900-9264
1. Square -edge panel installation: Provide installation with panel edges which are hidden
from view, by suspension members or trim.
END OF SECTION 09511
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09511-4 900-9264
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
r 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient tile flooring.
2. Resilient sheet flooring.
3. Resilient base.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data from each manufacturer of resilient products required.
B. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient product
required, as follows:
1. Actual tiles.
2. Cut sections of sheet flooring, not less than six inches square.
3. Cut sections of resilient flooring accessories, not less than six inches in length.
4. Other materials requested by architect.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: At least 48 hours prior to beginning work, move resilient
flooring materials to areas of installation and maintain at minimum 70 degrees F until 48 hours
after completing installation and at minimum 55 degrees F thereafter.
B. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of resilient flooring products until painting has been
completed for each area.
C. Existing Conditions: Do not install resilient flooring on concrete substrates until testing has
been conducted to assure that moisture levels are acceptable.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
r A. Extra Materials: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance materials to
' the owner. Furnish products matching those actually installed, packaged for storage and clearly
labeled.
1. Resilient tile: 2 percent of each variety installed.
2. Resilient sheet: 2 percent of each variety installed, in full roll width.
3. Resilient base: 2 percent of each variety installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Raised Design Rubber Tile: Rubber tile with elevated surface pattern and sanded back surface,
and as follows:
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09650-1 900-9264
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. AFCO Rubber Corporation.
b. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc.
C. Endura Division/Tbe Biltrite Corporation.
d. Flexco Company.
C. Mondo Rubber International Inc.
f. Nora Rubber Flooring Division/Freudenberg Building Systems. Inc.
g. The R.C.A. Rubber Company.
h. The R. C. Musson Rubber Company.
i. Roppe Corporation.
2. Design and profile: --
a. Medium profile squares: 1.25 to 1.65 inches square, 0.031 inch to 0.039 inch in
height.
3. Total thickness: 0.150 inch minimum. _.
4. Composition: Homogeneous synthetic rubber, stabilized pigments, vulcanizers, waxing
and dirt -expelling agents, and nonstaining mineral fillers, with no oil -based extenders,
natural rubber, or asbestos fibers.
5. Size: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches by 12 inches.
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc.
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
C. Azrock Industries Inc.
d. Kentile Floors Inc.
C. Tarkett, Inc.
2. Composition 1. Free of asbestos.
3. Gage: 1/9 inch.
^
2.2 SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Resilient Sheet Flooring : Inlaid vinyl sheet; filled vinyl surface layer with plastic foam
backing, and other requirements as follows:
I. Total thickness: 0.120 inch minimum.
2. Wearlayer thickness: 0.040 inch minimum.
3. Sheet width: 72 inches minimum.
4. Static load limit: 100 pounds per square inch minimum.
5. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with A
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Lonseal, Inc.
2.3 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS
A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I, and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Flexco Company.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09650-2 900-9264
I
C. 7ohnsonite, Inc.
d. The R. C. Musson Rubber Company.
r C. Roppe Corporation.
2. Height: 4 inches.
3. Style: Standard toe base.
r 4. Corners: Preformed or molded units matching base in color and finish.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile, nominally
1 inch in width and 118 inch in thickness.
1. Color: Matching flooring.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific substrate
conditions.
2.5 COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as scheduled on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation in each area, extending
resilient flooring into spaces which are partially concealed. Cut and fit tightly to fixtures,
pipes, and other obstructions, as well as to walls and partitions.
B. Tightly adhere resilient flooring to substrate with no open joints or cracks, and without raised
or blistered areas. Spread adhesive evenly, so that final installation will be without telegraphed
markings from adhesive or substrate.
3.2 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Layout: Establish center of each space and lay tile from center point, so tiles at each edge will
be not less than 1/2 the and equal in width.
B. Matching: In each space, use tiles from same production run, and lay tiles in same sequence
as removed from cartons. Discard broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged tiles.
�.. 1. Lay tile square to room axis.
2. Lay tile with pattern in adjacent tiles oriented in opposite directions.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Layout and Matching: Establish optimum use of material with minimum number of seams in
each space. Match patterns carefully at seams, following manufacturer's directions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE
A. Apply resilient base securely in locations indicated, using maximum lengths available.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09650-3 900-9264
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Edge Strips: At locations shown on drawings, or where otherwise required to protect
edge of resilient flooring, install resilient edge strips securely with recommended adhesive, to
achieve tightly butted joint.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Initial Cleaning: Remove excess and waste materials promptly, and sweep or vacuum clean
resilient flooring as soon as installation has been completed in each area. After adhesive has
had adequate time to set, mop each area with damp mop and mild detergent.
B. Final Cleaning: Remove scuff marks, excess adhesive, and other foreign substances, using
only cleaning products and techniques recommended by manufacturer of resilient products.
1. Polish: Apply protective polish to clean resilient flooring surfaces, unless manufacturer
of resilient product recommends otherwise.
END OF SECTION 09650
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09650-4
900-9264
r
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory
indicated.
B. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard
samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
1.2 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements
when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or
other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities.
1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes.
t ' 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products
in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from
lying in direct contact with the ground.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: After carpet installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement
carpeting in quantities not less than 2 percent for each distinct carpet color, pattern, and type
installed. Extra materials furnished must precisely match materials installed, must be wrapped
in suitable packaging, and must be clearly labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tufted Carpet: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. The Blacknall Company.
2. Collins & Aikman Corporation.
3. The Harbinger Company.
4. 3 & 3 Industries, Inc.
5. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc.
6. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/Burlington Industries, Inc.
7. Milliken Contract Carpets.
8. Mohawk Carpet Corporation.
9. Stevens Carpet
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09680-1 900-9264
r-
2.2 MATERIALS
r
A. Carpet:
1. Location: Per Room Finish Schedule and Floor Plan.
2. Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples.
3. Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom.
4. Pile fiber: Nylon.
5. Style: Level loop.
6. Pile face weight: Minimum 32 ounces per square yard.
7. Installation method: Direct glue -down.
8. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber.
9. Performance characteristics:
a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255):
1. Class B: Fume spread 26-75, smoke developed 0450.
b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per —
square centimeter.
C. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450.
d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450. ..
C. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at 20
percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F.
f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after
60 hours exposure.
g. Density: 5,000 minimum.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated,
colors selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards.
C. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water-resistant adhesive
manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire
performance requirements indicated for carpet. `-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its --
direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams.
2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open
bases.
B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be
located directly underneath door in closed position.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09680 2 900-9264
3.2 INSTALLATION - GLUE DOWN CARPET
A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where
cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges.
B. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions.
1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of
bulges.
C. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise, provide secure
attachment to substrate.
D. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet.
END OF SECTION 09680
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09680-3
900-9264
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Painting and finishing of exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Painting and finishing of exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Field painting of exposed electrical items.
4. Field painting of exposed mechanical items.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Steel Structures Painting Manual Volume 2, 7th Edition; Systems and Specifications, Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC); 1995.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. DFM (dry filth mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets for each coating.
B. Color and Texture Samples:
1. Provide for each coating system, color, and texture and applied to representative
r- substrate samples.
a. Prepare samples to show bare, prepared surface and each successive coat.
b. Label each sample with coating name and color.
t- 2. Miscellaneous substrates: 12-by-12-inch hardboard.
t 3. Concrete masonry: 8-by-16-inch samples; include mortar joint.
4. Wood: 8-inch square samples for surfaces; 8-inch long samples for trim.
5. Metal: 5-by-7-inch samples.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials:
1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer,
unless otherwise required or approved.
B. Applicator. Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in painting work similar
in scope to work of this project.
r 1. Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters who are fully qualified to
satisfy requirements of the specifications.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7
r-
k ..
1
09900-1
900-9264
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers bearing coating name and
color, material composition data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and mixing,
thinning, and application instructions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only under the following environmental conditions:
1. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes
and to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours
before, during, and for 48 hours after application of finishes, or longer if required to --
obtain fuel cure as indicated by manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop coatings specified in other
sections, coordinate work of such other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible
primers are applied.
1.9 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. At time of completing application, deliver stock of maintenance material to the owner. Furnish not less than one properly labeled and sealed 1-gallon can of each type of finish coat of each
color, taken from lots furnished for the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
r
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The brand -name products listed in the schedule at the end of this section and made by the
following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents:
1. Sherwin Williams Company.
B. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered in accordance with standard substitution
procedures:
1. Devoe & Raynolds Company.
2. The Glidden Company.
3. Benjamin Moore & Company. --
4. PPG Industries, Inc./Pittsburgh Paints.
5. Pratt & Lambert, Inc.
6. Sherwin Williams Company. ..,
2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Colors:
1. For multicoat systems, apply each coat using a successively darker tint or shade, unless
approved otherwise.
2. Top coat colors: As shown on drawings and schedules.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09900-2 900-9264
r
r
r
Mr
r-
t
B. Lead Content:
1. Not more than 0.06 percent lead by weight (calculated as lead metal) in the total
nonvolatile content of the paint or the equivalent treasure of lead in the dried film.
2. Exception: Where permitted by applicable regulations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in accordance with coating
manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare
surface for proper texture necessary to optimum coating adhesion and intended finished
appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations to avoid contamination of
freshly coated surfaces.
1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment, fire -resistance ratings, etc.
2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings.
3. Provide protection for non4wnovable items not scheduled for coating. After application
of coatings, install removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and
replacement of such items.
4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair, or replace to the satisfaction
of the architect any surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated.
S. Acid etching: Prepare surface profile by uniformly etching surface to a texture, to touch,
of 100 grit sandpaper; do not over -etch surface. After etching, surface shall be free from
surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material, etching solutions, and foreign
material of any kind.
a. After detergent cleaning and while floor is in a saturated but surface dry condition,
apply acid solution (1 part 20 degree Baume muriatic acid to 2 to 4 parts potable
water) using low pressure pray equipment.
b. When bubbling action begins to subside, remove salt formations, loose material,
and spent solution by scrubbing with stiff bristle broom and flushing with water
under moderate pressure. Repeat rinsing operation until pH test papers yield a pH
of 7 or higher on the surface.
6. Brush-off blast cleaning: Prepare surface profile and remove laitance and solid
contaminants from surface by abrasive blast cleaning. After blast cleaning, surface shall
be free from airing compounds, surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering material,
and foreign material of any kind.
a. Perform blasting operation so as to open any surface voids, bugholes, etc., and to
remove curing compounds, surface glaze, laitance, salts, loosely adhering
material, and foreign material of any kind, but without exposing underlying
aggregate or fracturing aggregate surfaces.
b. Use only dry, oil -free air and clean media, unless other blast cleaning methods are
approved.
C. After blast cleaning, completely remove dust and loose particles by vacuuming;
brushing or blowing will not be permitted.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09900-3 960-9264
d. Patch surface voids, bugholes, etc., in an approved manner, and allow to cure
before applying coatings.
7. Allow substrate to dry thoroughly. Test for moisture in accordance with coating
manufacturer's recommendations before applying coatings.
B. Masonry:
1. Apply coatings to fully cured surfaces that are at least 28 days old.
2. Perform any required surface repairs before applying coatings. Remove any fins or
protrusions from surface. Patch any holes and cracks in an approved manner. Verify
the joints are struck flush or concave unless otherwise specifically required.
3. Clean surface of all dirt, oil, wax, grease, or other contaminants. Use appropriate
detergents and hot water. Thoroughly flush cleaning agents from surface. --
4. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled in lieu of hand or power tool cleaning.
5. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue,
and salts by solvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean surfaces if _
necessary.
6. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, reprepare damaged
surfaces.
3.3 MDaNG AND THINNING
A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any
containers where skin comprises 2 percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add
thinner except as specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer
for proper coating application under the circumstances prevailing at the project site when
application equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer is employed. Use only the
quantities and the types of thinner recommended.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and using
application method best suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage of surfaces to be
coated. --
2. Apply each coat to achieve the dry film thickness per coat recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of
coats than specified will not be accepted. --
3. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs, -sags, variations in color, lap
or brush marks, holidays, and skips.
4. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this section and as otherwise
indicated. Coat all similar surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically
exempted.
5. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers, access panels, and grilles. _
Apply fully finish coats behind movable items of furniture and equipment before
installation. Apply prime coat only behind non -movable items of furniture and
equipment before installation. _
6. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings.
B. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification, reclean and re -prepare surfaces as
specified, and apply coatings to comply with the contract documents.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09900-4 7 ' 900-9264
r
C. Scheduling:
1. Apply first coat of material to properly prepared surfaces without delay.
j a. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Mechanical and Electrical Items:
1. Paint electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms.
2. Paint mechanical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms.
3. Color -code items in accordance with color schedules.
a. Color -band and identify each component with the following:
1. Flow arrows.
2. Name.
4. Paint the following mechanical items:
a. Piping and supports.
b. Ducts and insulation.
C. Motors and supports.
d. Others as indicated on drawings.
5. Paint the following electrical items:
a. Conduit and fittings.
b. Panel enclosures.
C. Others as indicated on drawings.
3.5 PRIME COATS
A. General:
1. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract documents require shop
coating of ferrous metals.
2. Apply block fillers using manufacturer's recommended application techniques and
achieving a pinhole -free surface.
3. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field primed promptly after
arrival at the site or shall be stored away from the effects of weather.
4. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved, compatible primer.
B. Primers for Wood and Wood Products:
I. Apply first coat to wood upon receipt at the site and before wood is exposed to sun or
rain.
2. Backprime concealed surfaces and cut edges of exterior wood trim prior to installation.
3.6 FINISH COATS
A. Number of Coats and Minimum Coating Thickness:
1. Apply not less than the number of coats indicated.
2. Apply each coat to achieve not less than the dry film thicknesses indicated per coat.
3. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the owner when necessary to achieve
complete hiding, uniform texture, or uniform sheen and appearance.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 09900-5 900-9264
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent materials and empty containers. If
requested, turn over the architect all empty coatings containers used during the course
of each day.
2. Remove all trace of coatings from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be coated. Remove
by appropriate methods that do not damage surfaces.
B. Protection:
1. Protect work against damage until fully cured. Provide signs identifying wet surfaces
until surfaces are adequately cured.
2. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine surfaces for damage to coatings
and restore coatings to new, undamaged condition.
3. Touch-up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from
surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color, sheen, or texture, recoat
entire surface.
3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES
A. Gypsum Wallboard:
1. Latex, eggshell.
a. Bottom coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28 W 200; 1.1 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel B20 W 200 series; 1.3 DFM.
B. Concrete Masonry Units - Filled Finish:
1. Latex, eggshell.
a. Bottom coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42 W 46.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel B20 W 200 series; 1.3 DFM.
2. Water -base epoxy, gloss.
a. Bottom coat: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42 W 46.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 Series/Gloss Hardener B60 V 15;
3.0 DFM.
C. Wood:
1. Latex, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater; B49 W 200; 2.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: Classic 99 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel A26 Series; 1.3 DFM.
2. Varnish, satin (filled and stained wood).
a. Stain: Oil Stain A48 series; 1.0 DFM.
b. Filler: Wood filler as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Barrier coat: Oil Base Varnish, High Gloss A66 V 91 thinned with 1 quart paint
thinner per gallon, 1.0 DFM.
d. Bottom and intermediate coats: Polyurethane Varnish, High Gloss A67 V 1; 1.0
DFM.
e. Top coat: Polyurethane Varnish, Satin A67 F 1; 1.0 DFM.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATIONWO. 7 09900-6 900-9264
D. Ferrous Metal:
1. Latex, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Industrial Water -Based Acrylic Paint B42 W 110, 3.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: Classic 99 Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel A26 Series; 1.3 DFM.
2. Alkyd, semigloss.
a. Bottom coat: Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer (VOC Complying) B50
WZl/White; 3.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: Classic 99 Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel A40 Series; 1.8 DFM.
3. Dry fog, satin.
a. Bottom coat: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer (VOC Complying) B50
WZYWhite; 3.0 DFM.
b. Top coat: Super Save-Lite Dry Fall Paint, Semi -Gloss B47 W 62; 3.0 DFM.
3.9 SCHEDULE OF COAMNGS FOR EXTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES
A. Ferrous Metal:
1. Latex, satin.
a. Bottom coat: Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer (VOC Complying) B50
WZ11White; 3.0 DFM.
b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat.
C. Top coat: A-100 Latex House and Trim Paint, Satin - Series A82; 1.5 DFM.
END OF SECTION 09900
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 09900-7 900-9264
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnishing of door louvers; installation specified elsewhere.
2. Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 603.8-92 — Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented
Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association;
1992.
B. ASTM B 221-93 — Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993.
C. SSPC-Paint 12 — Cold -Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Tbick Film); Steel Structures Painting
Council; 1991.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Samples, style and color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company designing, manufacturing, and installing products of
this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a
period of 5 years.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where conditions permit, take field measurements and determine actual
installed positions of louvers before beginning louver fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wall Louvers:
I. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Air Balance, Inc.
b. CESCO Products.
C. Penn Ventilator Company Incorporated.
d. Ruskin Manufacturing Division/Tomkins Industries, Inc.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10200-1 900-9264
B. Door Louvers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the _
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. A-J Manufacturing Company.
b. All-Lite Metal Company.
C. Construction Specialties, Inc.
d. Reliable Products/Hart & Cooley, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for application
and finish required.
B. Fasteners:
1. For aluminum members: Aluminum, stainless steel, or galvanized steel.
2. For steel or galvanized steel members: Stainless steel or galvanized steel.
3. For stainless steel members: Stainless steel.
4. Finish exposed -to -view fastener heads to match adjacent surface.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized steel or nonferrous metal.
D. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12; cold -applied asphalt mastic.
2.3 WALL LOUVER ACCESSORIES
A. Screens: Removable type; provide screens for indicated exterior louvers.
1. Frame: Fabricate from same material used for louver. Miter and reinforce frame
corners.
a. Fabricate frame from extruded or formed metal. Provide insert or driven spline
for mesh attachment. Frame must be capable of being rewired.
2. Insect screen mesh:
a. 18 by 16 mesh, 0.011 inch aluminum wire.
3. Position screen on inner louver face; attach using machine screws located 3 inches from
corner and 12 inches on center between comers.
2.4 DOOR LOUVERS
A. Door Louver : Fixed N-shaped (standard) blades, 1 inch deep, spaced approximately 1 inch
on center.
1. Fabricate louvers and integral frame of extruded aluminum, minimum 0.050 inch thick.
2. Frame style: Box -shaped frame without flanges, installed using beads provided by door
supplier.
3. Finish: Baked enamel.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide complete, shop -fabricated units, unless unit size dictates shipment in pieces; mark each
component as required for proper field assembly.
B. Fabricate frames to indicated profiles with features and clearances to suit installation conditions.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10200-2 900-9264 ,.
1. Include integral sills of finish and construction to match louver.
a. At locations indicated or where required to prevent drainage infiltration, provide
sill extensions or subsill fleshings of same finish and material as louver.
2. Provide clearance or recesses as required to accommodate sealant between louver and
adjacent construction.
C. Provide shop -welded joints between framing components, and between framing components and
fixed louver blades, unless otherwise indicated or where field assembly is unavoidable.
D. Provide uniform spacing between blades, including gap between blades and exposed face of
head and sill members.
E. Provide vertical mullions of type indicated.
2.6 FIMSHES
A. Baked Acrylic Enamel Finish: Thermally cured organic coating meeting the requirements of
AAMA 603.8.
1. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's complete set of standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates and openings to receive louvers are rigidly set, at proper lines and
elevation, properly sized, and ready to receive louvers.
B. Do not proceed with installation until conditions detrimental to proper installation have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat contact surfaces of dissimilar metals with one or more coats of bituminous paint.
1. The following metals are not considered dissimilar: Aluminum, stainless steel, and zinc.
B. Apply one 15-mil dry film thickness coat of bituminous isolation coating to metal surfaces,
.-- other than galvanized steel, which will be in contact with cementitious materials.
3.3 INSTALLATION
r-
A. Installation of door louvers is specified elsewhere.
�.. B. Install louvers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Coordinate louver installation with adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight
construction.
D. Set units and fleshings in proper location, plumb and true, free of warp or twist.
E. Fit joints tightly; where joint sealers are to be installed, make joints of sizes required.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10200-3 900-9264
p
F. Coordinate installation of electrically actuated louvers with work of Division 16.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from prefinished surfaces immediately after installation.
B. Wash exposed surfaces using mild detergent; thoroughly clean inside corners.
C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent recommended by --
sealant manufacturer.
D. Touch up marred or abraded area of finished elements. If satisfactory touch-up cannot be --
accomplished, remove and replace element.
END OF SECTION 10200
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 102004 900-9264
r
PART 1-GENERAL
SECTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES
1.1 SUMMARY
E A. Section Includes:
1. Flagpoles:
r a. Location of flagpole is shown on drawings.
2. Flagpole fittings and accessories.
3. Flagpole is add Alternate Number One. See Section 0 103 1.
B. Related Sections:
1. Earthwork: Division 2.
2. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B. ASTM B 241B 241M-93 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy
Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 1993.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide flagpole and anchorage system to comply with the following requirements:
1. Flagpole with flag flying: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent
deformation, when flying appropriately sized flag.
2. Flagpole without flag: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent
deformation.
3. Safety design factor: 2.5.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of flagpole required. Include data for fittings and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings bearing the stamp of a professional structural engineer
registered in the state in which the project is located. Include the following:
1. Configuration of flagpoles and bases.
2. Details showing jointing, anchorage, and support systems.
3. Substantiation of compliance with performance requirements indicated in contract
documents.
4. Flagpole finishes, fittings, and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified
in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service
conditions for not less than 5 years.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10350-1 900-9264
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this
section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products.
B. Provide suitable protection for each flagpole before shipment. Spiral -wrap pole with heavy
kraft paper or polyethylene material and place pole in hard protective tube.
C. Deliver flagpoles and accessories properly labeled and in original wrappings.
D. Store and handle materials in a manner which will prevent damage prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, 'provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Aabec Pole Division/Morgan-Francis Company, Inc.
2. Acme Flagpole Division/Lingo, Inc. �-
3. American Flagpole Division/Kearney-National, Inc.
4. Baartol Company, Inc.
5. Concord Industries, Inc.
6. EMC Division/Eder Manufacturing Corporation.
7. John Ewing & Company, Inc.
2.2 FLAGPOLES
A. Description:
1. Mounting: Ground -set, embedded.
2. Type: Conventional.
3. Shaft metal: Aluminum. --
4. Shaft form: Cone tapered.
5. Exposed length of flagpole: 25 feet
6. Halyard: Internal.
7. Flag:
a. American flag
b. 4by6
C. 100 percent nylon
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication - General: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit fabricated by a single
manufacturer, including base, anchorage devices, fittings, and accessories as necessary for
proper installation.
B. Fabricate and ship flagpole as a single unit, unless shipping contraints preclude this alternative.
Where flagpole size dictates shipment in more than one section, provide self -aligning internal
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10350-2 900-9264
f
a
ti
sleeve composed of metal compatible with shaft metal and properly designed to allow precise,
weathertight joining during installation.
C. Flagpole Diameter and Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of shaft and ratio of top diameter to
butt diameter must be appropriate for metal or alloy used and for length of flagpole.
D. Joints and Seams: Form joints and seams which are inconspicuous.
1. Exposed welds: Grind exposed welds smooth. Finish to match flagpole shaft.
E. Aluminum Shaft:
1. Seamless extruded tube: Comply with ASTM B 241.
2. Alloy: 6063 -T6.
3. Minimum wall thickness: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum tensile strength: 30,000 psi.
5. Minimum yield point: 25,000 psi.
6. After flagpole is fabricated, heat-treat and artificially age to alter temper of aluminum.
7. Shaft finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M32C22A41 (medium satin directional textured
mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; clear, architectural Class I
anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick).
F. Ground -Set Flagpole - Embedded Type:
1.
Provide flagpole of sufficient overall length to allow setting depth which is not less than
10 percent of exposed length.
2.
Flash collar: Fabricate from same metal used for flagpole shaft.
a. Product: Selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards based on
i
availability for shaft size.
3.
Foundation sleeve: Corrugated galvanized steel tube, 16 gage.
4.
Foundation sleeve plate: Square steel plate welded to bottom of foundation sleeve.
a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 4 inches larger than inside diameter
of foundation sleeve.
r
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
5.
Steel centering wedges: Minimum 1/8-inch-thick wedges, welded to sleeve plate inside
foundation sleeve for the purpose of centering pole.
--
6.
Electrical grounding spike: 3/4-inch steel spike, welded to bottom side of sleeve plate.
?
a. Length of extension below concrete foundation: Not less than thickness of
concrete footing below sleeve plate.
'--
7.
Foundation support plate: Square steel plate welded to electrical grounding spike at base
of concrete foundation.
a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 6 inches.
f...
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
G. Fittings:
r
1.
Truck:
a. Truck designed for internal halyard system.
2.
Halyards:
a. Internal type:
1. Cable: Stainless steel, with vinyl- or neoprene -covered weight.
2. Winch: Direct drive type, internally mounted, with control stop to hold
flag in any position on pole.
3. Winch crank: Removable.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10350-3 900-9264
4. Winch access door: Flush -mounted, with cylinder lock.
3. Flag snaps:
a. Number required: Two flag snaps per halyard.
b. Material: Bronze, manufacturer's standard.
C. Sheaths: Provide heavy vinyl or neoprene sheath for each flag snap.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Provide materials for concrete flagpole foundations as specified in Division 3, 3,000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents.
B. Ground -Set Flagpole: Verify that foundation is in suitable condition to receive flagpole.
C. Do not begin flagpole installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Embedded Ground -Set Pole:
1. Bituminous coating: Apply protective coating of bituminous paint to section of flagpole
which will be installed below grade, if not factory -applied by flagpole manufacturer prior
to shipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Flagpole Foundation: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3.
B. Flagpole Installation - General: Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings as indicated in
contract documents and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install flagpole in erect, plumbed position.
D. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: Erect flagpole in foundation sleeve and plumb as necessary using
hardwood wedges. Pour dry sand into foundation sleeve in successive layers, each layer 6
inches thick. Tamp each layer before adding next layer. When last sand layer is placed,
provide moisture seal over sand by applying sealant of proper thickness. Comply with sealant
requirements specified in Division 7.
E. Electrical Grounding: Provide positive lightning ground suitable for flagpole and installation
conditions.
F. . Field Joints: Provide snug -fitting, weathertight, hairline joints.
1. Field welding of aluminum flagpole is not acceptable.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10350-4 900-9264
G. Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plumb position (90 degrees from horizontal plane): 1 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces.
B. Verify smooth and proper operation of all installed fittings. Adjust as necessary.
END OF SECTION 10350
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10350-5
900-9264
i.
r-
SECTION 10425 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dimensional letters and numbers.
B. Provide signage as indicated on the drawings.
C. Related Sections:
1. Temporary project signs: Division 1.
1.2 REFERENCES
' A. ASTM B 584-91 — Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications; 1991.
! 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative
to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale
sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and
lettering layout.
r- 3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed
as a unit of Work in other Sections.
r. 4. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional
p letters and numbers.
C. Samples:
1. Submit manufacturer's full range of samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and
texture:
a. Bronze.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication where necessary to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10425-1 900-9264
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated
for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and
other graphic devices.
2.2 MATERIALS -'
A. Bronze Castings: Copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with the requirements of ASTM B
584.
B. Metal Fasteners: Use metals that are not corrosive to the sign material or mounting surface.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials
with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance,
provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the architect from the
manufacturer's standards.
B. Catalized Polyurethane colored finish. '-
1. Color: Uniform, matching color of the architect's sample.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETMRS AND NUMBERS
A. Cast Letters and Numbers:
1. Form individual letters and numbers by casting.
2. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects.
3. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
4. Metal:
a. Bronze.
B. Finish:
1. Catalized Polyurethane, color as selected.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10425 2 900-9264
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers:
1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the
manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of
exposure indicated.
2. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
3. Mount letters with back in contact with the wall or projected from wall surface as
indicated.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10425
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10425-3
900-9264
SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heavy duty metal lockers.
B. Work Not Included:
1. Padlocks: Provided by the owner.
C. Alternates:
1. One half of lockers to be bid as an alternate. See Section 01031.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Heavy Duty: This term is used to designate a particular type of locker specified in this section,
regardless of individual manufacturer designations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, dimensions, trim, fillers, and accessories.
1. Indicate installation and anchoring methods.
2. Show verified field measurements.
3. Show locker numbering scheme.
C. Samples for Color Selection: Locker manufacturer's full range of colors.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Fit lockers neatly to actual construction; take field measurements before fabrication.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive lockers are clean and dry.
B. Protect lockers from damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOCKER CONFIGURATIONS AND COMPONENTS
A. Lockers:
1. Location: Apparatus Bay
2. Fully welded construction.
3. Heavy duty.
4. Single -tier.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10505-1 900-9264
5. Height: 72 inches, plus legs.
6. Width: 18 inches
7. Depth: 24 inches
8. Legs: 6 inches high.
9. Doors: Expanded metal mesh.
10. Sides and vertical dividers: Expanded metal mesh.
11. Shelves: Expanded metal mesh.
12. Top: Sloped.
13. Door handles.
14. Shelf.
15. Two wall hooks.
16. Provide matching filler panels.
2.2 HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS
A. Provide all heavy duty lockers and accessories by one manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Locker Security Systems, Inc.
b. Art Metal Products Division/Fort Knox Storage.
C. List Industries Inc.
d. Penco products, Inc.
e. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.
B. Components:
1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum.
2. Legs: Extend vertical frame members or attach gusset -type legs of not less than 14 gage
steel sheet.
3. Tops: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum.
4. Bottoms: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum.
5. Horizontal dividers: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum.
6. Expanded metal sides and vertical dividers: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel
mesh.
7. Backs: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh.
8. Expanded metal doors: 13 gage, 3/4-inch flattened diamond steel mesh.
9. Door handles: Standard type.
10. Latching mechanism: Concealed in door, designed so that door can be closed while
locked, with spring -loaded latches engaging beveled strikes on frame.
a. Doors over 36 inches high: Three-point latching, minimum.
C. Miscellaneous Components and Trim: 18 gage steel sheet, minimum.
D. Fabrication: Weld all joints between frame members and weld sheet members to frame; weld
latching mechanism and hinges to doors and frames; use no bolts or rivets.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Cold -rolled, leveled mild steel.
B. Expanded Metal Mesh: Steel, with 3/4-inch flattened mesh gages as indicated.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10505-2 900-9264
r
t
I
C. Fasteners: Zinc-, cadmium-, or nickel -plated steel or stainless steel
r- 1. Exposed bolt heads: Tamperproof type.
2. For fastening moving components: Use lock washers or self-locking nuts.
D. Hinges: 5-knuckle, nonremovable-pin hinges, of loop style with 2 full thicknesses in each leaf;
minimum 2 inches high.
1. Minimum of 2 hinges per door.
2. Doors over 42 inches high: Three hinges.
E. Standard Door Handles: Die-cast zinc alloy or chrome -plated steel latch lifter and padlock
hasp, designed so that door can be closed while locked; pry -resistant.
F. Interior Fittings: Cadmium- or zinc -plated steel or cast aluminum, except shelves.
G. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel; raised or recessed numerals at least
318 inch high.
1. Number lockers as directed by the architect.
2. Fasten to doors, centered near the top, using 2 fasteners.
2.4 FABRICATION ALL LOCKERS
A. Factoryfabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping.
�.. B. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces.
1. Exposed metal edges: Smooth off sharp edges and corners.
2. Exposed welds: Grind flush.
r, 3. Door and frame fronts: No exposed bolts or rivet heads.
4. Where exposed holes for built-in locks are not used, cover holes neatly using permanent
materials.
C. Doors: Fabricate with flanged edges, reinforced if required for stiffness, and designed to open
and close without springing.
r 1. Provide extra stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide.
D. Legs: Provide means of fastening to floor.
E. Expanded Metal Components: Weld edges to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center,
enclose sharp edges with frame.
F. Miscellaneous Components: Provide all parts, filler panels, closures, clips, and fasteners
I required for a complete installation.
G. Finishing: Pretreat and finish all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, except stainless steel,
chrome, and aluminum.
1. Factory -finish all accessory components to match.
2. Pretreatment: Remove scale, rust, and contaminants; chemically degrease and
phosphatize.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel
4. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range.
�,. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10505-3 900-9264
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from under and behind lockers before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers plumb and level.
B. Anchor lockers securely to substrates in manner recommended by manufacturer.
1. Use reinforcing plates and spacers as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Provide anchors at not more than 48 inches on center.
3. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
C. Install accessory components with flush, tight joints using concealed fasteners.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and latches for smooth operation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean and touch up finishes; if finish cannot be restored to original appearance, replace locker.
B. Use only cleaning and touch-up materials recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10505
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10505-4 900-9264
SECTION 10521 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1993.
B. NFPA 10 — Standard For Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association;
1994.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents.
B. Certification: Installer shall submit written certification that the fire extinguishers installed
comply with the contract documents and are fully and correctly charged.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA 10.
B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion.
B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Fire extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Fire Protection/A Grinnell Company.
C. American Specialties, Inc.
d. J.L. Industries
e. Larsen's Mfg. Co.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10521-1 900-9264
B. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Rating: 4A:60B:C
2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate).
a. Stored pressure type.
3. Wall mounted.
C. Identification of Wall Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl
decal on wall above extinguisher.
D. Brackets: Provide wall bracket for each wall -mounted extinguisher.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Install extinguishers in locations indicated.
C. - Install brackets for wall mounted extinguishers at height indicated.
END OF SECTION 10521
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10521-2 .-900-9264
SECTION 10910 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Toilet paper dispensers.
2. Grab bars.
3. Shower curtain rods.
4. Shower curtains.
S. Robe hooks.
6. Mop and broom holders.
7. Mirrors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Metal anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6.
2. Wood anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6.
3. Toilet compartments
4. Rough carpentry
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 1036-91 — Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991.
B. FS DD-M-41 IC —Mirrors, Glass; 1990.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Written technical information for each accessory specified.
B. Certificates: Submit certification that work complies with requirements of contract documents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products
specified in this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service
conditions, for not less than 5 years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store
products in manufacturer's original shipping containers.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for products
specified. In a timely manner, distribute the following to affected installers of related work:
1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for
incorporation into other work.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10810-1 900-9264
2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for cutouts
and installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. A & 7 Washroom Accessories.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. _
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Company.
6. McKinney/Parker, Inc., a Subsidiary of Essex Industries, Inc.
2.2 TOUM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Paper Dispenser:
1. Description:
a. Type: Double -roll.
b. Spindleless unit, tension spring delivery, chrome -plated zinc alloy.
C. Tissue roll size: 5 inches diameter.
B. Grab Bar:
1. Description:
a. Stainless steel.
b. Outside diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
C. Wall thickness: Minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch).
d. Grasping surface finish: Smooth, satin.
e. Mounting: Exposed.
f. Clearance between wall and inside of grab bar: 1-1/2 inches.
C. Shower Curtain Rod: —
1. Description:
a. 1-inch outside diameter, 20 gage (0.040-inch) satin -finished stainless steel.
b. Flanges: 3-inch outside diameter, minimum 20 gage satin -finished stainless steel, _
for installation with exposed fasteners.
D. Shower Curtain:
1. Description:
a. Dimensions: 42 inches wide by 72 inches high, hemmed edges.
b. Material: 10-ounce antibacterial vinyl fabric reinforced with nylon. Provide _
material which is flameproof and resistant to stains.
C. Grommets: Stainless steel; pierced through top hem on 6-inch centers.
d. Color: As selected by architect _
e. Shower curtain hooks: Chrome -plated or stainless steel spring wire designed for
snap closure.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 10810-2 1. 900-9264
a
E. Robe Hook:
a.
Double -prong type.
r'
F. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Description:
a.
18 gage (0.050-inch) stainless steel ASTM A 167, Type 304, hat -shaped channel.
b.
Holders: 4 spring -loaded rubber cam holders.
C.
Length: 36 inches.
G. Mirror:
1. Description:
r-
a.
Type: Stainless steel -framed mirror.
b.
Mirror material: Float glass 1/4 inch thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I. Class 1,
Quality q1. Apply silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic
,..
coating to copper backing, and test mirror glass, in accordance with FS
DD-M411 C.
C.
Frame: Form frame using minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch) angle shapes. Provide
welded, precisely -mitered corners. Grind welds smooth.
d.
Protection for mirror edges: Design frame to accept protective mirror -edging
materials such as plastic, wood, etc.
C.
Backing system: Provide tamperproof backing system capable of preventing
moisture buildup and providing rigid support for mirror material. Fabricate from
t
full -mirror sized, minimum 22 gage (0.034 inch) galvanized steel sheet and
nonabsorptive filler material. Do not use corrugated cardboard for filler.
L
Hanger System: Provide tamperproof hanging system for rigid mirror installation:
i
(
1. One-piece spring -action locking device fabricated from galvanized steel and
designed to support mirror of size indicated, without use of exposed
fasteners.
g.
Frame finish: Number 4 satin polish.
H. Towel Bars: Heavy duty, chrome plated.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Mounting Devices and Fasteners: Provide toilet accessory manufacturer's recommended items
for substrates and conditions indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Trademarks and Model Numbers: Neither name nor trademark of manufacturer
is acceptable on exposed surfaces of accessories, unless approved by the architect. Permanently
affix manufacturer's name and model number to unexposed surface of accessory.
B. Surface Mounted Accessories: Where possible, design accessory to provide concealed
anchorage when installed. Precisely -fit seams and joints. Roll exposed edges unless indicated
otherwise. Use full-length stainless steel piano -type hinges for access doors and panels.
t C. Recess Mounted Accessories: Design accessories to provide concealed anchorage when closed.
Weld all joints. Precisely miter corners where indicated. Use full length stainless steel
piano -type hinges for access doors and panels.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 10810-3 900-9264
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and
to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the architect in writing of any
conflicts concerning product placement, for resolution.` Do not proceed without resolution.
B. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of accessory installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive accessories. Protect surrounding elements from damage during
accessory installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Provide plumb, level accessory installations.
C. Securely attach accessories to substrate.
D. Accessories Installed for Use by Handicapped Persons: Install as indicated on drawings.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust accessories as required to provide smooth operation and trouble free servicing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories using accessory manufacturer's recommended
procedures and cleaning agents.
3.6 PROTECTION —
A. Provide coverings as required to protect installed accessories.
END OF SECTION 10810
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 108104 900-9264
r—
SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Horizontal louver blinds.
2. The locations of window treatment are indicated on the drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications describing features, colors. options, accessories,
for each type of unit.
1. Include installation instructions and show how installation methods may differ for
different openings and mounting substrates.
L.
B. Samples:
1. For color selection: Color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available.
C. Certificates: For information only, submit manufacturer's written certification stating
compliance with requirements for the following:
1. Physical properties indicated.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Include manufacturer's written operation and
maintenance instructions.
E. Warranty: For information, include specimen of manufacturer's written warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer qualifications: A company manufacturing all components of products
specified in this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner for at least 3
years.
2. Installer qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of specified
products, with at least 2 years of experience fabricating and installing similar products.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name and
location of installation.
B. Store materials in dry area maintained at building's operating temperature and humidity.
t C. Follow manufacturer's instructions to prevent damage.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 12511-1 900-9264
r
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not install window treatment until wet and dirty work is complete.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit manut=urer's standard 2 year warranty, which shall not reduce or otherwise limit any
other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Head Rail: Formed steel channel section, enclosing tilt and lift mechanisms; minimum 24 gage
sheet; long edges returned or rolled; with reinforcing as required for rigidity. --
1. Enclose all hardware required for blind operation in headrail.
2. Finish rails the same color as louvers.
B. Bottom Rail: Finish to match louvers.
1. Formed steel rail, designed not to twist or sag.
2. Curve top of rail to match louver radius.
3. Cap ends with plastic or metal caps; color to match rail
C. Louvers: Aluminum minimum 0.006 inch thick, curved cross-section with smooth round
comers.
1. Width: As indicated; size other parts to fit.
a. 1/2 inch (15 mm) nominal.
2. Design and space louvers to minimize light penetration when closed.
D. Ladders: Hold louvers at correct spacing and angle in all tilt positions.
1. Braided polyester cord ladder, verticals of 0.04 to 0.07 inch diameter; horizontals of not
less than 2 threads braided into verticals; spaced to prevent long-term louver sag, but not
over 24 inches apart and not over 7 inches from ends of louvers.
E. Tilt Mechanism: Hold louvers at any tilt angle despite normal building vibration; worm gear
that disengages at limits of tilt with low fiction tilter; provide drum at each ladder, linkage rod,
and grommets for ladder and operating cords.
1. Tilt wand: Clear plastic, detachable; length as necessary to make operation convenient
from floor level.
F. Lift Mechanism: Lift cords of nylon or polyester with pulls; cord lock that holds bottom rail
securely at any level; cord separators.
G. Brackets: Design for easy removal and re -installation of blind.
1. Design to withstand dead weight and operating stresses.
2. Provide brackets at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer.
3. Include fasteners appropriate for substrate.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 12511-2 900-9264
7
H. Accessories:
r, 1. Hold-downs: Provide two brackets at lowest position of bottom rail, engaging hook or
pin on bottom rail end caps.
I. Finish: All components factory -finished.
1. Steel: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by galvanizing, and phosphatizing or priming.
2. Aluminum: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by chemical conversion coating.
3. Concealed components: Corrosion -resistant finish.
4. Pattern/color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
patterns/colors.
5. Exposed items other than louvers: Match color of rails.
J. Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Hunter Douglas, Inc./Window Covering Division.
b. Kirsch Company.
�. C. Levelor Corporation.
f d. Springs Window Fashions (Bali/Graber).
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to fit actual construction; take field measurements of openings before starting
fabrication.
B. Use materials that are compatible, will not need to be lubricated, and which will not adversely
affect adjacent materials.
C. Make blinds fill each opening completely, from jamb to jamb and from head to sill, with a
single blind unit, unless multiple units are specifically indicated.
D. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1. Space ladders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Space louvers to positively overlap when closed.
3. Provide fully tilting louvers, approximately 180 degrees of rotation.
4. Install tilt control on left side when facing interior side of blind.
5. Install lift cords on right side when facing interior side of blind.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates at locations in which window blinds will be installed. Do not begin
installation until conditions are correct.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 12511-3 900-9264
i
i
B. Set units in correct location, plumb, and level; allow clearance for window operating hardware.
C. Fasten securely to substrates.
D. Separate metal components from concrete and masonry using plastic tape or other suitable
material. —
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust each blind for proper operation.
B. Replace defective and damaged units. —
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work. R -
END OF SECTION 12511
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 12511-4 900-9264
SECTION 12621 - PORTABLE CHALK, MARKER, AND TACK BOARDS.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Portable units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's technical data.
2. Manufacturer's installation and breaking -in instructions.
3. Color charts showing full range of standard colors.
4. Test reports demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
I . Provide dimensioned elevations of each configuration of board.
2. Show sections of trim members. Key to elevations.
3. Show anchorage and any necessary grounds.
4. Show layout and installation details.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Not less than S years of experience in manufacturing products of the type specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Deliver boards only when interior air and substrates have reached equilibrium moisture
and temperature approximating that of normal occupied conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Portable units:
a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
b. Greensteel Division/Information Display Technology, Inc.
C. Ix=, Inc.
d. Peninsular Slate Company.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 12621-1 900-9264
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain -Enamel Marker Boards: High -pressure -laminated composite construction.
1. Facing sheet:
a. Manufacturer's option of enameling processes listed:
1. Steel: Special quality enameling iron or steel, low metalloid and copper
content for temperature over 1,400 degrees suitable for coating porcelain
on steel for architectural purposes; chemically bathed and rinsed before
enameling. Porcelain writing surface: Nickel Cobalt primer 0.002 inches
minimum thickness, writing surface 0.0025 inches minimum thickness.
Opposite surface: Nickel cobalt ground coat 0.002 inches minimum
thickness for silica spray coat for lamination adhesion. Total finish
thickness 0.004 inches minimum thickness. Panel edges at butt joints
porcelain coated.
2. Proprietary process using Type i stretcher -leveled aluminized steel sheet
with enamel fired at approximately 1000 degrees F.
b. Minimum thickness: 24 gage.
C. Marker board cover coat:
1. Manufacturer's standard gloss finish.
B. Colors of boards and trim: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Construct units as follows:
1. Portable unit.
2. Writing surface: Porcelain -enamel marker board.
3. Writing surface both sides.
4. Board size: 4 feet by 6 feet
S. Portable unit frames:
a. Anodized, satin finish aluminum tubing.
b. Full-length chalk tray.
c. Nonrevolving board.
d. Casters with locking device to prevent movement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY
A. Assemble portable units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Units shall be sturdy and wobble -free.
C. Joints shall be neat and tight -fitting.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 12621-2 900-9264
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect boards from damage until substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 12621
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.7 12621-3 900-9264
SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 CHECKING DOCUMENTS
A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall
check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any
discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly
provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No
discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the
Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents.
1.02 GENERAL
A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications
shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site,
and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a
neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the
running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at
the building necessitate deviating from these standards.
i B. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in chases in finished
areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings
t r` shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed.
C. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where
serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed
connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required.
D. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and
finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's
unfamiliarity with these details. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the
pace of the general construction to precede that general construction.
E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact
locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other
installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to
the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all
obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the
equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating
installation.
F. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, futures, equipment items, etc.
The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to
all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the
building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the
conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional
cost accruing to the Owner.
I
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15000-1 900-9264
ti
G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into
the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require
other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account
of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at
his (the Contractor's) own expense. L,
H. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment
which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the
Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be
corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
I. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and
conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and
walls. The following order shall govern:
I. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting
fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid
conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as storm drains.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function
would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
J. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate
manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein.
Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the
underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
K. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's
attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for
any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular
apparatus, material, or equipment. —
L. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the
accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any. item required to
accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.
M. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If
these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not
indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient
time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to
require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in
accordance with the specifications.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15000-2 900-9264
1.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. All electric wiring of every character will be done under Division 16 of these specifications.
The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections.
The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the
supporting structures and any required outlet boxes.
B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by
the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16.
Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required,
voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under
Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual
requirements shall govern.
1.04 TERMINOLOGY
A. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
B. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
C. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
D. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the
floor with all building components in place.
70j
E. "Exposed" area are all area which are exposed to view by the building occupants,
including mechanical rooms.
H
F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described
singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
1.05 SEALING AROUND PIPES, DUCTS, ETC.
;�• A. The Contractor installing pipes, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves
where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The
' packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce
walls, floors or partitions.
1.06 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for
elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section,
to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid
obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to
use.
r'. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless
otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be
provided to the Architect for his information.
roll LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15000-3 900-9264 '
1.07 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The
Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be
furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The
Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of
work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of
the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment.
B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that
shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by
the Architect.
C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or
by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work
as detailed on the drawings.
D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not
constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15000-4 900-9264
Gi
SECTION 15100 - SITE UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Perform all layout, trenching, excavation, backfill, shoring and similar work and provide and
install all materials and appurtenances necessary for the installation and final connection of all
utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All piping materials for every purpose shall be furnished and installed as hereinafter specified.
B. All pipe and fittings shall be new and unused unless specifically indicated otherwise.
C. Underground steel piping shall be factory coated pipe "X-Tru-Coat" or epoxy coated pipe
with fittings wrapped with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and
fittings.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER
A. PVC Plastic Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D3034 type PSM with a maximum SDR of 35 with
clastomeric joints complying with ASTM D3212.
2.03 GAS LINES
A. Plastic Gas Piping: Polyethylene, Type III, Grade 3, (PE 3406-3408), resin conforming to
ASTM D 1248-7A, pipe construction conforming to ASTM D2513 (SDR 11).
B. Mechanical Joints: Where steel lines connect to plastic lines 2" and smaller in size, use
Continental Style 5 extra heavy duty malleable iron couplingswithstiffeners.
C. Flanges: Where steel lines valves or accessories connect to plastic lines 2-1/2" and larger,
use polyethylene and steel flat face flanges with full face gaskets.
D. Casing: Encase plastic lines under streets in schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe extending 36"
beyond paving.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15100-1 900-9264
E. Service Risers: Wayne Manufacturing compression service riser with anode and built-in
stiffener.
2.04 FIRE LINE
A. PVC Piping: ASTM D-2241, SDR-17, Class 150, bell and spigot with ASTM D-1869 rubber
gasket, Manville Blue Brute.
2.05 EXTERIOR CLEANOUTS
A. Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or as required by ordinance
but not greater than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a concrete encased special fitting
with sewer pipes extending therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab. A brass
countersunk cleanout ferrule shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with
finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. Cleanouts shall be r_
the same size as the sewer, up to 6" in size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LAYOUT OF UTILITY LINES
A. Before starting excavation Contractor shall:
1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line.
2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in
writing.
3. Stake route of each line.
4. Arrange utility connections with authorities.
5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing
to accommodate installation of the lines.
3.02 LAYING PIPE
A. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep
pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install
fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical
Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged
ends which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean.
B. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel
water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible
place water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross
each other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible,
amount of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out clearance provided
the sewer line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line.
3.03 EXCAVATION FOR OUTSIDE UTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances
encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of his
work.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15100-2 900-9264
I-
i
r`
s B. Piling of Excavated Materials: All excavated material shall be piled in a manner that will not
endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Hydrants under
pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb stop boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other
utility controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters
shall be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage, and natural water
courses shall not be obstructed. Segregate topsoil for replacement. Unused material shall be
removed from the site.
�.., C. Trenching Methods: Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations
except where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures, or plants either
above or below ground; in such instances hand method shall be employed.
D. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property
damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall
be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles,
equipment, pipe, and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian
traffic shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights.
E. Protection of Property and Structures: Temporary support, adequate protection, and
maintenance of all underground and surface structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions
encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense
and under the direction of the Architect. Any structures that have been disturbed shall be
restored upon completion of the work.
3.04 BACKFILLING
A. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities
systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth,
loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from large
clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until the pipe
has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for other
lines.
B. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and
tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders
shall not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and
will be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where
settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled
and mounded over, and smoothed off.
C. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified
above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" -layers, each layer
moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such
manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining
earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed
immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, the
ground shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in
a uniform and neat condition.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15100-3 900-9264
3.05 LOCATION AND DETECTION
A. Below Ground:
1. Non -Metallic:
a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the same
trench a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA.color coding as
follows:
Blue - Water
Green - Sewer and Sanitary Systems
Yellow - Gas
Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two
layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2 1/8" wide and shall be
imprinted with a continuous traceable for a minimum of eight years after
direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape Detectable or approved equal.
Tape shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions, but no less than 12"
above the buried line.
2. Metallic:
a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that specified for
below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil for location is not required.
3.06 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on
the drawings. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the city for domestic water
service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city.
Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water
piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to
municipal requirements.
B. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point
shown on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection.
C. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on the drawings.
From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at
each service point.
D. Fire Protection Water Service: The Contractor shall secure service from the city main at the
point shown. Arrange for the tap with the city and pay all charges levied by the city for the
service.
3.07 TESTING
A. Sewer: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least the lower half
of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent pipe
movement during testing, leaving the joint uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks
encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water
so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the
pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15100-4 900-9264
B. Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no leaks and no
pressure drop.
C. Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There shall be no
pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop occurs,
soap test every joint, correct the leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15100-5 900-9264
roll-
L,
SECTION 15200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
rPART 1 - GENERAL
4
1.01 NOTE
r
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
�^ A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
E
1.03 SCOPE
N
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein.
'F 1.04 INSPECTION
r
A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during
the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during
hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the
Contractor.
k.
1.05 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE
A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign
matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will
protect them from damage by freezing.
1-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in
the United States of America.
B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be
used under that section. The following tabulation is
for reference only to identify the
J °
applicable standard.
PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D3034, Type PSM
Max. SDR = 35
PVC Soil Fittings
_Elastomeric ASTM D3212
Copper Tubing
ASTM B75-76
Wrought Copper Solder Fittings
ANSI B16.22
Steel Pipe
ASTM A120, A53, A106
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15200-1
900-9264
Butt Weld Fittings
ANSI B 16.9
Socket Weld Fittings
ANSI B 16.11
Steel Flanges
_
ANSI B 16.5
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ANSI B 16.3
C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass
to iron seat; equal to Crane.
D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM
F-492.
E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, bround joint, equal
to Chase, Crane or Mueller.
2.02 VALVES
A. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings,
bronze shafts, and infinite position handle. Valve shall be two piece. Apollo, Crane,
Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable.
B. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for r
pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG.
C. Gas Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 in sizes 2-1/2"
and larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 threaded gas stop. ;1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The
location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. k
B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained �-
materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the
building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified
grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building.
C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings.
D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible
connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping
due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to
minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure.
E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of
connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections
to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in
welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating
unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15200-2 900-9264 �-
d'1
/^
F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same
material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that
branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be
made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of
straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted.
G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of
assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with
the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are
not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of
fabricating it before ordering materials.
3.02 FLASHING
A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per
square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the
waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity.
Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square.
3.03 PITCH PANS
A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized,
welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch.
3.04 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on
grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit
readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines,
the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter
of the insulation.
B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves.
In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend
1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor
penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material
equal to 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk.
C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through
floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4
rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes
are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on
grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with
mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate
sleeve size to insure a watertight joint.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 I5200-3 900-9264
t
3.05 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES
A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or
ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling
in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against
the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated.
B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls.
3.06 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS
A. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be
neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel
B. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each
pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more
than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with
graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking
of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited.
C. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides
of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and
hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95 %
tin, 5 % antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing.
Low temperature solder such as 50150 or 40/60 will not be permitted.
D. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material
conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler
material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends
of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be
made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode
positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on
any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any
cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or
grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding.
E. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts of Grade 5 or better and gaskets as
specified. Faces of the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The
pipe, valve, or fitting shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts
shall be gradually tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put
on the flanges in making up the joint.
F. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers`:mstructions.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15200-4 900-9264
d
g
SECTION 15210 -PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials -
1.03 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories".
A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings
conforming to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM
D-2564-67.
B. Sanitary Vent Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665-68,
assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67.
C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under
slabs on grade shall be of Type K soft drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be
Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint
fittings.
D. Gas Lines: Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lb. banded malleable iron fittings for pipe 2"
and smaller; welded fittings for pipe 2-1/2" and larger.
E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings.
F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming
to ASTM D-2665-68, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564-67.
G. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in
3 direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil,
waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be
concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with
f other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts
�a. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15210-1 900-9264
t
r
in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule
with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in
finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade -�
W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to
4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. -
H. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than
the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every
fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers
shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be
used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations.
r
I. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment,
or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a
threaded spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers
shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed
in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match.
2.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job.
Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable.
B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers,
strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers,
goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc.
C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers.
D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves.
E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is
supported from the wall.
F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance.
G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in
H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E.
Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect.
I. The Contractor 'shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current
ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the
requirements of the parties having jurisdiction.
J. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas.
K. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15210-2 - 900-9264
Ga
i
2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
Water Closet WC'A'
Bowl Eljer 111-4805, 1.5GPF water saver,
Flush valve
Seat
Water Closet WC'B'
Bowl
Flush valve
Seat
Urinal U
Fixture
Flush Valve
Lavatory L'A'
Fixture
Supply
P-trap
Stops & Risers
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard height,
with bolt covers.
Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 16" riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open
front.
Eljer 111-4815, 1.5GPF water saver,
elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped
16-3/4" height, with bolt covers. ADA
compliant.
Sloan Royal 111, 11-1/2" riser.
Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open
front.
Eljer 161-1150 vitreous china, siphon jet
flushing action, with chair carrier and 3/4" top
spud. Mount at standard height.
Sloan Royal 180
Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x
18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings.
557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator,
and 803-0552 perforated grid striver.
804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops.
15210-3
900-9264
Lavatory L'B'
Fixture
Supply
Tailpiece
P-trap
Stops & Risers
Insulation
Sink S
Fixture
Supply
Strainer
P-trap
Stops, risers
Disposal
Service Sink SS
Fixture
Supply
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7
Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x
18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings.
557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator.
803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain.
804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops.
Truebro 102W insulation for p-trap, offset
tailpiece, and hot and cold.
Elkay LR-3319, 33" x 19-1/2" double
compartment, 18 gage type 304 self rimming
stainless steel with 4 holes.
Eljer 717-1280, Chrome finish swing spout
single lever unit with aerator, hose and spray,
3/8" tubing inlets.
Two Eljer 803-0580 strainers and crumb cups
with tailpieces.
Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and
wheel handle stops.
In-Sink-Erator, Classic Model, 1 Hp stainless
steel garbage disposal, stainless steel rotating
shredder with two 3600 swivel impellers &
stainless steel grind chamber.
Stainless steel Just A-18665 gauge, Type 304,
wall hung service sink.
Just JUB-1200 chrome plated rigid spout
mixing faucet with vacuum breaker. Spout
with pail hook, wall brace and 3/4 inch
threaded hose outlet. Ship Wt. 7 lbs.
15210-4 900-9264
Trap
Electric Water Cooler EWC
Fixture
P-trap
Stop
Hose Bibb HB
Fixture
Washing Machine Rough -in Box WM
Fixture
Shower Head SH'A'
Fixture
Just JTS-1060 standard, enameled inside, with
cleanout.
Elkay EBFA-8 with stainless steel receptor and
vinyl clad cabinet.
Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and
escutcheon.
Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and
wheel handle stop.
Nibco Fig. 63 angle sillcock, with vacuum
breaker.
Guy Gray B-150 recessed stainless steel box
with 1-1/2" drain outlet with two angle pattern
hose bibbs.
Powers Type 413 pressure .equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376
deluxe shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2
GPM volume control. Shower head shall be
mounted at 6'-0" AFF.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15210-5
��I�3 0 -.
Shower Head SH'B'
Fixture Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower
control with check valves, stops, and chrome
plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376
deluxe shower head, univeral ball joint, 2-1/2
GPM volume control. Shower head shall be
mounted at 5'-6" AFF.
..a
Wall Hydrant WH
Fixture Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall hydrant with
integral vacuum breaker.
2.04 DRAINS r
A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. Provide a clamping
device for the floor membrane, where applicable.
B. All floor drains, shall have deep seal p-trap.
Shower Drain SD
Fixture Wade No. W-1102 with 5" NB top, cast iron
body
Floor Drain FD
Fixture Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron --
body.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ISOLATION VALVES
A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving
the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide
access doors in the ceiling or chase.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the
following specifications shall apply.
B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope `r
of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple
stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required
to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second.
C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15214-6 900-9264
D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain
the system.
E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves,
stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins.
F. Gas Lines: All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the
drawings, with special venting provisions.
G. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each low point
of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip pockets shall consist of a
nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop.
H. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas consuming
appliance.
I. All gas piping on the roof shall be supported as detailed on the drawings. Spacing of
supports shall be as specified under "Hangers and Supports".
3.02 TESTING
A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise
covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as
required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.
B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be
no leaks whatsoever.
C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with
water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting
system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the
pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with
water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the
highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be
filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in
the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts.
The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in S hours.
D. Gas Lines: Test with 15 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for
temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15210-7 900-9264
E -
SECTION 15280 - FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and provide plan layout of system for approval.
1.03 SCOPE
A. The entire building shall be protected by a automatic sprinkler system designed in
conformance with NFPA 13R, Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up
to and Including Four Stories in Heim
1.04 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS
A. The design and installation of the Automatic Sprinkler Systems and the Alarm and
Supervisory Systems shall be in strict accordance with all mandatory and recommended
provisions of the NFPA, FM, UBC, and UL publications. All recommended provisions of
the NFPA (National Fire Codes) listed below shall be considered as mandatory requirements.
B. Issues of the following publications, including revisions and amendment as of the date of
award of this contract, form a part of this specification.
1. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA)
2. No. 13R Sprinkler System
3. No. 70 National Electrical Code
4. No. 72C Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems
5. No. 24 Outside Protection
6. Factory Mutual System, Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation Publication (FM)
7. Approval Guide
8. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Publication (UL)
9. Approved Equipment Lists (with supplements).
1.05 QUALIFICATION OF THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Fire Protection System shall be installed by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic sprinkler and standpipe systems. The Contractor shall have a
"Certificate of Registration" and shall have in his employee a licensed "Responsible Managing
Employee", as provided for in Article 5.43-3 "Fire Protection Sprinkler Systems" of the
Texas State Board of Insurance, Insurance Code. The Owner may reject any proposed
installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications.
+e- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280-1 900-9264
I-
1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall submit complete working drawings of the sprinkler system and such
other descriptive data as the Architect may require to demonstrate compliance with the
contract documents.
B. Shop drawings will be submitted at one time to demonstrate that pertinent items of equipment
have been properly coordinated and will function properly with each other. No installation
work will be permitted prior to approval of complete shop drawings.
C. If departures from the contract drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of
such departures, including changes in related portions of the project and the reasons,
therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings and hydraulic calculations. Approved
departures shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.
D. Hydraulic calculations will be required in accordance with NFPA No. 13R.
1.07 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise the original shop drawings to agree
with the construction as actually accomplished. These drawings shall be delivered to the
Architect.
PART 2 - MATERIALS .
2.01 GENERAL
A. All material and equipment shall be new and the current standard products of the
manufacturer. Where two or more items of equipment performing the same function are
required, they shall be exact duplicates, produced by one manufacturer. However, component
parts need not be products of the same manufacturer.
B. All materials and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for systems of the type
indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise noted, and shall conform to the requirements of
NFPA No. 13R.
2.02 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The following is a listing of the materials and specifications. The list is comprehensive in
nature. It is not intended that all materials listed will necessarily be required, but that those _
required for the work be selected from this listing. All pipe and fittings shall be
non -galvanized, except where called for on the drawings or required by code. _
ITEM SIZE (INCL) SPECIFICATIONS
Pipe All Ferrous pipe as per NFPA 13R.
Fittings, All As per NFPA 13R.
Flanges
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280-2 500-9264
Threadolets Thru 2" Steel, ANSI B16.11 sockolets ASTM
A105
Weldolets
Plugs
Unions
Flange gaskets
Valves:
Globe valves
Angle valves
Gate valves
Gate valves
Butterfly valves
Check valve
Check valves
Auto ball drip
2" and larger Steel, 90 degrees STD only, ANSI
. All
Thru 2"
All
Thru 2"
Thru 2"
Thru 2"
2-1/2" &
Larger
2-1/2" &
Larger
Thru 2"
2-1/2" &
Larger
1/2 or 3/4
B 16.9, ASTM 105
Brass, square head, 125- lb, ANSI
B 16.5
Malleable iron, 300 lb bronze to iron
ground joint.
Red rubber 1/16 inch, ANSI B16.21
Screwed, bronze body, rising stem,
175 lb WWP, screw -in bonnet,
renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 97.
UL/FM approval not required.
Screwed, bronze body, rising stem,
175 lb. WWP, screw -in bonnet,
renewable disc, Kennedy Fig. 9B.
UL/FM approval not required.
Screwed, bronze body, OS&Y, 175 lb
WWP, Kennedy Fig. 66.
Flanged, iron body, OS&Y, 175 lb
WWP, Kennedy Fig. 68, electrical
supervisory switch.
Lug body, EPDM seat, ductile iron
body, bronze disc, 6" and above gear
operated, 175 lb. WWP, UL/FM
approved, electrical supervisory
switch.
Screwed, bronze body, 175 lb WWP,
horizontal swing, renewable disc,
Kennedy Fig. 442. UL/FM approval
not required.
Flanged, iron body, 175 lb WWP,
bolted bonnet, horizontal swing,
renewable seat & rubber faced disc,
Kennedy Fig. 126A.
Bronze, Grinnell Model F775.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280-3 900-9264
Sprinklers and Nozzles:
Automatic sprinkler
Chrome plated pendant or upright. =-
Water Flow Alarm Devices:
Water Flow Switch
r.,
Potter -Roemer 6200 Series, UL/FM
approved, 120 volt.
Miscellaneous:
._
Pipe hangers supports,
Approved type, in accordance
and connections
NFPA No. 13R requirements.
Pipe escutcheons
Chromium -plated iron or
chromium -plated brass, either one
piece or split pattern, held in place by
internal spring tension or setscrew.
Sprinkler escutcheon
Two-piece, finish to match sprinkler
except where otherwise specified on
drawings. Depth as required to
position sprinkler.
Sprinkler guard
Approved guard, standard baked red
enamel finish.
Hypochlorite
AWWA 300
Water Pressure gage
3-inch minimum dial, 0-300 psi
range, polished brass case,
Siamese
2-1/2"x2-1/2"xV chromium plated
flush mounted with caps, chains and
sillcock. Mark "AUTO SPKR" . _
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 JOINTS
A. Joints shall be the threaded type for 2" and smaller, and shall be welded or flanged for 2-1/2"
and larger.
B. Threaded Joints: Threads shall be concentric with the outside of the pipe and shall conform
to ANSI B2.1. Threaded joints shall be made tight with an approved thread joint compound
or tape. Joint compound shall be applied lightly but sufficiently to cover male threads only.
Leaking joint shall not be repaired by penning or packing.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280 900-9264
r,
a
A,
W
C. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be faced -true, provided with 1/16 inch red rubber
gaskets, and made square and tight. When made up, flange bolts shall extend through nuts by
at least one full thread. No flanges shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible
after erection.
D. Welded Joints: All welding, including methods and qualifications of welders, shall be in
strict accordance with the standards and requirements specified in NFPA Nos. 13R. All
welds are subject to inspection by the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to accept,
reject, or demand removal of welds which are in violation of these specifications. Welded
i branch connections to headers shall be made by use of threadolets, sockolets or weldolets type
fittings.
E. Cutting: Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements shown on the shop drawings and to
suit field conditions, and shall be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing.
All cuts shall be reamed to remove fins and burrs.
i
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Piping material, including valves and fittings, shall be delivered to the site in a clean and
protected condition. End seals of pipe, valves and flange covers shall be maintained in place,
being removed only as necessary for cleaning, fabrication, erection or for inspection by the
Contractor. Care shall be exercised in the handling and storage of all piping materials and
prefabricated piping so that contamination by moisture, grease, dirt, or injurious foreign
matter shall not occur.
B. The pipe shall be cut accurately to centerline measurements to suit field conditions, and shall
be carefully worked into place without forcing or springing. Piping shall be pitched to allow
C" proper drainage.
C. The interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be kept clean at all times. Pipe shall be
free from and burrs and shall be cleaned in accordance with cleaning procedures herein.
D. No flanges or unions shall be placed in locations which will be inaccessible after erection.
E. All valves shall be properly packed and made leakproof under the test pressures described.
F. All piping passing through walls shall be provided with pipe sleeves two pipe sizes larger than
the systems piping they accommodate or approved steel sleeves providing annular space
around the pipe. Annular space shall be made weather and watertight.
G. Where pipes pass through fire walls, fire partitions, or floor/ceiling assemblies, a fire seal of
mineral wool, or similar noncombustible material shall be packed between the pipe and
sleeve.
3.03 ESCUTCHEONS
7 A. Pipe escutcheons shall be provided at all finished surfaces where exposed piping passes
i through floors, walls or ceiling except in boiler, utility, or equipment rooms. Sprinkler
escutcheons shall be provided for all pendant heads through ceilings. Escutcheons shall be
!" fastened securely to the pipe.
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280-5 900-9264
r
3.04 SIGNS
A. All control drain and inspector's valves shall be provided with porcelainized metal
identification signs. All hydraulically designed systems shall be provided with a permanently
attached nameplate data sign as recommended by NFPA No. 13R.
3.05 SPRINKLER GUARDS
A. All sprinkler heads installed within 7 feet of the floor or otherwise subject to mechanical
damage shall be equipped with sprinkler guards.
3.06 TESTING _
A. Testing of the sprinkler systems and alarm systems shall be as prescribed by NFPA Pamphlet
No. 13R. Each test shall be in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner.
This representative shall sign the Certificate of Inspection as a witness of a successful test.
The Contractor shall deliver these certificates of inspection in duplicate to the Architect.
3.07 STERILIZATION y'
A. All new lines shall be flushed and sterilized with chlorine before acceptance for service.
Calcium hypochlorite powder, containing not less than 70 % available chlorine, shall be used
for sterilization. The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide a dosage of 100
ppm for at least 24 hours. At the conclusion of the 24 hour contract time, C12 residual should
be at least 20 ppm. The chlorinating material shall be mixed with treated water in an
acceptable container and injected directly into the system, the process being repeated until the
system is filled. All valves in the system shall be open and closed 3 times during the
procedure to insure that the sterilizing mixture is thoroughly and evenly distributed throughout
the system. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, the system shall be flushed with
water.
3.08 PROCEDURE FOR PLACING SYSTEMS IN SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall place the systems in service with the operating mediums after purging
operations are completed. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and tools required.
3.09 ELECTRICAL WORK _
A. All electrical work in connection with the installation of the fire protection system shall be
performed in accordance with Division 16.
3.10 SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS
A. The Contractor shall furnish spare heads in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 13R.
Heads shall be provided in a suitable cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion
to, the number of each type and temperature rating of heads installed. In addition to the spare
heads, the contractor shall furnish not less than one special sprinkler wrench per cabinet. The ,-
Cabinets shall be mounted at the system's riser.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15280-6 900-9264
SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.03 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs
and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying
drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL DUCTWORK
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on
the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance
with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to
be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure
class.
C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated tunung vanes. Make
all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2
times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend.
D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make
increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any
side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1"
in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate.
E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as
to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide
streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces,
except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to
exceed 10 % of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15320-1 900-9264
2.02 DUCT LINER
A. All sheet metal supply and return ducts from rooftop units, and outside and supply ducts from
fresh air ventilators shall be lined.
B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Manville "Linacoustic" mat faced
duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side.
C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a
mean temperature of 75 F.
D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation with
the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type
metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size
of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in
both dimensions to accommodate the lining. - No voids are permitted.
E. Use 100 % adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA'.
2.03 DUCT SEALER
A. All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal
surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of
Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place
metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint,
making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant.
B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system.
C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal.
2.04 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the
various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each
point where a branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance.
B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel
riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or
approved plastic in most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only
in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that
of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and
bearings as required to resist corrosion.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15320-2 900-9264
i
C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers
shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single
- point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked
enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades
shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic
dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be
mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity.
D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an
adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible
behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable
to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200
right angle worm gear regulator with 301 concealed damper regulator. On exposed or easily
accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be
fastened to the ducts.
E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets.
2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation
and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous
vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and
coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the
inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene
laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working
velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their
UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The
flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thenmaflex M-KE for low
pressure application.
B. Flex duct shall not exceed 6'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer
duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick duct insulation to make-up the
difference in length.
2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet
of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a minimum
separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the
flexible material itself.
B. The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by
Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant.
2.07 ROUND DUCT TAPS
A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass
ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive
locking nut and air scoop.
t LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15320-3 900-9264
r
2.08 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the -•-
tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories.
B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in
OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. All
other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job.
C. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the
duct with a minimum of four screws.
D. Where perforated supply grilles or diffusers are scheduled, they shall be of the type with
adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable.
E. Where ceiling mounted air distribution devices are shown and require a ceiling radiation
damper, the grille or diffuser shall be constructed of steel, aluminum is not acceptable.
F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, or Krueger will be acceptable.
2.09 SPIRAL WOUND DUCTS
A. Ductwork on the inlet and outlet of the Truck Exhaust System shall be spiral wound.
B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section. It shall be constructed according to the latest
edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with
the "HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, FIRST EDMON, published by the
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. except as may be --
abridged herein.
C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round =-
ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips.
All such ducts shall be delivered in standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the
site by power saw to insure proper fit and square alignment. _
D. Fittings used on round ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in direction shall
be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall contain not less _
than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree.
E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order that
the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside
diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal
diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when
checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not more
than 0.015 inch.
F. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with r
"Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with
couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be
thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 153204 * 900-9264 .
Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x 12 self -tapping
drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally spaced around the
circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on conduit
with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with
diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15320-5 900.9264
SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.03 SCOPE
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and
install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following
tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and
Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modem will be considered.
MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT.
Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated
Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199
Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239
Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109
Wall bracket All 150, 151, or 155
Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304
Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241
Pipe Rest All 295 or 291
Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280
Adjuster All 2381
2.02 HANGER RODS
A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows:
Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or
Copper Tube Supported
3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller
1/2" 3" and 4"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15330-1 900-9264
2.03 HANGER SPACING
A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable
sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The
following table gives minimum spacing for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be
more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or required by code.
Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet
3/4" and smaller
5
1" through 1-1/2"
7
2" and larger
10
All PVC lines
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS
A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to
expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports,
etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall
also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize
transmissions shall be used where specified or required.
B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line
shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10V on centers, with the additional
provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned.
C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately
support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and
install anchor base fittings or other approved supports.
D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be
supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and
terminating in a capped end resting on the floor.
E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be
supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the
wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured
items are not available in the proper size.
F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists,
piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On
piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15330-2 - 900-9264
G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be
supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on
rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized
for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings
shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the
trapezes.
H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material.
3.02 DUCT HANGERS
A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15330-3 900-9264
SECTION 15400 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.02 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.04 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described
herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All
surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically
excepted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be
described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also
where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data
shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by
r equipment manufacturers.
B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to
this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein.
C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure
NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as
adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings.
D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the
United States of America.
2.02 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following:
1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper, glass
scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper.
! 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.001" aluminum
foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper.
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15400-1 900-9264
i
B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed
Manville Zeston covers with taped seams.
2.03 SHIELDS
A. Provide shield of No. 16 U.S. standard gage galvanized metal to protect insulation at hangers
and supports on piping 3 inches and smaller. For pipe 4 to 6 inches, use 14 gage; and for
pipe 8 inches and larger, use 12 gage. Use a shield extending at least 6 inches on each side
of the support bearing area.
B. Under each shield on pipe 2" and larger, install a high density fiberglass insert equal to
Hamfab H Block, 20 lb. density, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly
engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation
materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special
materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards.
B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced.
All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied
and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he ~-
deems unacceptable.
3.02 APPLICATION OF INSULATION
A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and
accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered.
3.03 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings.
B. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglas
ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with an All Service jacket (ASJ).
Insulate valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation.
C. Domestic Cold Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II molded
glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate valves and
fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Vapor seal all
insulation.
D. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Manville Type II "Aerotube". Insulation may be slit flange type or _
threaded on during fabrication.
E. Duct Insulation: Refer to Section 'AIR DISTRIBUTION' for duct liner specification.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15400-2 900-9264
F. Concealed Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate with 2" thick, 3/4 lb. density,
Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied
FSKL vapor barrier jacket.
G. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out. On horizontal runs, lap top and
bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks
and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide
Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats.
H. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip.
I. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of
adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil with
glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of insulation until
they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a minimum of 2",
bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic adhesive.
END OF SECTION
-� LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15400-3 900-9264
1
SECTION 15500 EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified.
1.03 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as
specified herein.
B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown
or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA.
C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of
equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or
not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work
necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided.
D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally
connected, tested and placed in service.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and
the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have
been met, including:
1. Space requirements
2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size)
3. Capacities
4. Clearance for maintenance
5. Quality
6. Quantity
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. General service motors driving
through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements:
B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by
exposure, with a service factor of 1.0.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-1 900-9264
C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger:: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed
as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater.
D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or
enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15.
E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient,
dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15.
Motors shall have the minimum performance as scheduled below.
HP
RPM
FRAME MIN EFF
MIN POWER FACTOR
1
1800
143T
82
84
1-1/2
1800
145T
84
85
2
1800
145T
84
85
3
1800
182T
86
86
5
1800
184T
87
87
7-1/2
1800
213T
88
86
2.02 STARTERS
A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part
of the equipment as specified herein, shall
be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16.
Coordinate exact starter requirements and
details.
2.03 FLUE VENTS
A. Provide and install flue vents on water heater and hose dryer.
B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be
of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be
complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof
in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster.
Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a separation
in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and counterflashed
into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be watertight.
2.04 WATER HEATER
A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined,
jacketed, insulated package water heater.
B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas
pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot
designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame
is extinguished.
C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a
drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable codes.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-2 900-9264
D. Refer to drawings for capacities.
2.05 HOT WATER CIRCULATOR
A. The pump shall be an in -line, single stage, wet rotor type with the motor mounted directly to
the pump chamber. The pump shall be furnished as shown on the plans and installed in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. The pump shall be capable of
delivering 5 gallons per minute when operating at a total developed head of 5 feet of water
column. The pump shall be as manufactured by Grundfos Model UP15-18SF.
B. The pump chamber shall be constructed of corrosion resistant 304 stainless steel and rated at
145 psi working pressure. Furnish with flanges.
C. The impeller, impeller inlet cone, rotor can, and rotor cladding shall be constructed of
stainless steel. The impeller shall be secured directed to the motor shaft by means of a
stainless steel split cone. The motor shaft shall be constructed of aluminum oxide ceramic
and shall be supported by two radial bearings mounted in a stainless steel bearing plate and
rotor can. The pump shall be coupling or mechanical seal.
D. The motor for the circulator shall be rated at 1/33 horsepower for continuous duty operating
on 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz alternating current. The motor shall be cooled and
lubricated by the pumped fluid and shall require no scheduled maintenance.
E. The pump shall be supported such that the weight of the pump is not carried by the adjoining
pipe.
2.06 FANS
A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the
drawings.
r-
B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected than the specified fan
performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting
shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for
bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if
changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract.
C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet
horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected
for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified
rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be
flexible.
D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise
and vibration.
E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled.
F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-3 900-9264
G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
H. Fans shall have factory applied finish.
I. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type
with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant --
construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans
shall be resiliently mounted.
J. Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels.
K. All fans shall have bird screens.
L. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of welded
construction.
M. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck.
N. Wall Mounted Propeller Fan: Ventilator shall be belt driven axial type. Drive frame
assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle. Mounting members shall be slotted
to allow adjustment and centering of propeller over spun venturi.
O. Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub with gussets
welded to three Quarters of the blade length. The hub bore shall be a machined steel insert
welded to the hub. A standard square key with two set screws and two retaining rings shall
lock the propeller to the shaft.
O. The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted in sealed ball bearings. Fully
machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall
be adjustable and sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower.
Q. Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities.
R. The fan shall be mounted as shown with sheet metal connector to the louver with a flexible
duct connector.
S. Fan shall be Greenheck or equal. _
T. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Unitary exhaust fans shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They
shall be centrifugal, direct driven fans in a sound insulated sheet metal housing for installation
above the ceiling. There shall be a finished integral metallic grille for each unit. Provide a
backdraft damper, duct thru the roof and suitable rain cap for each. Fans shall be Penn,
Greenheck, or equal.
2.07 GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATERS
A. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings. The heaters shall r
be Re-Verba-Ray as manufactured by Detroit Radiant Products.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-4 900-9264
B. Each heater shall be complete with the following components:
1. Frame and burner assembly, suspended from structure at the height directed.
2. Reflector constructed of .050 mirror polished aluminum.
3. Ceramic Radiator.
4. Secondary radiating rods or screen.
5. Automatic firing assembly including a gas pressure regulator, firing valve, gas stop and
pilot.
6. Electrical controls including remote thermostat, on -off switch, and prewired control
r^ assembly.
C. Each unit shall be equipped with 24 volt automatic ignition and 24 volt thermostat.
D. The heater infra -red element and secondary radiating surface shall be warranted for ten years.
E. Heater shall have a minimum of 85 square inches of radiating surface area.
F. Each heater shall be suspended at the height directed, and at the angle directed.
G. Provide and install the gas fired radiant heaters indicated on the drawings.
2.08 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS - SINGLE ZONE
A. The contractor shall famish and install package rooftop units as shown and scheduled on the
contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with this specification and
perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
B. Units shall be as manufactured by Trane, Carrier, Lennox or York.
C. General Unit Description: Units furnished and installed shall be combination gas
heating/electric cooling packaged rooftops as scheduled on contract documents and these
specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be ARI Standard 210 certified. Units shall
consist of insulated weather tight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil,
condenser fans, evaporator coil, return air filters, supply motors and drives, gas -fired heating
section.
D. Units shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-22.
E. Units shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate
caution areas. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered -for identification.
F. Capacity: Some latitude will be allowed to compensate for differing unit manufacturers.
However, units shall not be submitted with total capacity less than 10 % below the scheduled
,. capacity nor less than 5% of the sensible capacity.
G. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with
removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access doors and
removable panels of minimum 20 gauge. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 500 hours in
salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B 117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all
service/maintenance from one side of the unit. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece
construction or where seams exists, it shall be double hemmed and gasket sealed.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-5 900-9264
H. Access Panels: Water and airtight panels with handles shall provide access to filters, heating
section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil section, and unit control section. .
I. Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and
return openings for water integrity.
J. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels in contact
with the return and conditioned air stream.
K. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the units and shall be
accessible thru access panels. One inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters shall be
provided with the provisions within the unit for 2 inch thick filters to be field provided and
installed.
L. Fans and Motors: Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double
inlet, centrifugal type fan. Provide self -aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings
with permanent lubrication fittings. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple
speed, dynamically balanced supply fans. Provide units 6 1/4 tons and above with belt
driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves. Outdoor and indoor fan motors shall be
permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection. Outdoor fans shall be
direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge
position. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with
key -way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
M. Gas Fired Heating Section: Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall
be integral to unit. UL approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream
from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide
capability for gas piping connection through side of unit.
N. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.
O. Gas burner shall be forced combustion type power burner, negative pressure gas valve,
manual shut-off, hot surface ignition, and flame sensing safety control
P. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to
ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Upon a failure to ignite, two attempts of ignition
will occur before lockout of the ignition system.
Q. Combustion blower shall be centrifugal type fan with built-in thermal overload protection on
fan motor.
R. Heat Exchanger: Provide drum and tube heat exchanger of free floating design manufactured
from 18-gauge aluminized steel. Factory pressure and leak tested. Heat exhanger shall be
warrantied for 10 years.
S. Limit Controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of
excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.
T. Evaporator Coil: Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper
tubing coil.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-6 900-9264 �-
U. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure test
at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.
V. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steel with
external connections.
W. Condenser Section: Provide internally finned 3/8 " seamless copper tube mechanically
bonded to aluminum fins. Factory pressure tested to 450 psig.
X. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically
balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection
in a weather tight casing.
Y. Hail Guard Screen: Entire condenser coil shall be covered with 18 gauge, 1/2" mesh
galvanized wire screen. The screen shall be installed on the 24 gauge stand-off clips to allow
I" clearance between coil and screen.
Z. Refrigeration System: Provide hermetic reciprocating compressors with heat treated forged
steel or cast iron shafts, aluminum alloy connecting rods, automotive type pistons, rings to
prevent gas leakage, internal suction and discharge valves, crankcase heater, and centrifugal
oil pump. Internally isolated motors on springs. Provide suction gas cooled motor with over
temperature and over current protection. Compressors shall be warrantied for 5 years.
AA. Provide with thermostatic temperature control in the compressor windings, to protect against
excessive temperatures, high and low pressure conditions.
BB. Provide each unit with factory supplied and piped liquid line filter drier, suction and liquid
line Schmeder valves.
CC. Operating Controls: Provide NEC Class 11, adjustable zone control to control heating stages
�-- in sequence with delay between stages, compressor stages and supply fan to maintain zone
temperature setting.
1. Provide automatic changeover control with (off -heat -auto -cool), and fan control switch
(auto -on).
2. Provide plexiglass locking thermostat cover.
3. Locate zone control in room as shown.
2.09 FRESH AIR VENTILATOR
A. Fresh air ventilator shall be equal to Semco standard FV Series Energy Recovery units for
indoor air preconditioner.
B. Casing: Standard panels shall be 20 gauge galvanized solid exterior skins, lined with 1/2 inch
r' thick synthetic rubber insulation. The exterior of the unit shall be coated with a two part
epoxy painting system for corrosion protection.
C. Access: Access to components shall be provided through a large, tightly sealed and easily
�. removable access panel Access panels shall be constructed of the same materials as the unit
casing and use Semco's standard hardware. The wheel cassette shall be easily removable
from the unit. The bottom of the unit shall also be removable for access.
Poll LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-7 900-9264
f .
D. Total Energy Wheel: The media shall be a fluted, honeycomb design to provide for laminar
flow, to prevent the leakage of the exhaust air to the supply air through the media, and to
allow for the use of a purge section to minimize contaminant carry-over. The rotor media
shall be made of aluminum which is coated with a non -migrating, 3 angstroms molecular
sieve desiccant, specifically developed for the selective transfer of water vapor. Verification
in writing shall be presented from the desiccant manufacturer confirming that the internal pore
diameter distribution inherent in the desiccant being provided limits adsorption to materials
having a kinetic diameter of 3 angstroms or less (water molecule is 2.8 angstroms). All
media surfaces shall be coated with a non -migrating solid absorbent layer prior to being
formed into the honeycomb media structure to insure that all surfaces are coated and that
adequate latent capacity is provided. Desiccant coatings that are sprayed on or dip coated, or
desiccants that must be reapplied over time are not acceptable. Equal sensible and latent
recovery efficiencies shall be provided, and clearly documented through a certification
program conducted in accordance with ASHRAE 84 and ARI 1050 standards. The media
shall be cleanable with low temperature steam, hot water or light detergent, without degrading
the latent recovery.
E. Wheel media shall be independently tested to document a flame spread of less than 25 and a
smoke generation rating of less than 50 when tested in accordance with ASTME784. This
independent wheel test data shall be provided as part of the submittal.
F. Rotor Housing: The rotor housing shall be a structural framework which limits the deflection
of the rotor due to air pressure. The housing shall be made of galvanized steel to prevent
corrosion. The rotor cassette shall be easily removable from the Energy Recovery Unit to
facilitate rigging (if necessary) and ease of service. The wheel cassette design shall use flange
bearings for long life. The casing design shall also incorporate a purge to limit contaminant
carry-over.
G. Fans: Fan ratings are based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. Fans
shall be DWDI, designed with a scroll type housing. Fan blades shall be statically and
dynamically balanced and tested prior to shipment.
H. Fans shall be driven by multiple speed direct drive motors located at the fan inlet or by fixed
speed motors using belts and sheaves.
I. Filters: The filter media shall be an average efficiency of 25-30% based upon the ASHRAE
Test Standard. The filter shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories as Class 2.
J. Electrical: Unit shall require a single point power connection with a voltage as listed on the
schedule. The electrical panel shall include the necessary components and contactors to start
and stop the system from a remote location.
2.10 VEHICLE EXHAUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall source capture 100%
of the exhaust emissions directly at the tail pipe of the vehicle and exhaust those emissions to
a specified area safely outside the building. When the vehicle returns to the station, simply
sleeve the nozzle over the tail pipe, pull up on the hose handle, and connect the electromagnet
assembly to the anchor plate mounted to the vehicle. The nozzle . remains in place over the
tail pipe by spring tension created between the dimensional relationship from the tail pipe to
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-8 900-9264
the anchor plate. Upon vehicle exit, the electromagnet and anchor plate connection serves as
the lead pulling component for the hose and nozzle which moves with the vehicle in either
direction of travel, forward or reverse. As the tail pipe passes the exit threshold, the
electromagnet is automatically de -energized by a limit switch that contacts a disconnection
plate allowing the nozzle and hose to smoothly separate from the vehicle. After release, the
•- balancer safely retracts the hose assembly in a stored position ready to receive the vehicle for
connection to the exhaust extraction system upon reentry. No positive locking device nor
moving parts shall be permitted to be connected to the tail pipe. Bending over to connect the
,.. exhaust system and expose the operator to harmful exhaust fumes is not permitted. Upon
disconnection, the hose assembly shall not be permitted to swing wide, possibly endangering
personnel, and the hose shall remain at the door ready for connection.
B. Fan Auto -Start: As the emergency apparatus approaches the facility, the Fan Auto -Start
system automatically starts the exhaust fan, thus the fan is at full rpm prior to entry or
connection. This is accomplished by an FCC approved radio transmitter mounted in the
vehicle sending a signal to a receiver to start the fan. This permits the operator to connect the
exhaust system to the vehicle without being exposed to noxious exhaust fumes. The fan
remains in the "on" position for the duration that the vehicle is running. The fan does not
shut down until after the vehicle has been turned off and can be preset from 45 seconds - 10
minutes with an adjustable timer. Upon emergency dispatch of the vehicle, the exhaust fan
shall automatically start prior to the engine being energized. The fan will automatically shut
down after the apparatus has left the building and the timer engages. The control console
shall be a NEMA-1 enclosure with a dual safety lock cover. Internal components are UL
approved; manufactured by General Electric.
1 C. Optional Fan Activation: The exhaust fan shall be operated in conjunction with an automatic
off delay timer, 0-10 minute variable setting, wired to the open relay of the door opener or a
r-- central tone system. This allows for automatic operation of the exhaust fan when opening the
vehicle exit or entry door. alternatively, the fan shall also have the capability to be operated
from a 0-20 minute manual override timer to be located in the vehicle bay area at a
r convenient access location.
D. Guide Track: The horizontal guide track supports and stores the overhead hose and is
r- mounted overhead and to the side of the vehicle. Mounted to the horizontal guide track is a
6" diameter flexible hose with individual inner trolleys which ride inside the guide track and
permit the flexible hose to expand and contract while the vehicle is moving. The horizontal
guide track shall be made of 12 gauge low carbon strip steel, cold formed into a channel
measuring 1.5625" square, with one side having a continuous open slot measuring 0.4375"
wide, giving an overall throat depth of 1.5". Guide tracks shall be provided such that no
incremental length shall be greater than 20 feet without a 4 bolt flange -to -flange connection
.- arrangement for field assembly to the length as shown or indicated on the drawings. Guide
tracks shall have a non -toxic alkyd enamel rust preventive finish. Guide tracks shall be
supported by structural vertical supports, i.e. schedule 170 unistrut and/or 1/4" angle iron,
connected to the ceiling/wall of the facility.
r'
r-
r., LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-9 900-9264
a:
E. Guide Track Clamping Brackets: Each horizontal guide track shall be provided with an
adjustable self aligning clamping bracket to support and connect the guide track to the
installation brackets. Clamping brackets shall be of 0.1875" electro-plated galvanized steel
bar and formed in a configuration which wraps tightly around and is bolted to the guide track.
clamping brackets shall be 1.625" wide x 4.125" high, and assembled to the guide track at a
distance no greater than 9'6" on center.
F. Horizontal Extraction Hose: The horizontal extraction hose is suspended from the horizontal
guide track which stores the hose up and out of the way to ensure a safer approach to the
apparatus during a run. The horizontal extraction hose shall be 6" in diameter and of suitable
flexibility and length to prevent premature wear on the hose material from being fully
stretched on a regular basis. Therefore, the hose must be able to withstand 100,000 runs
without tearing, perforating or collapsing (under normal use with proper installation and
care). The material for the hose shall be Trevira fabric covered with HYPALON (CSM,
Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B 1.
The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit
continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The helix
shall be external and made of galvanized steel or aluminum. The helix shall have high
flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone, and weather resistance._ The hose
compression ratio shall not be less than 6:1. The helix shall be arranged to have eyelets
clamped and pressed approximately every 12". The eyelets are to be used for suspending the
hose from individual nylon trolleys, maintenance free, which will be inserted in the horizontal
guide track upon assembly at the job site. Hose trolleys shall have an overall diameter and
width to allow a tolerance of no greater than 0.046" clearance between cylinder ends and
inner wall of the guide track. Once installed in the guide track, the clearance between the top
of the horizontal hose and the bottom of the guide track shall 5 2" at any given point,
whether the hose is extended or compressed. This concept shall prevent any continuous
hanging or drooping loops of hose which could obstruct or hinder movement of people or
vehicles in the work place. At the end of the flexible hose shall be a minimum 6-1/4'
diameter round galvanized steel connector as a coupler for flexible to solid duct work. The
connector shall be arranged to fasten to the end of the guide track and be adjustable upon
assembly for alignment to solid duct work.
G. Upper Vertical Extraction Hose: The upper vertical extraction hose shall be 6" in diameter,
and of suitable flexibility to have a compression ratio of 6:1. The hose material shall be
Trevira fabric covered with HYPALON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polyethylene). The hose
shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B l . The hose shall be capable of withstanding
temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an
intermittent usage basis. The external helix shall be made of galvanized steel or aluminum,
not exposed to the internal air stream, to maintain a smooth bore interior hose for minimum
static pressure losses and maximum efficiency. The helix shall have high flexibility and be
able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone and weather resistance.
H. Balancer: The balancer shall be provided to add or release tension to the vertical hose and
nozzle assembly away from the vehicle as it leaves the building, when the electromagnet
disengages. The balancer also permits the vertical hose and nozzle assembly to be suspended
safely off the floor in the storage position when not in use. The balancer shall be of a cone
shape drum design with centrifugal brake and reverse spring characteristics, mounted on a 12
gauge steel formed bracket. The balancer is to be equipped with 27 feet of cord which shall
feed from the balancer cone, penetrate a steel elbow (which joins the horizontal and vertical
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-10 1900-9264
hoses) and is fastened internally at the electromagnet coupler, so the cord is internal to the
upper vertical extraction hose. The centrifugal brake shall ensure that the cord is wound onto
r'- the drum at a low speed. The reverse spring characteristic shall have the full spring power to
the balancer when the cord is wound onto the drum. The spring power shall be gradually and
continually reduced the farther the cord is pulled (unwound) off the balancer cone. , At 26.4'
;^ of cord extension, lifting power shall be 27 ft. lbs. of torque. The withdrawal shall be 50%
greater than the lifting power. The cone shaped drum and cord assembly shall be exposed for
ease of adjustment to tension if required. Mounted to the Balancer formed bracket shall be 6"
rx 901, 1.5 radius, 24 gauge coated steel elbow which is to join the horizontal extraction hose
to the vertical extraction hose with 6" to 5" reducer hose clamps and covers as provided.
Attached to the backside of the balancer formed bracket is an all steel trolley which inserts
�.. into the horizontal guide track upon field assembly. The trolley framework shall be welded
and be constructed of 25" hardened steel and fitted with no less than six steel ball bearing
rollers which freely roll in the guide track.
Microswitch: Mounted to the balancer formed bracket shall be a 24V microswitch which,
acting as a limit switch, is factory pre -wired to energize and de -energize the electromagnet
upon contact with a disconnection plate positioned on the horizontal guide track.
J. Disconnected Plate: Affixed to the end of the guide track nearest the exit door, shall be a
galvanized steel disconnection plate. The disconnection plate shall serve as the contact point
for the microswitch which, upon contact with the disconnection plate, shall de -energize the
electromagnet to separate the hose assembly from the vehicle. The separation of the entire
hose assembly from the vehicle is a one step process whereby no stress or strain is transferred
from the vehicle to the exhaust equipment. Numerous mechanical functions to achieve nozzle
separation such as valve activation, pneumatic deflation, and pulling forces to remove the
nozzle from the tail pipe are not permitted. The disconnection plate shall be an adjustable
bolted attachment and shall be positioned upon installation to create a nozzle release point
between V to 2' inside the door threshold as the vehicle exits the building.
K. End Stop: The guide track shall be equipped with an end stop which is designed to stop the
travel of the entire hose and nozzle assembly. The stopping action itself must be spring
cushioned to prevent the hose and nozzle assembly from coming to an abrupt and immediate
halt. A coiled spring end stop is inserted internally at the end of the guide track nearest to
the exit door. The spring must be safety bolted in place at the opposite end of the contact
point of the balancer trolley.
L. Electromagnet Assembly: An electromagnet assembly shall be used as the means of keeping
the nozzle and hose assembly attached to the vehicle, whether at rest or as it moves to the
r point of exit. The electromagnet shall be 24V, DC with power supplied via an insulated
conductor encapsulated within the helix of the upper hose. The electromagnet assembly shall
consist of an electromagnet disc, an manual override switch, and an anchor plate. The
electromagnet disc assembly shall consist of a 2.75" diameter by 1.5625"-wide cup which is
externally mounted to the side of a 6" diameter galvanized steel sleeve. The steel sleeve shall
serve as both the mounting point of the electromagnet as well as the coupler of the upper
vertical hose and lower hose assembly with nozzle. The steel sleeve shall be 5" in diameter,
24 gauge galvanized steel and have a rolled bead at each end to secure the hoses via hose
clamps. The electromagnet disc assembly shall be slightly recessed within a hard resilient
plastic cup, measuring 2.75" in diameter by 1.5625" deep by 0.0625" thick. The plastic cup
also serves as a guide for ease of connection to the anchor plate mounted on the vehicle. The
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-11 900-9264
disc consists of an outer 0.125" thick metal ring encased in bakalyte which in turn surrounds
a 1.25" diameter solid metal disc. These metal components shall serve as the energized
contact points to the anchor plate on the vehicle. The entire width of the cup assembly shall
be protected by a 0.0625" thick molded rubber collar, formed to be of a diameter greater
than 3.25", creating an anti -scratching cover. The formed collar shall also be of a smooth
and rounded configuration to prevent hooking or catching on external devices of the vehicle.
M. Manual Override Switch: A manual override switch shall be easily accessible to disconnect
the hose assembly while washing the vehicle or accessing storage compartments. The manual
override switch shall be mounted externally, located 900 to the right side of the electromagnet
disc assembly and facing the operator. The purpose of the switch shall be to manually de -
energize the electromagnet, allowing the hose and nozzle assembly to come away unrestrained
from the vehicle when in the parked position within the building. The switch shall be a
normally closed, single pole, single throw (NC-SPST), spring loaded, momentary ON with a
black matte rocking actuator. The switch shall be UL Recognized, CSA Approved and rated
for 6A, 250VAC..The switch shall be surrounded and mounted in a closed cell neoprene
jacket, 1.25" wide. The jacket is epoxy coated to the outside of the collar and wraps 90
degrees to the electromagnet, but protrudes no greater than 0.875" externally off the side
wall. Power is fed to the switches as an integral function of the vertical hose, which in turn
feeds the electromagnet.
N. Anchor Plate: The anchor plate shall be mounted on the vehicle to allow the operator, in an
upright position, to connect the electromagnet. The anchor plate shall have an outer circular
holder made of hard resilient plastic, which measures 4.365" in diameter and has an outer rim
thickness of 0.625". The inside diameter of the rim shall be 3.3125" which allows adequate
clearance for operator ease of connection to the electromagnet. Recessed in the center of the
holder shall be a finished steel disc measuring 2.4375" in diameter and 0.21875" thick, and
held in place with a set screw. The backside of the circular holder shall be flat, smooth, and
with no protrusions. There shall also be two pass through holes on the backside for field
installation of the anchor plate to the vehicle. The backside of the metal plate shall have two
tapped holes for receiving two machine screws upon field assembly to the vehicle. The
anchor plate shall be positioned on the vehicle in relation to the vertical and horizontal
centerlines of the tail pipe outlet. The horizontal distance shall be ± 3" beyond the vertical
centerline toward the front of the vehicle. The vertical range shall be 24" (+4" - 1 ") from
the horizontal centerline. Deviations to the location of the anchor plate beyond the
dimensional parameters previously described are to be approved solely by an authorized
representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system.
O. Lower Vertical Hose: The lower vertical hose shall be 6" in diameter and be formed to easily
connect the nozzle to the tail pipe. The hose diameter shall exceed the tail pipe diameter to
ensure source capture of 100% of all exhaust fume volume emissions. The typical engine and
truck pipe diameter is 5". A 4" diameter hose, which is smaller than the exhaust discharge
point, shall not be permitted as it does not have the volume capacity to handle all fumes
emitted. The hose material shall be Trevira fabric covered with GYPALON (CSM, Chloro-
sulfonated polyethylene). The hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The
hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-12 - 900-9264
0
P.M
and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The entire hose assembly
shall be capable of handling pump/load tests as required on'a daily basis. The nozzle permits
an ambient air mix in the air stream to immediately reduce exhaust emission temperatures by
t at least 50% at the point of capture. The reduced air stream temperatures prolong component
life by not permitting thermal breakdown of materials. The galvanized steel helix shall be
completely rubber encapsulated.
P. Nozzle: The flexibility between the electromagnet collar assembly and the nozzle shall be
such that the operator never has to touch the nozzle for connection, but can maneuver the
nozzle to the tail pipe while the operator grips the hose handle. As the operator
simultaneously positions the electromagnet to the anchor plate, tension will be automatically
applied to the nozzle face, created by an internal leaf spring assembly, which will hold the
nozzle face firmly in place over the tail pipe. The positioning of the electromagnet on the
vehicle, combined with the tension created at the nozzle, shall not allow the nozzle to come
away from the tail pipe until the electromagnet is either automatically or manually de -
energized. Manually detaching the electromagnet from the anchor plate, while still energized,
shall not be allowed. The nozzle shall be constructed of both metal and rubber, with no
internal movable parts related to the connection of the nozzle to the tail pipe. The inlet
diameter at the nozzle is oversized to allow maximum airflow capacity for large engines
and/or pump tests. The nozzle permits ambient air into the heated air stream when the
vehicle is running and immediately reduces the exhaust temperature and eliminates thermal
breakdown of materials. The inlet boot of the nozzle is to be made of EPDM rubber, and
bonded to a sturdy 24 gauge steel conical reducer. When at rest and away from the vehicle,
the nozzle and the lower hose shall constantly maintain a form which causes the inlet plane of
the nozzle to be facing upward from the floor, on an approximate 300 angle. The purpose of
this configuration shall be to allow the operator a clear visual perspective of the nozzle inlet
as it is being mounted the tail pipe upon vehicle connection. This upward configuration of the
nozzle shall be accomplished by means of an internally fixed specially formed leaf spring
affixed to the conical reducer. The design of the nozzle shall allow for maximum flexibility
to accept a variety of tailpipe configurations. Tail pipe extensions may be required to bring
the pipe to the side of the chassis. Tail pipe adapters or mechanical pipe modifications are
not permitted. For the nozzle assembly, no positive locking devices or a concept of a positive
locking device, pneumatics, internal or external air hoses, wires, airbags, valves or
precautionary devices for pneumatic bursting pressure shall be permitted or allowed.
Q. Installation: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as indicated and recommended by
the manufacturer. Welding and brazing shall conform to ASME-17. Slip joints shall be
sealed. Riser duct shall be supported to the structure as indicated on the drawings. Main
duct shall be attached to building structural members.
R. Exhaust System Suspension: Installation height of guide track shall be between 10' to 16'
range or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The guide track shall be installed
approximately 14" from the side of the vehicle and > 12" away from the side edge of the
exit door. The guide track for the exhaust system shall include corrosion resistant brackets
for ease of mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a
minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter (structural
grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for masonry installation shall be 0.5" x
3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4" sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry connection.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-13 ' 900-9264
S. Testing: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the indicated air
quantities within 10 percent at the conditions shown. Control devices shall be set to control at
the points indicated or directed. Any fans with bearings shall be lubricated, and the speed,
direction and rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as running correctly. The
running current of each motor shall be checked and verified as correct. Upon completion and
prior acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system shall be tested at the operating
conditions to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency. Operating tests
shall cover a period of not less then 2 hours for each system, and all tests will, if requested,
be conducted in the presence of the owner. If tests do not demonstrate satisfactory operation
of the exhaust system, deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All instruments, facilities,
and labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by the Contractor.
T. Training: The Contractor, or authorized approved personnel, shall provide training to the
Owner (or appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of and maintenance of the
vehicle exhaust removal system installed and specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at
least 7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15550-14 - 900-9264
r
0
SECTION 15600 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 NOTE
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.02 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper
flows of air, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully
described hereinafter.
B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust,
r and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to
the building.
r- C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the
i. .
system.
D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that
satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions.
E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial
adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial
adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce
the proper conditions in each conditioned space.
F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship
between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final
setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days
in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two
degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period.
G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans shall be varied as required to secure a
maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the
total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the
Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the
Owner, to attain the specified air volumes.
�.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15600-1 900-9264
1
H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data:
1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately
controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement.
2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature
tabulation specified above.
3. Air quantities at each air handling device.
4. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other
components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of
CFM handled.
5. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading
shall be listed.
I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed
supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any
abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure
and a total of 4 copies shall be provided.
J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings,
readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate.
1.03 INSTRUCTIONS
A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and
maintenance of all equipment.
B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation
of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a
parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 15600-2 900-9264
SECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART1 GENERAL
L01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this
Section.
1.02 ELECTRICAL LINES
A. General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these specifications shall be run
as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as
required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and
satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of
electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building
necessitate deviating from these standards.
B. General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of
the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because
of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while
they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of
the general construction to precede that general construction.
C. Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of electrical
lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation details. The
Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and
structural conditions, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by
the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated,
satisfactorily operating installation.
D. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of
the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them.
Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general
plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by
a;asurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall
be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any
reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of
location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without
additional cost to the Owner.
E. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material
and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to
install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange
for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary
on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary
changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense.
fr-LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 - 1 900-9264
r
F. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus
and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be
checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural
conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds.
G. Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the conduit in
order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The
installation shall be coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall
govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting
fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function
would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
H. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the
most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be
contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close
as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
I. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications
shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the
Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary
to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment.
J. Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the
work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and
working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether
specifically mentioned or not.
K. Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the Drawings and
Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work
under Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective Electrical drawings, he
shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is
received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as
indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications.
1.03 DMENSIONS
A. General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all
dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same.
No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual
dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found
shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work.
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 - 2 900-9264
r
F
4:
e
1.04 INSPECTION OF SITE
P—
i
A. General: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing electrical
installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect
the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the
work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the
new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure
to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with
removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work.
1.05 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and
control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of
these specifications. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this
project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up
under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of
wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the
Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual
requirements, actual requirements shall govern.
1.06 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and
do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner.
1.07 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended
by the manufacturer.
1.08 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified.
Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for which the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be lista3 by the Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label.
B. Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered
in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's
opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an
evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited
to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be applicable to major
manufacturers' items of equipment.
C. Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and
on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work
until the final acceptance of the job.
�- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 3 900-9264
1
D. Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and
appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his
contract.
E. Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all
construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade.
1.09 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to
properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all
required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site,
the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of
apparatus in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure
on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the
Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question.
1.10 PERMITS, FEE, ETC.
A. General: The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit
from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including
electric services. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on
this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering,
connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees
and charges required by ordinance, law, 'codes and these specifications.
1.11 TESTING
A. General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various
tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local
authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
1.12 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national
codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as
interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final
execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these
specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor
shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required
illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the
changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the
installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the
work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 = 4 900=9264
r-
1.13 TERMINOLOGY
A. "Furnish, Provide, Install": Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install,"
"provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and
equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the
Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary.
B. Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise
called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material.
C. "Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
D. "Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
E. "Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period.
F. Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be
described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
1.14 COOPERATION
A. General: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall
coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the
end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work
in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be
handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time.
1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between
trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections
shall be coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
B. Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the
ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling
plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure
compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the
Contractor at his expense.
C. Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level,
square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 - 5 900-9264
1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural
and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors
or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that
appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the
supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting
openings larger than required or in wrong locations.
B. Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would
tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such
cutting.
C. Patching: ' The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching
of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage
resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder.
D. Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and
patching required with all trades.
E. Existing Surfaces: In all spaces where new work under Division 16 is installed and no other
alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall
be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen
skilled in the affected trade.
F. Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each
respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the
remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to
prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members,
supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect.
1.17 PAINTING
A. Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows:
1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and
then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel
of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous
metal.
3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is
visible.
1.18 LARGE APPARATUS
A. General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building,
and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought
to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure
is completed.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 - 6 900-9264
1.19 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. General: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for
elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section,
to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid
obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to
use. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless
otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided
to the Architect for his information.
1.20 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A. General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications.
The Contractor tinder each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be
furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The
Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of
work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of
the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment.
B. Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature
different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally
connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that
indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16000 7 900-9264
SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's
catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction
boxes.
1.03 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways,
conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings,
supporting devices, and other accessories required.
1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General
Requirements. Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on
site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time
period. Protect conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above
grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protest PVC conduit
from sunlight.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
FLUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 1 900-9264
B. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
The contractor shall verify all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the
wiring system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 - - CONDUITS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or
galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to
Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy,
Allied or approved equivalent.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a
slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797;
conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved
equivalent.
C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel; galvanized outside
with protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 1242;
conforming to ANSI Standard C80.6; Allied, Republic Steel, or approved equivalent.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial
Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL
listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or
interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride
cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri-
flex type "LA" or approved equivalent.
F. PVC Conduit: Type 80 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial
use; Carlon or approved equivalent.
2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory trade steel threaded couplings
conforming to ANSIINEMA FBI; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside
and outside box or cabinet.
B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw
Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors
where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. Otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings
and connectors. Couplings shall conform to ANSUNEMA FBI. The connectors shall have
insulated throats so as to not damage the insulation during wire pulling operations.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 2 900-9264
7
r
C. Couplings and Terminations for Intermediate Metal Conduit: Same as for rigid steel
conduit.
D. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSIINEMA FBI;
T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at connections between flexible and
rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat,
steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
�. E. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to
ANSUNEMA FBI; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections
between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon
insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
F. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 80 heavy wall, high impact rigid
virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3
and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. PVC couplings and
solvent cement by the same manufacturer as the PVC conduit.
2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONDUIT
A. Description: Provide conduit expansion joints with internal ground and external bonding
r" jumper, 0-Z Type AX or approved equivalent.
2.04 WIREW AYS
rA. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete
with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or
r' approved equivalent.
B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover
which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood.
2.05 OUTLET BOXES
A. General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified.
B. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after
fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent.
C. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FBI, cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Binds,
Appleton, Pyle National or approved equivalent.
2.06 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers.
B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use
standard outlet boxes.
n
1
i
,.. LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 3 900-9264
C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets
as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as cabinets, secured
with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. --
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic _
tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in'machinery and
electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless
otherwise noted.
3.03 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Underground Installations:
1. Type: Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
2. In or under slab on grade: Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
3. Minimum size: 3/4 inch. _
B. Outdoor Locations Above Grade:
1. Type: Rigid steel conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
C. In Slab Above Grade:
1. Type: Schedule 80 PVC.
2. Minimum size: 3/4 inch.
D. Wet and Damp Locations:
1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit.
2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
E. Dry Locations:
1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal
conduit.
3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage:
Rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS _
A. Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install
raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 4 1 .900-9264
7
B. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations,
parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate
7 headroom.
C. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Make
field bends with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate
bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Make bends and offsets so the inside
diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same
plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel Do not install bends or offsets in which
conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
D. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
E. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and deflection where
conduit crosses control and expansion joints.
F. Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
G. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or
excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be
installed.
H. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long and not
more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other
devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or
wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
I. Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit
at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required.
r J. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam
1 and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then
keep raceways at least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed.
�» Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers
and other like objects operating at high temperatures.
K. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing
raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed,
seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and
moisture condensation within the raceways.
L. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push
pennies or other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from
entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the
vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors.
M. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill
any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage
of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general,
similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - S 900-9264
N. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or
through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
O. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing
conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future
installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12 inches
of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing
complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All
lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds.
3.05 JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS
A. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after
threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards,
support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with
insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not
acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit
systems.
B. Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut
ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely.
C. Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the
manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat of cement
to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty minutes, minimum.
D. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the
raceway to 'enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where
terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one
outside the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into
the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are
used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples
so no threads are exposed.
3.06 TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLE RACEWAYS
A. 2-inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install in maximum
lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Install pull
or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.
3.07 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space
hangers more closely where required by conditions.
B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or
U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 6 900-9264
r
C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized
r malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4"
and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material.
Arrange supports to prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation.
D. Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above
metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable
type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels.
E. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above
removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support
them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to
attach conduits to supporting members. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling
panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment
through the ceiling panels.
F. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same_ elevations,
they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal angle
iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the
suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support.
Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Group related conduits together.
Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit.
3.08 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT IN SLAB
A. General: Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Route conduit from point-to-point. Install conduit in center of floor slab and leave at least 1
inch concrete cover. Do not cross conduits in slabs.
B. Stub -ups: Where conduit turns up out of floor slabs, change from plastic to rigid galvanized
steel conduit below finished floor. Do not extend any nonmetallic conduit above finished
floor. Wrap all steel conduits and fittings in slab with .020 inch thick vinyl plastic tape,
half lapped to give double thickness wrap, or use PVC coated steel conduits. Extend
wrapping three inches beyond each joint and three inches above finished floor.
C. Securing Conduit: Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during
concrete placement.
D. Spacing Conduit: Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete.
E. Protection: Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange
so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.
F. Large Conduits: Run conduit larger than 1 inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to
main reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
f-- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 7 900-9264
3.09 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which
conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes.
C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud
for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended.
D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper
square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction
will not permit or the device requires a larger box.
E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise
noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box.
F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Use cast fully adjustable floor boxes for
installations in slab on grade.
G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. Use cast outlet box in exterior
locations exposed to weather and wet locations.
H. Location of boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights _
indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings
in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required
to accommodate intended purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible
ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
I. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in
Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES.
J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from
ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to
allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
K. Fire Resistance: Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other
elements, using materials and methods specified.
L. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above
counters, benches, and backsplashes.
M. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and
similar devices.
N. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry
unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 8 " 900-9264
r
k
O. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting
box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24
inches separation in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and
partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel
bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box
r., without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
` P. Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not
fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes independently of conduit.
Q. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use
sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than
required by code where job conditions so indicate.
j" B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit
I. systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box
covers flush with finished surfaces for access.
r
3.11 IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate
the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of
the wiring contained.
B. Emergency Systems: Each pull and junction box serving emergency circuits shall be painted
red and shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box.
The label shall indicated the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained.
C. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate
the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A.,
Telephone, Data Cable, Etc.).
END OF SECTION
r-
r, LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 7 16110 - 9 900-9264